JP2021100707A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of easily switching over between a first state and a second state alternately.SOLUTION: When a game ball is sent out from a delivery port 821c to a receiving plane 844 of a seesaw member 840, a receiving plate 21872 of a rotary member 21870 receives the game ball. Thereby, the rotary member 21870 is rotated in a direction protruding its push-out plate 21873 above an inclined plane 845 and a discharge plane 846. Due to the rotation, a game ball rolling on the inclined plane 845 or the discharge plane 846 is pushed out by the push-out plate 21873 to be discharged into a discharge port 821d. As the result, the game ball rolling on the inclined plane 845 or the discharge plane 846 can be made easily to be discharged quickly to the discharge port 821d. Accordingly, a time when a second state is formed is made short, thereby an alternate switching-over between a first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 163

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and the weight of the game ball is applied to the first state in a no-load state. Then, there is a gaming machine that forms the second state, respectively (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-283136

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a plurality of gaming balls are continuous, the first state and the second state cannot be switched alternately.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily switching between a first state and a second state.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a seesaw member whose one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is in a no-load state. Then, the first state is formed in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis, so that one end side is raised and the other end side is raised. It forms a lowered second state, and includes a discharge means that facilitates discharge of the game ball placed on the other end side of the rotation shaft.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1. In the gaming machine according to claim 1, the discharging means is provided on a shaft support portion rotatably supported by a shaft and one side of the shaft support portion, and from the guide means. When a receiving portion that receives the guided game ball and an extruded portion that is disposed with respect to the receiving portion with the shaft support portion interposed therebetween are provided, and the receiving portion receives the game ball guided by the guiding means. The extruded portion is projected toward the other end side of the seesaw member by rotation about the shaft support portion.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the discharging means is pivotally supported by the seesaw member with the shaft support portion rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the containment body. (A) is a side view of the housing in the direction of arrow XVIIIa of FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the housing in the direction of arrow XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st rotating body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body. It is a side schematic view of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side schematic view of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. (A) is a front view of the central rotating unit in the state of being arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotating unit in the state of being arranged in the overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central rotating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. (A) is a front view of the connected displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connected displacement member in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a side view of the connected displacement member of FIG. 32 (a). It is sectional drawing of the connection displacement member in the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. (A) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the connected displacement member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the connected displacement member in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). It is a figure. (A) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the first displacement member, and (b) is a front view of the front base and the first displacement member in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 3C is a schematic side view, and FIG. 40C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the first displacement member in the XLc-XLc line of FIG. 40A. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is sectional drawing of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the XLVIII portion of FIG. 47 (c), and FIG. 48 (b) is the first displacement member in the direction of arrow XLVIIIb of FIG. 48 (a). It is a side view of the second displacement member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device. (A) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning apparatus in the line LIIa-LIIA of FIG. 51. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device in line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 52 (a), and FIG. 52 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device in line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 52 (b). It is a rear schematic diagram of a winning device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board which partially enlarged the LVI part of FIG. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board which partially enlarged the LVI part of FIG. It is a front perspective view of a center frame. It is a front view of the region forming part. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a region forming portion on the LX-LX line of FIG. 59. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 4th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a top view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a top view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. (A) to (c) are schematic front views of the right-handed rotating unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are schematic front views of the right-handed rotating unit according to the sixth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 8th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of a guide part. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit in tenth embodiment. (A) is a front view of the cage, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage on the CXVIIb-CXVII line b of (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the cage on the CXVIIc-CXVIIc line of (a). It is sectional drawing of a cage. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit in eleventh embodiment. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the left rotation unit in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base in the line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base in the line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the front base and the displacement side engaging member. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the left rotation unit in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotating unit in a state where the second displacement member is arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross section of the left rotating unit in the CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line of (a). It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the left-handed rotating unit in a state where the second displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the left-handed rotating unit in the CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base on the CXLIb-CXLIb line in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the left rotation unit in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base on the CXLIVb-CXLIVb line in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the front base (opening) and the displacement side engaging member. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the left rotation unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a top surface schematic view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the back base and the displacement side engaging member. It is an exploded perspective view of the right-handed rotation unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 19th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning apparatus in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning apparatus in the 21st embodiment. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning apparatus in the 22nd embodiment. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning apparatus. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning apparatus. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device. (A) is a front view of the rotation axis, and (b) is a side view of the rotation axis in the direction of the arrow CLXXIb of (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa line in FIG. 172 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb line in FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device according to the 25th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa line in FIG. 176 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb line in FIG. 176 (a). ) Is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc line in FIG. 176 (b), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId line in FIG. 176 (b).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning opening 640, a third winning opening 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the plastic ball flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 has won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. And the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The time is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the closed state (closed state). Compared to the case where the ball is in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, the ball is more likely to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that the opening times of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are not changed or are opened during the probability change or the time reduction. In addition to changing the time, the change may be made to increase the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened at one time more than usual. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. At least one of the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened may be changed in a certain time and one time. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, or the first per hit. The electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 may not be opened the number of times, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of any one of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82, and the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is displayed. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing, and a sphere of a first through gate 66 and a second through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol with passing as a trigger is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400, and the left-right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 overhangs into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It is made visible through the part.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device has a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. Is a variable display that alternately lights and lights for a predetermined time. When it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the pachinko machine 10 draws a winning lottery. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 is attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment). The 1 electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. be able to. Therefore, during the probability change and the time saving, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82.

It should be noted that during the probability change or the time reduction, the probability of hitting is increased, or the probability of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are increased for each hit, or the number of times of opening is increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the time reduction, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the spheres have passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held spheres is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol. It is also lit and displayed on the hold lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembling position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. Further, a third winning opening 82 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. As a result, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. , But the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 is three, and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. May be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the ball can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

Further, a second electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a is displayed. The open state (enlarged state) is set, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the third winning opening 82.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a is also longer than during the normal period. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is high even in a low probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is the same in the state. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball goes to the first winning opening 64 when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is set higher than when winning a prize. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a as in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the ball can always win a prize. It is in a state.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning opening 64 without an electric accessory (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64. It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of big hit lottery and aim to be a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 is likely to be in an open state, and the third winning opening 82 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the third winning opening 82 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to open the second electric accessory 82a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the third winning opening 82.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

Not limited to the above-described form, either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 may draw a winning lottery for a symbol different from the second symbol when the ball passes through. The second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 or the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state by the lottery of the symbol. In this case, since the symbols drawn by the ball passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are different, the electric accessory that the ball passes through and opens the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. Will be selected one by one.

As a result, for example, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit to the right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is drawn. When a hit is selected in the lottery of 2 symbols, the 2nd electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is hit to the left and passed through the 1st through gate 66, a symbol different from the 2nd symbol is drawn and the 2nd symbol is drawn. When a hit is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, the first electric accessory 640a can be opened in a gaming state.

Therefore, if the game state is such that the lottery of the second symbol is easy to win during the probability change, and the game state is such that a symbol different from the second symbol is easy to win during the time reduction, right-handed during the probability change and the second through gate 67 In a gaming state where it is easy to win a ball by opening the second electric accessory 82a by passing through, and during a short time, hit left to pass through the first through gate 66 and open the first electric accessory to win the ball. You can make the game state easy to play. Therefore, the gaming states during normal, time saving, and probabilistic change can be set to different gaming states, so that the player can enjoy each gaming state.

In addition, when the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, if the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, it is different from the second symbol. When a symbol is drawn and a lottery of a symbol different from the second symbol is selected, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and when the ball is left-handed to pass through the first through gate 66, the second symbol is passed. Is drawn, and when a hit is selected for the second symbol, the second electric accessory 82a can be opened in a gaming state.

In this case, regardless of the probability change or the time reduction, when the ball passes through the second through gate 67 by hitting the right, the first electric accessory is released and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 by hitting left, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and the ball can be put into a gaming state in which it is easy to win a prize in the third winning opening 82. Therefore, the player needs to change the way of hitting from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to change the way of hitting the player at any time, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 64, and the third winning opening 82 becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variable time) is set. After that, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to display the jackpot. Occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. , The left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the rotating body elevating unit 300 is arranged in the lowered position, and the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 are arranged in the overhanging position. The state in which the body elevating unit 300 is arranged in the ascending position and the center rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 are arranged in the retracted position is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 210, a rotating body elevating unit 300 emits light upward. The decoration unit 400 and the central rotation unit 500 are arranged, and the right rotation unit 600 and the left rotation unit 700 are arranged on the left and right respectively.

The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one side (left front side of FIG. 6) is opened by each of these wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a box-shaped accommodating body 330 in which a plurality of units (three in the present embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality of rotating body elevating units 300 (two in the present embodiment) accommodating each of the accommodating bodies 330. ) (1st rotating body 340a and 2nd rotating body 340b) are mainly provided.

The plurality of housings 330 are independently formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, at the ascending position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Will be done.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotatably supported by the accommodating body 330, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by the rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let me. The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three outer peripheral surfaces.

In the present embodiment, the drive sources of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are shared by the drive motor 350 of 1, and while the component cost can be reduced, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340a and the second rotating body can be reduced. The combination of the figures of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine types of combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). The details will be described later.

The light emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light emitting device 420 arranged in the central portion of the base body 410, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 421 arranged inside the light emitting device 420. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to be irradiated), the effect of light emission is performed. The details will be described later.

The central rotation unit 500 includes a back surface base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 whose base end side is rotatably supported by the back surface base 510, and is arranged on the back surface side of the light emitting decoration unit 400. The pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the overhanging position (see FIG. 7) protruding into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the back side of the light emitting decoration unit 400 so as to be invisible to the player. It is rotated to and from the retracted position (see FIG. 8). The details will be described later.

The right-handed rotating unit 600 includes a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) arranged in front of the front base 315 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and a displacement in which the base end side is rotatably supported by the base body. A member (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640) is provided. On the other hand, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) arranged on the front surface of the front base 317 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and the base end side is rotatably supported by the base body. A displacement member (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640) is provided. Each displacement member has an overhang position (see FIG. 7) overhanging into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and a retracted position (see FIG. 7) that is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player. (See FIG. 8). The details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 60, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22.

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit 300. Further, FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for raising and lowering the central housing body 330, and a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R for raising and lowering the left and right housing bodies 330, respectively. It is formed from 3 units of. The left unit 300L is superposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby the three accommodating bodies 330 are arranged side by side in the width direction.

Here, the detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C is provided on the front side of the front base 311 having an L-shape in front view, the front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the back base 311 and the front side of the front base 312. The drive motor 320 to be arranged, the accommodating body 330 which is raised and lowered with respect to the rear base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, and the first rotating body 340a and the first rotating body 340a accommodated in the accommodating body 330. It mainly includes a two-rotating body 340b and a transmission mechanism accommodated between the facing surfaces of the rear base 311 and the front base 312 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the accommodating body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and geared on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member, and the rack gear 324 are arranged on one side and the accommodating body 330 is arranged on the other side. It includes a connecting member 325 to be installed.

A pair of shafts are projected from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. Further, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the connecting members 325 (rack gear 324) are arranged by these slide guides 351 and 352. ) And the housing 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 325 and the housing body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into a linear motion of the rack gear 324. With the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the housing body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion in which the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically elongated portion in which the accommodating body 330 is arranged by the horizontally elongated portion between the lower end sides thereof. It is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the central accommodating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position while the left accommodating body 330 is arranged in the descending position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. , It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

The slide guide 351 is a linear guide including a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back surface base 311 and a sliding body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, which will be described later. Further, the slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail fixed to the back base 311 and the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the accommodating body 330, and the first rail and the second rail of both. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism including an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left accommodating body 330 is juxtaposed on the side of the central accommodating body 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) is correspondingly increased. ) The dimensions become longer. Further, as described above, in order to avoid visual recognition from the player, a horizontally long portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape in front view, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central housing 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central accommodating body 330, the central accommodating body 330 is arranged in the raised position. However, the extended slide guide 352 regulates the swing in the left-right direction, and the posture of the central housing body 330 can be stabilized. On the other hand, in the state where the central housing body 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L has a rear base 313 formed vertically in front view and arranged in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313 thereof. The intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, the front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, the drive motor 320 arranged on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and the driving force of the drive motor 320. The housing body 330 that is raised and lowered with respect to the bases 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b that are housed in the housing body 330, and the housing bodies 313 to 315 are housed between the facing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 320 to the housing body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L is a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and geared on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member, and a connecting member 326 for connecting the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

A shaft is projected from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on this shaft. Further, a shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole and rotatably supported.

A slide guide 351 is arranged in a vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14) on the front surface of the rear base 313, and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. .. Further, a guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. A guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is extended in the guide plate 353 in the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the housing body 330 is provided through the collar C in the guide groove 353a. It is inserted. Therefore, the housing body 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the housing body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 becomes a linear motion of the rack gear 324. It is converted, and the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 along with the linear motion of the rack gear 324 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L has a rear base 316 formed in a substantially L shape on the front surface and connected to the right end portion of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and a rear base 316 thereof. The front base 317 overlapped on the front side of the rear base 313, the drive motor 320 arranged on the front side of the front base 317, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 raises and lowers the rear base 316 and the front base 317. The accommodating body 330 is accommodated between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330, and the facing surfaces of the rear base 316 and the front base 317, and accommodating the driving force of the drive motor 320. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism that transmits to the body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R is a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a flat plate member meshed with the pinion gear 323. It includes a rack gear 324 formed as a rack with teeth cut on the side surface, and a connecting member 327 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing body 330.

A shaft is projected from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is arranged in a vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16) on the front surface of the rear base 316, and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. .. Further, in the front base 316, a guide groove 316a which is an elongated hole-shaped opening is extended along the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the housing body 330 is collared in the guide groove 316a (FIG. It is inserted via (not shown). Therefore, the housing body 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316a of the back base 316. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 327 and the housing body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the rack gear 324 has a linear motion. Along with the linear motion, the housing body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the lateral width dimension of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central accommodating body 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surfaces of the left accommodating body 330 and the right accommodating body 330, the lateral widths of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). The dimensions can be shortened (in the left-right direction) to increase its rigidity. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the left and right accommodating bodies 330 (make it difficult to swing in the left-right direction).

Along with this, it is not necessary to dispose a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right accommodating bodies 330, and the guide plate 353 or the guide grooves 353a, 316a of the back base 316 guide the guide plate 353 or the back base 316. Therefore, the posture can be sufficiently stabilized. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the accommodating body 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the housing body 330. 18 (a) is a side view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIa of FIG. 17, and FIG. 18 (b) is a front view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). Is. In addition, in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B, the state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the accommodating body 330 is arranged on the inner surface side of the base 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 arranged on the left and right sides of the base 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition wall body 334 and the decorative body 335 arranged on the front surface of the base 331 are provided, and the respective parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

The base 331 is a member forming the back surface (back side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (upper side and lower side in FIG. 18B) of the housing body 330, and is a combination of three plate-shaped members. Is formed integrally. A reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is arranged on the front surface of the portion forming the back surface of the accommodating body 330.

The reflective portion RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that projects at least in the vertical direction from the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18 (b)).

The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members forming the left and right side surfaces of the housing body 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are bored at two positions, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which the fixed shaft 341 described later of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is inserted, and holds the fixed shaft 341 non-rotatably. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape obtained by removing one of the inner peripheral surfaces of the holding holes 332a and 333a, which are partitioned by connecting two points on the circumference of the circular shape with a straight line.

The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332, and a transmission gear 352 and an intermediate gear 354 are rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332. Further, the partition body 334 is provided with insertion holes 334a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 at two locations.

The decorative body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in the shape of a front view frame by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The housing body 330 formed in this way is driven by a drive motor 350 arranged on the partition body 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 350, and a second rotating body 340b. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and a detection mechanism that detects the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 is a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 meshed with the drive gear 351 in this order. It is equipped with a gear train consisting of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is fixed to each of the axial end faces.

Here, the detailed configuration of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different. Therefore, in the following, the first rotating body 340a is a representative example. The description of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 rotatably supported at both ends (shaft portion 341a) of the fixed shaft 341 in the axial direction, and a pair of end face plates 342 thereof. It mainly includes three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) erected between the end face plates 342.

The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341b and shaft portions 341a connected to both ends of the body portion 341b in the axial direction. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side wall bodies 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing body 330, and connects a pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and a pair of shaft portions 341a. It is provided with a body portion 341b to be formed.

The shaft portion 341a has a shape in which the vertical cross-sectional shape of the shaft is formed by removing one of the circular shapes obtained by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape in which a part of the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder is chamfered by a flat surface). The shape is similar to that of the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall bodies 332 and 333. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be held in the accommodating body 330 (side wall bodies 332 and 333) so as not to rotate.

A plurality of (4 in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be applied to the inner surfaces of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C.

In this case, in the state where the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held non-rotatably, the body portion 341b sets the irradiation direction of the LED 344 to the front surface of the accommodating body 330 (decorative body 335). The opening 335a and FIG. 18B are arranged in a posture (rotational position) toward the front side of the paper surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display board arranged on the front surface (“visual position” described later) of the housing body 330 among the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. it can.

Since the fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends open in the axial direction, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed and the wiring is routed by utilizing the internal space. It can be pulled out of the housing 330 through the opening at the directional end. Further, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 is made non-rotatable with respect to the housing body 330, so that even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force of twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342a having a circular axial cross section is formed in the center thereof. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341. As a result, the end face plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing body 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

Here, since the body portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft portion 341a, the end face plate 342 is formed between the side wall bodies 332 and 333 of the housing body 330 and the body portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. The second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342 of the second rotating body 340b, but the mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are plate-shaped members having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and are paired by connecting the outer edges of both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342. It is erected between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular columnar body together with the end face plate 342.

A figure is drawn on the outer surface of each of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, when the triangular columnar body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the display boards 343A to 343C are made visible to the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

At least a part of the outer surface of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as will be described later, even if there is a deviation of a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotation position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, each display board 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of the ~ 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

In the present embodiment, in the axial view of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise ends of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward. The central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. As a result, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. Further, the radius of the arc of the arcuate portion formed by being curved is a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each display board 343A to 343C (for example, twice or more and four times). The following) is set.

Here, in the following, the front surface of the accommodating body 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B) is used as the arrangement position of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular columnar body is rotated. The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "visual position", and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the housing 330 (base 331). The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface becomes invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visible position, the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). .. When the triangular columnar body is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is arranged in the visible position, and the second display plate 343B or the third display is displayed. The other side of the plate 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at the shielding positions.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C have a transmitting portion PN through which light can be transmitted. Is formed in preparation for a part. Further, on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is arranged.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position where the inner surface of the display board arranged at the visible position among the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in a state where the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transmissive portion PN of each display board 343B, 343C and directly viewed by the player. Can be made to.

On the other hand, in the state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. After transmitting the light through the transmitting portion PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, the light is reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base 331 of the housing 330, and the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base 331. It can be indirectly visually recognized by the player.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at the rotating position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the base 331 of the housing body 330 is visually recognized. It is possible to remind the player of the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. Thereby, the player can expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a is rotated to a position where the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C can be visually recognized.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflecting plate is accompanied by the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (display boards 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (vertical spacing in FIG. 18B), or The apparent diameter of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) can be increased or decreased, and the outer surfaces (display plates 343A to 343C) of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b face each other with respect to the reflecting plate RF. The angle can be changed. That is, as the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate, the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmitting portion PN is visually recognized as the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base 331. The mode (for example, the size of the area where the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

It will be described back to FIG. 17 and FIG. The detection mechanism is a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362 having a diameter. A terminal gear 363 having a detected plate 363a projecting outward in the direction and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detected plate 363a of the terminal gear 363 are provided.

The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the substrate 331 with the detection region arranged on the movement locus of the plate to be detected 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detected plate 363a. That is, the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position) based on the detection result of the sensor device 364.

Next, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both of these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. As a result, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Further, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite directions to those described above.

As a result, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b visually recognized by the player is changed in order. In this case, the combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b was limited to three sets in the conventional product.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally driven by the drive motor of 1, for example, the combination that can be formed is, for example, the first display plate 343A and the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a. The first combination of arranging the first display plate 343A of the two rotating bodies 340b at the display position, the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340b at the display position. There were only three sets of the second combination to be arranged, the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b to be arranged at the display position.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are independently rotated and driven by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations can be combined. It can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the cost of parts increases because two drive motors are required.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while limiting the number of drive motors 350 to only one, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, nine sets of combinations are quickly displayed by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotating positions without requiring perfect matching of the rotating positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. You can get it out. The combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 20 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are side schematic views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing the transition state when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. From (a) to FIG. 21 (e), No. 20 is shown in FIG. In the states shown as 1 to 5, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) show No. 20 in FIG. It corresponds to each of the states shown as 6 to 10.

In FIG. 20, as a combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position is indicated by the reference numeral “A” or “A ′”. The state in which the second display board 343B is arranged is represented by the code "B" or "B'", and the state in which the third display board 343C is arranged in the visual position is represented by the code "C" or "C'". Will be done.

For example, No. 20 in FIG. 10 In the state represented by "A, C'", the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions, respectively, and the first rotating body. From 340a, the figure drawn on the first display board 343A and from the second rotating body 340b, the figure drawn on the third display board 343C correspond to a state in which the player can visually recognize them.

Further, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C of the first rotating body 340a are referred to by reference numerals “A to C” to be second. The first display plates 343A to the third display plates 343C of the rotating body 340b are illustrated with reference numerals "A'to C'", respectively.

Here, in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to each is set to different values. In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b is rotated 108 degrees. It is formed to do.

No. 20 in FIG. As shown in 1 and FIG. 21 (a), from the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at the visible positions (No. 20 of FIG. 20). 1 "A', A", the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visible position, the No. 20 in FIG. 20 is displayed. As shown in 2 and FIG. 21B, the second rotating body 340b arranges the second display plate 343B in the visible position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, since the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees, there is a difference (deviation) of 12 degrees between the two rotating positions, but each rotating body 340a , 340b is difficult for a player who visually recognizes the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees from the direction perpendicular to the axis, and as a result, each second display plate of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of the 343B are each arranged at the visible position (the second combination is formed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward in the axial view of the fixed shaft 341. (That is, the surface on which the figure is drawn is curved along the rotation direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b). , It can be difficult to recognize the difference (deviation) in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

No. 20 in FIG. From the state shown in 2 and FIG. 21 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visible position, the No. 20 in FIG. 20 is displayed. As shown in 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. 20 in FIG. From the state shown in 4 and FIG. 21 (d), No. In the rotation of the section up to the state shown in 9 and FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a arranges the display boards 343A to 343C in the visible position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while the second rotating body 340a. The 340b is arranged at a position where its rotation position is deviated from the first rotating body 340a. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the deviation of the figure (combination is not established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

No. 20 in FIG. From the state shown in 9 and FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed in the visible position, FIG. No. 20 As shown in 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b arranges the third display plate 343C in the visible position. As a result, a third combination (No. 10 “C', A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

According to the present embodiment, even in the section where the deviation of the figure (combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20) is formed, the second rotation is performed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figures visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure will be combined in the third combination.

After that, it is substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 21 (a) of FIG. 20 to the state shown in No. 9 and FIG. 22 (e) of FIG. 20). By repeating the embodiment twice more, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

In this case, No. 20 in FIG. 11-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A', in FIG. 20) may be considered. B "), a fifth combination (No. 12" B', C "in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In addition, No. 20 in FIG. 21-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A', in FIG. 20) may be considered. C "), an eighth combination (No. 22" B', A "in FIG. 20) and a ninth combination (No. 30" C', C "in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is a plurality of gears (drive gears 351 to second gear 355). It is formed as a gear train composed of (five gears), and is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

As a result, the rotation period of the first rotating body 340a and the rotation period of the second rotating body 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired). Any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified to reduce component costs and improve durability and reliability, but each gear is always meshed. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse.

Therefore, for example, the section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which the table in FIG. 20 is advanced in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) and the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established) is formed. Then, after or immediately before the third combination (No. 10 “C', A” in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. It is possible to repeat a series of operations of returning to the direction (upward in FIG. 20), whereby it is possible to make the player expect the appearance of the third combination.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) appears. When it is necessary to move the table in FIG. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), in addition to revealing the ninth combination, the table in FIG. 20 is moved in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20). It is also possible to proceed to and reveal the ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is repeated once. As long as it is done, the desired combination of figures can be quickly revealed.

Here, in the case where the second rotating body 340b is rotated 60 degrees with respect to the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is the rotation of the first rotating body 340a. On the other hand, when it is set to "1 / integer" times), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (deviation) in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can be done. However, in this case, the maximum number of combinations of figures is three.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 11 in FIG. 20). 21 "A', C"), but in the remaining 6 combinations (2nd, 3rd, 5th, 6th, 8th and 9th combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body It is allowed that a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle occurs at the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be set to 9.

That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by the drive motor 350 of 1, if the number of figures that can be combined is set to 9, the rotation of the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotating body 340a. It is not achievable only by forming a transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotating body 340b and the second rotating body 340b as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, at the rotating positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. This is possible for the first time by allowing a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle to occur. As a result, it is possible to reduce the required number of drive motors 350 and reduce the product cost while improving the effect of the effect by increasing the number of possible combinations of figures.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) in which a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle occurs at the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In combination), the stop position for stopping the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B", No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A" in FIG. 20), FIG. 21 As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotating position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to make them inconspicuous.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 "C', A", No. 20 "C', B" and No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20). As shown in FIG. 22E, since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is preceded, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotation position whose phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotating position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d). For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 114 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to make them inconspicuous.

As described above, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, each accommodating body 300 is formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, and in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are mounted on the game board 13. It can be placed on the back of the player to make it invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b can be quickly made to appear at a required timing.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the combination of nine sets of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the 1-rotating body 340a and the 2nd rotating body 340b relatively many times, which increases the time.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging each of the housing bodies 300 in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player. Can be done. As a result, the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated to a predetermined rotation position in advance without being recognized by the player, and as a result, it is necessary. When the timing comes, each accommodating body 300 is placed in the ascending position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed, so that the desired combination can be quickly obtained. Can appear in.

It should be noted that the arrangement of each of the housing bodies 300 at the lowering position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, in a fluctuation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each of the housing bodies 300 is not arranged in the descending position, and each of them is not arranged. While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotating bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the lowering position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved to the descending position and made invisible to the player, the rotation time. The generated sound may cause the player to recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have been rotated in advance.

On the other hand, by rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the time of the operation of the predetermined operating means, it is possible to mix in the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Examples of the operating means include a payout device 133, a voice output device 226, and a ball launching unit 112a (see FIGS. 3 or 4). In the state where these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated due to the payout of the ball, the output of the sound, or the firing of the ball. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

In addition to or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b You may want to perform the pre-rotation of. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, so that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation can be focused accordingly. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the advance rotation of the body 340b.

Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. 23 is a front view of the light emitting decoration unit 400. Further, FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the light emitting decoration unit 400 has a horizontally long rectangular base body 410 in front view arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 210, and the width of the base body 410. A light emitting device 420 arranged on the front surface in the center of the direction, a light shielding member 430 covering the front surface of the light emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 covering the front surface of the light emitting device 430 and made of a light transmissive material The light emitting device 420, the light-shielding member 430, and the outer peripheral decorative bodies 450 and 460 that surround the cover member 440 are mainly provided.

A plurality of (15 in this embodiment) light emitting bodies (LED 421) are arranged on the front surface side of the light emitting device 420 in a state of being dispersed over the entire surface, and are formed so as to be able to irradiate the back surface of the light shielding member 430 with light. .. Here, the light-shielding member 430 includes a main body portion 431 formed of a light-shielding material (light-impermeable material) and a partition wall 432 erected from the front surface and the back surface of the main body portion 431.

In the main body 431 of the light-shielding member 430, openings 431a having a circular front view are formed at a plurality of locations (15 locations in the present embodiment). The plurality of openings 431a are arranged at positions corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 in the front view. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 421 can reach the back surface of the cover 440 through the opening 431a of the light-shielding member 430.

The partition wall 432 is formed in a front view ring shape having a diameter smaller than that of the main body portion 431, and is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 431. As a result, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is located on the outer peripheral side of the front view circular first space surrounded by the partition wall 432 and the front view substantially crescent-shaped first space. It is divided into two spaces.

By forming the partition by the partition wall 431 in this way, the outline of the light visually recognized from the cover member 440 can be clarified. That is, when only the LED 421 in the first space is emitted, the circular shape can be visually recognized, and when only the LED 421 in the second space is emitted, the crescent shape can be visually recognized.

Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. 26A is a front view of the central rotating unit 500 in a state of being arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 26B is a front view of the central rotating unit 500 in a state of being arranged in the overhanging position. .. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the central rotation unit 500 has a rear base 510 arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210 and a front surface superimposed on the front surface of the rear base 510. A base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 whose base end side is rotatably supported by the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and a drive motor 540 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member 530. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 540 to the displacement member 530.

Shaft support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotation shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed in the front surface of the back surface base 510 and the back surface of the front base 520, respectively. Further, a support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting the crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism is provided on the front surface of the back base 510.

The displacement member 530 is a member whose front surface on the tip side is decorated, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531, a connecting gear 532, and a crank groove 533. As described above, the rotating shaft 531 is a shaft that is pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 511 and 521 of the back base 510 and the front base 520, and is projected from the front and the back of the displacement member 530 on the proximal end side.

The connecting gear 532 is a gear that is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the displacement member 530 on the base end side with the rotation shaft 531 as the center of rotation. When one of the displacement members 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531, the connecting gear 532 transmits the rotation to the other connecting gear 532 to rotate the coupling gear 532. As a result, the other displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

The crank groove 533 is a linear groove in a front view through which the connecting pin 542a of the crank gear 542 described later of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted, and is one of the pair of displacement members 530 (left side of FIG. 27, FIG. 28). It is recessed in the back surface of the displacement member 530 (on the right side). As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connecting pin 542a, so that one of the displacement members 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and is meshed with the pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and the pinion 541. It mainly includes a crank gear 542. The crank gear 542 includes a connecting pin 542a that projects at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (support shaft 512) and is inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530.

According to the central rotation unit 500 configured in this way, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541, and when the crank gear 542 is rotated, the crank gear 542 Along with the rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, so that one (left side in FIG. 27, right side in FIG. 28) is displaced. The member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531 as the center of rotation. In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also rotated synchronously via the connecting gear 532. As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the overhanging position (see FIGS. 7 and 26 (a)) protruding into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the back surface of the light emitting decoration unit 400. It is rotatable between the retracted position (see FIGS. 8 and 26 (b)).

Next, the clockwise rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 600. Note that FIG. 31 shows a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 600 is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right-handed rotating unit 600 has a base body including a rear base 610 and a front base 620, and a first displacement displaceably arranged on the front side of the front base 620 of the base body. A drive motor 650, which generates a driving force for displacementing the members 630 and the second displacement member 640, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, and is arranged on the back surface of the rear base 610, and its drive. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 650.

A part of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 651, rack member 652, and second pinion 653) is housed between the facing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is provided on the back surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 is provided to define the moving direction of the rack member 652. A pair of insertion pins 622 inserted through the 652a are provided so as to project.

Further, the front base 620 has shaft support holes 624 and 625 having a circular front view formed through the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 to be rotatably supported. The front bases 620 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the width direction (short direction).

The shaft support hole 624 that pivotally supports the first displacement member 630 is on the opening side of the game board 13 (the overhang position side of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29) with respect to the shaft support hole 625 that pivotally supports the transmission member 654. Since it is arranged on the left side), as will be described later, at the overhanging position, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure an overhanging area overhanging to the opening side of the game board 13, while the retracting position. And between the overhanging positions, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630.

A ridge 626 and a bearing portion 627 are projected from the front surface of the front base 620. The ridge 626 is a horizontally long protrusion extending along the width direction of the front base 620, and has a substantially triangular cross section. The top of the ridge 626 is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 624 in the front view. When the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced, the tops of the ridges 626 can be brought into contact with each other, and as will be described later, as compared with the case where the front surface of the front base 620 is in contact with the entire surface. Therefore, the contact area can be reduced to suppress sliding resistance, and it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging due to rubbing on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting material.

On the left side of the front base 620 when viewed from the front (the left side of FIG. 29, that is, the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a formed by chamfering the side surface and the ridge line portion of the front surface is arranged. .. Therefore, as will be described later, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642) from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced when retracting to the retracted position (see FIG. 33).

The bearing portion 627 is formed as a tubular body concentric with the shaft support hole 624, and rotatably supports the rotating shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 together with the shaft support hole 624 on the inner peripheral surface thereof. From the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, the projecting portion 628 is formed so as to project outward in the radial direction toward the lower side of the front base 620. The protrusion 628 can regulate the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range and suppress the tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward. The details will be described later (see FIG. 40).

In the present embodiment, the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the back surface of the front base 620, and the first pinion 651 is placed between the facing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620 by utilizing the bearing recess 621. Can be held rotatably. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the parts cost and the assembly cost can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the back surface of the front base 620, the protruding portion 623 protrudes from the front of the front base 620 along with the recess. In the present embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the tip end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, the front-rear direction The second displacement member 640 may interfere with the protruding portion 623, and such interference is suppressed by the ridge 626. The details will be described later (see FIG. 39).

The transmission mechanism consists of a first pinion 651 mounted on the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 having teeth. A rack member 652 formed as a rack in which the rack gear to be combined is geared on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member is provided.

The rack member 652 includes two sliding grooves 652a having a long hole shape in the front view extending along the longitudinal direction thereof, and a pair of insertion pins 622 of the front base 620 are inserted into each of the sliding grooves 652a. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a defined state. That is, the rack member 652 is held so as to be linearly movable between the facing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620.

The transmission member 654 includes a rotating shaft 654a projecting from the back surface on one end side, a drive pin 654b projecting from the front surface on the other end side opposite to the rotating shaft 654a, and the rotating shaft 654a and the drive pin. It is provided with a recessed portion 654c formed by recessing between 654b in an arc shape in the front view, and the rotating shaft 654a is inserted into the shaft support hole 625 so that the shaft can rotate to the front side of the front base 620. Be provided.

The drive pin 654b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, which will be described later. The arc shape of the recessed portion 654c in the front view is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, a shape in which the bearing portion 627 can be accepted on the inner peripheral side thereof).

Therefore, while keeping the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 close to the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630, it is suppressed from interfering with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620, and the transmission member. The rotatable range of 654 can be increased. Therefore, as will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be displaced more greatly while reducing the size of the entire clockwise rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650, the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 via the linear motion of the rack member 652. By rotating the second pinion 653, the transmission member 654 is rotated about the shaft support hole 625 of the front base 620 as the center of rotation. As will be described later, by rotating the transmission member 654 and causing the drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, the displacement according to the shape of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b can be changed. Each of the 1 displacement member 630 and the 2nd displacement member 640 can be independently performed (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

On the back surface of the first displacement member 630, a rotating shaft 631, a support shaft 632, 633, and an abutting portion 634 are projected, and a first groove 635 is recessed. As described above, the rotating shaft 631 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 624 of the front base 620, and the first displacement member 630 is connected to the front base 620 via the rotating shaft 631 and the shaft support hole 624. It is rotatably supported. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the rotary shaft 631, thereby restricting the rotary shaft 631 from coming out of the shaft support hole 624.

The support shafts 632 and 633 are axial bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connected displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 via the support shafts 632 and 633, respectively.

A pair of abutting portions 634 are arranged around the rotation shaft 631 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. Between these pair of abutting portions 634, a protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is arranged in a state where the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620. Therefore, as will be described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 is brought into contact with the side surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620. As a result, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be regulated within a predetermined range.

The first groove 635 is a concave groove into which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is formed by being bent in a dogleg shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first groove 635 has an action section 635a extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630 and a first displacement while being curved in an arc shape having a concave rotation shaft 631 side. It includes a non-interference section 635b that extends along the width direction of the member 630 (that is, is formed in a shape that is concentric with the rotation shaft 631 and is formed in a shape that divides the ring shape). As will be described later, the action section 635a is a section that receives an action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere.

The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members, a driven member 641 and a connected displacement member 642. A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 in the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connecting groove 641c are formed in the one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction, respectively. The connecting displacement member 642 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

As described above, the shaft support hole 641a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the driven member 641 is first displaced via the support shaft 632. It is rotatably supported on the back surface of the member 630. A screw having a head diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the axial end surface of the support shaft 632, thereby restricting the support shaft 632 from coming out of the shaft support hole 641a. ..

The second groove 641b is a groove-shaped opening through which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641. In a state where the driven member 641 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the first displacement member 630, the second groove 641b is overlapped with the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted into the first groove 635 via the second groove 641b. The second groove 641b is formed as an action section that is acted on by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, as will be described later.

The connecting groove 641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed so that the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643.

A shaft support hole 642a is formed through the connecting displacement member 642, and a decorative portion 642b and an overhanging portion 642c are formed so as to project outward with the shaft support hole 642a interposed therebetween. Further, the connecting displacement member 642 is provided with a connecting pin 643 that protrudes toward the front surface side thereof.

As described above, the shaft support hole 642a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the connecting displacement member 642 is first displaced via the support shaft 633. It is rotatably supported on the back surface of the member 630. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 633, whereby the rotating shaft 633 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a.

As described above, the connecting pin 643 is inserted into the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 641, whereby the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642. That is, by rotating the driven member 641 with the support shaft 632 as the center of rotation, it is possible to form a rotation with the support shaft 633 of the connected displacement member 642 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the second displacement member 640 is divided into two parts, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driving member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected to each other by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is formed by being rotatably supported by the displacement member 640, the first displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) is utilized by utilizing the amplification effect of the link mechanism, as will be described later. The amount of relative displacement with respect to the member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Here, the detailed configuration of the connected displacement member 642 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32 (a) is a front view of the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. 32 (b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member 642 in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). Is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member 642 in the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa of FIG. 32 (a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that the overhanging portion 642c is formed on the side opposite to the decorative portion 642b with the shaft support hole 642a interposed therebetween. The overhanging portion 642c can play a role as a weight for balancing when and after lifting.

In this case, the overhanging portion 642c is formed so as to protrude from the decorative portion 642b on the front side (lower side in FIG. 32B) and can be brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630, which will be described later. As described above, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), the rattling of the connected displacement member 642 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed. Further, since the overhanging portion 642c has both a role as a weight and a role as a contact portion with the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the overhanging portion 642c, four side walls from four sides of the bottom wall forming the front side (the side facing the back surface of the first displacement member 630) of the connecting displacement member 642 are erected on the back side. , The back side is formed in an open box shape. Therefore, the weight and rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape. Therefore, as will be described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which the second displacement member 640 is invisible from the front) is ensured. At the same time, the function as a weight and the function of abutting on the first displacement member 630 and suppressing rattling can be surely exhibited.

The overhanging portion 642c is formed with a ridge 642c1 that protrudes from the bottom wall and extends along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a, and the top of the ridge 642c1 is a first displacement member. It is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the 630. Therefore, the sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire surface of the bottom wall of the overhanging portion 642c comes into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630.

The connecting pin 643 is formed of a metal material (brass material in this embodiment) and has a higher hardness than the resin material, and its rear end surface (upper surface in FIG. 32 (c)) is the back surface (that is, the back surface of the connecting displacement member 642) of the connecting displacement member 642. , The surface facing the front base 620) is embedded in the connecting displacement member 642 (insert molding).

In this case, the ridge 626 of the front base 620 extends along the displacement locus of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced, so that the top of the ridge 626 of the front base 620 extends. The rear end surface of the connecting pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact with the vehicle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fogging from being formed on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting resin material due to rubbing against the ridges 626 of the front base 620. Therefore, it is possible to continuously exert the effect of transmitting light through the connecting displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. 33 and 34 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 35 and 36 show the operation between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 600 in each state at the time of carrying out. Further, FIGS. 37 and 38 are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

33 (a) is shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a), FIG. 33 (b) is shown in FIGS. 35 (b) and 37 (b), and FIG. 33 (c) is shown in FIG. 35 (c) and FIG. 37 (c) are in the same state, respectively, FIG. 34 (a) is shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 38 (a), and FIG. 34 (b) is shown in FIG. 36 (b). ) And FIG. 38 (b) and FIG. 34 (c) are in the same state as in FIGS. 36 (c) and 38 (c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 33 (c) is the same as FIG. 34 (a), FIG. 35 (c) is FIG. 36 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is FIG. 38 (a). is there.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in an upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are in front of each other. It is arranged in front of the base 620.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (a)), the first groove 635 (working section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are second. The inner wall surface of the groove 641b is pushed in the overhanging direction (right side in FIG. 37 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that the inner wall surface is shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b). As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the working section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 640 is not displaced. It is displaced integrally with the member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the same as in the above-described case. In addition, the inner wall surface of the first groove 635 (working section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is projected in the projecting direction by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 (FIG. 37 (b)). It is pushed to the right side), whereby the first displacement member 630 is rotated around the rotation shaft 631 in the overhanging direction, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630.

After the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c) (that is, FIG. 34 (a)). ), The state shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 38 (a)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 becomes an action section 635a and a non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Is reached at the connection part of.

In the state shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c) (that is, FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a)), the first displacement member 630 When one of the abutting portions 634 of the pair of abutting portions 634 is brought into contact with one side surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the projecting direction is caused. Be regulated.

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (a)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a), and 38 (a), the transmission member 654 The drive pin 654b moves with respect to the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 along the non-interference section 635b without interfering with the inner wall surface thereof. As a result, the first displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 38 (a).

On the other hand, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 38 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that FIG. 34 (b) is shown. As shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in a direction for raising the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)). The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642 via the connection of the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643, and the connecting displacement member 642 lifts the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation ( It is rotated clockwise in FIG. 38 (b). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), the same as in the above-described case. In addition, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, whereby FIG. 34 (c) ), The first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the overhanging positions, as shown in FIGS. 36 (c) and 38 (c).

Contrary to the above case, the transmission member 654 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (c)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that the first displacement member 630 is shown in FIG. 38 (c). It is maintained in the indicated state (position).

On the other hand, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 38 (c)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, whereby FIG. 34 (b), As shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in the direction in which the connecting groove 641c is lowered (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)), and the connected displacement member. The 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is swung down (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), the case described above Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is swung down.

After the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), the states shown in FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a) (that is, FIG. 33 (c). ), The state shown in FIGS. 35 (c) and 37 (c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 becomes an action section 635a and a non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Is reached at the connection part of.

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c), and 37 (c), the first displacement occurs. The inner wall surface of the first groove 635 (working section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed in the upright direction (left side in FIG. 37C) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. As shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the upright direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the working section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 640 is not displaced. It is displaced integrally with the member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the same as in the above-described case. In addition, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the upright direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the starting ends of the working section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, whereby FIG. 33 (a). , The first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged in the retracted position as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a).

In the upright position shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), the other contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is the front base. By contacting the other side surface of the protrusion 628 of the 620, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the upright direction is restricted.

As described above, in the right rotation unit 600, the first displacement member 630 is in a posture in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped (superimposed) in the thickness direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 33 and 34). And since the second displacement member 640 is arranged on the front side of the front base 620, these first grooves 635 are compared with the case of the conventional product in which the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side in the same plane. And the plane space required for the arrangement of the second groove 641b (that is, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape (planar space) in the front view.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, it is required to increase the size of the display device (third symbol display device 81). However, even in this case, there is a relatively large margin in the thickness direction (front-back direction, for example, the vertical direction of the paper surface of FIGS. 10 and 11). Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a space in the thickness direction having a relatively large margin is used, the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 is small in the front view. It is possible to increase the size of the display device, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

Further, in the case where the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped with each other, the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 is transmitted to each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 by the drive pin 654b of 1. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to individually provide drive pins (transmission members) for each of the first groove and the second groove as in the conventional product. That is, the parts can be shared, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is formed by being rotatably supported by the support shafts 632 and 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplification effect of the link mechanism can be utilized. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, the relative displacement amount of the connected displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into a driven member 641 and a connected displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft that pivotally supports the driven member 641 and the connected displacement member 642. By arranging 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), the driven position is driven. It is possible to form a posture in which the member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are overlapped with each other.

As a result, the second displacement member 640 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (making it invisible to the player). Therefore, in the retracted position, not only can the outer shape of the right-handed rotating unit 600 be miniaturized in the front view (see FIG. 33A), but also when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the standing posture to the overhanging posture. (See FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c)), after the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the overhanging posture while hiding the existence of the second displacement member 640 (decorative portion 642b) from the player. The second displacement member 640 can be projected from the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c)), and it is possible to easily perform an effect that gives an impact to the player.

As described above, the operations of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33 (a) to the overhang position shown in FIG. 34 (c) are first described from FIG. 33 (a). As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) in the overhanging direction (that is, the collapse direction, referred to as the "first direction") as they are, and FIG. After the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped as shown in 33 (c) and 34 (a), the second displacement as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). It is an operation in which the connecting displacement member 642 of the member 640 displaces (rotates) the decorative portion 642b in a lifting direction (referred to as a "second direction"). That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

As a result, the inertial force accompanying the stop of the first displacement member 630, which has been displaced in the first direction, can be canceled by the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 starts the displacement in the second direction. As a result, a series of operations from the retracted position to the overhanging position can be smoothly performed, and not only the effect of the effect can be enhanced, but also the load on the parts due to the action of the inertial force is reduced to improve the durability. Can be planned.

In this case, in the present embodiment, since the weight of the first displacement member 630 is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, the overhang position shown in FIG. 34 (c) from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33 (a). In the operation of displacementing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, the heavy first displacement member 630 can be stopped first, and the lighter weight second displacement member 640 can be stopped last. As a result, the burden on the gears (first pinion 651, rack member 652 and second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) in the drive motor 650 and the transmission mechanism can be reduced.

That is, from the above-mentioned state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced in the overhanging direction (first direction) while being integrated (see FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c)), the first displacement member and the second displacement member 640 are displaced. 1 Displacement of the displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (second direction). The transition from the displaced state (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) is that the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 shifts from the working section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interfering section 635b. Therefore, the rotation of the gears (first pinion 651, rack member 652, and second pinion 653) in the drive motor 650 and the transmission mechanism can be continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped during the transition of such a state, the load on the gear of the drive motor 650 transmission mechanism due to the stop can be avoided.

On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (the first direction). The transition from the state of being displaced in two directions (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) to the state of stopping the second displacement member 640 (see FIG. 34 (c)) is the drive motor 650. And it is necessary to stop the rotation of the gears of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 651, rack member 652 and second pinion 653), and the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 is stopped is applied to the gears. However, since the only member to be stopped in this case is the second displacement member 640, which has a light weight, the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

Here, as described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is outwardly opposite to the decorative portion 642b with the portion (shaft support hole 642a) pivotally supported by the first displacement member 630 interposed therebetween. It is provided with an overhanging portion 642c formed by overhanging (see FIG. 32), and is formed so that the overhanging portion 642c can play the role of a weight.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated to lift the decorative portion 642b upward, the overhanging portion 642c is formed on the opposite side to the decorative portion 642b. Therefore, it is possible to easily lift the decorative portion 642b upward by utilizing the weight of the overhanging portion 642c. Therefore, it is possible to quickly lift the decorative portion 642b, enhance the effect of the effect, and suppress the driving force of the drive motor 650 required for the lifting operation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhanging portion 642c are suspended. As compared to the cantilevered state in which only the decorative portion 642b is formed, the decorative portion 642b can stabilize the lifted posture and is required to maintain that posture. The driving force of the driving motor 650 can be suppressed.

In this case, as described above, the overhanging portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that its bottom wall (convex 642c1, see FIG. 32) can be brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated), the overhanging portion 642c is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630, so that the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced. The rattling of the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be suppressed. Therefore, the posture of the decorative portion 642b at the time of displacement can be stabilized, the effect of the effect can be enhanced, and wear and breakage of the shaft support portion due to rattling can be suppressed.

Further, since the overhanging portion 642c also has a role of abutting on the first displacement member 630 and suppressing rattling in addition to the role as a weight, it is necessary to separately provide parts for both of these roles. It can be made unnecessary, and the structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Further, the overhanging portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed in a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). As a result, the weight and rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape of the overhanging portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, invisible to the player in front), and the connection displacement is formed. While ensuring that the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) is displaced, the overhanging portion 642c reliably exerts a function as a weight and a function of contacting the back surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress rattling. Can be made to.

Here, in the front base 620, as described above, the shaft support hole 624 that pivotally supports the first displacement member 630 is on the opening side (third) of the game board 13 with respect to the shaft support hole 625 that pivotally supports the transmission member 654. Since it is arranged on the overhang position side of the 1 displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member are arranged at the overhang position as shown in FIGS. 33 to 38. While the overhanging area of the 640 can be secured toward the opening side of the game board 13, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 while being displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position.

In this case, as described above, the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that pivotally supports the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 is shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38. As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, it is formed so as to be in contact with the bearing portion 627, so that the second displacement member 640 is relative to the first displacement member 630. The rotation can be regulated within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654, which has the role of transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 650, can also serve as a stopper that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the bearing portion 627 is a portion for raising the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in a superposed position (FIG. 6). 29), the rigidity is relatively high, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side thereof. As shown in FIG. 38 (c), the transmission member 654 is brought into contact with the bearing portion 627. Therefore, the rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used. It can be changed.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 654 is provided with a recessed portion 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the second When the displacement member 640 is extended to the overhanging position, the bearing portion 627 is formed so as to be acceptable in the recessed portion 654c, so that the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be secured accordingly. In other words, while securing the movable range of the transmission member 654, the position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 can be brought close to the bearing portion 627, so that the outer shape of the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed and FIG. 37 And as shown in FIG. 38, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (ie, while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the overhang position. , A state in which it is invisible to the player in front) can be easily formed.

As described above, the front base 620 is formed so as to be inclined by chamfering the side surface and the front ridge line portion on the left side of the front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side of FIG. 33C). An inclined surface 620a is arranged. Therefore, the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) in the direction of lowering the decorative portion 642b from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c), and after the state shown in FIG. 34 (b), the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) is displayed. When forming, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced. Similarly, from the state shown in FIG. 33 (c), the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position integrally with the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 33 (b) shows. Even when the state shown in FIG. 33A is formed through the state shown in FIG. 33A, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with its rotation shaft 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is arranged on the first displacement member 630, and the weight is increased. The first displacement member 630 is liable to sway in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 33) (that is, sway in the direction in which the connection displacement member 642 is moved closer to the front base 620), and the connection displacement member 642 It is easy to be locked to the side surface of the front base 620. Therefore, a configuration in which the inclined surface 620a is provided on the front base 620 is particularly effective.

Further, as described above, the front base 620 includes ridges 626 that protrude from the front surface and extend along the displacement direction (rotational direction) of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 37, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, only the top of the ridge 626 is the second displacement member 640. Can be contacted with. Therefore, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the second displacement member 640. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

Here, the relationship between the ridge 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. 39 (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. 39 (b) is the front base 620 in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the connection displacement member 642.

As described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter or the display device can be transmitted to enhance the decorative effect. On the other hand, since the connecting displacement member 642 is a member arranged facing the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), shaking and rattling occur when the second displacement member 640 is displaced. As a result, it comes into contact with the front surface of the front base 620. In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the connecting displacement member 642, cloudiness is formed on the connecting displacement member 642 due to rubbing against the front surface of the front base 620, and the light transmission is impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ridge 626 is formed on the front surface of the front base 620, and only the top of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact with the connecting displacement member 642. Fogging (a portion where light transmission is impaired) due to rubbing formed on the connected displacement member 642 can be partially suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, in the second displacement member 640, a metal connecting pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is provided on the connecting displacement member 642. The ridge 626 of the front base 620 is integrated with the first displacement member 630 and follows the trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (see FIGS. 33, 35 and 37). Will be extended.

As a result, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface (the surface on the right side of FIG. 39B) of the connecting pin 642 hits the top of the ridge 626. Can be touched. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connecting displacement member 642 from the top of the ridge 626 can be applied to the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on the other parts of the connecting displacement member 642 can be weakened by that amount. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging on the other portion of the connecting displacement member 642 due to rubbing against the ridge 626, and to prevent the function of transmitting the light from being impaired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the function of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 will be described. 40 (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front base in the direction of arrow XLb of FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 40 (c) is a schematic side view of the 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 in the XLc-XLc line of FIG. 40 (a).

As shown in FIG. 40, the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that rotatably supports the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 630 is placed in front of the front base 620 by the height of the bearing portion 627. Since the bearing is supported in a raised state, a space for arranging the second displacement member 640 can be formed between the front surface of the front base 620 and the back surface of the first displacement member 630. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be superposed on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

As described above, the front base 620 includes an overhanging portion 628 formed so as to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 is projected from the back surface thereof. The contact portion 634 is provided, and the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the protrusion 628 of the front base 620, so that the relative rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 is within a predetermined range. Can be regulated within.

In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is erected from the front of the front base 620 as a large-diameter cylindrical body to increase its rigidity and form a dead space on the outer peripheral side. The first displacement is formed by projecting the projecting portion 628 from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 toward the outside in the radial direction, and abutting the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 with the projecting portion 628. The rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be ensured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 40A) portion of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size including the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 in the front view. That is, the front surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 (the front side surface of the paper surface in FIG. 40A) is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. As a result, rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced and tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40C) can be suppressed.

Further, in addition to the role of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 as a stopper that receives the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 on its side surface and regulates the relative displacement, the back surface of the first displacement member 630 is mounted on the front surface thereof. Since it is possible to combine the roles of receiving and suppressing rattling and tilting, it is not necessary to separately provide the parts for both of these roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with its rotation shaft 631 (bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum, and the first displacement member 630 has a second displacement member 630. Since the displacement member 640 is arranged and the weight is increased, the first displacement member 630 is likely to shake in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 40 (a)). The swing in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 approaches the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow X in FIG. 40 (c)) is the front base 620 (convex 626) of the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642). Although it can be regulated by contacting the top), the swing of the first displacement member 630 in the direction away from the front base 620 (in the direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40 (c)) cannot be regulated, and its own weight is as described above. Since it is bulky, it is likely to cause damage near the fulcrum. Therefore, a configuration in which the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress the forward swing (tilt) of the first displacement member 630 is particularly effective.

In this case, since the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 and is continuously provided in front of the front base 620, the rigidity of the protruding portion 628 can be increased. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 tilts forward (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40 (c)), the direction in which the tilt is supported (that is, the protruding portion 628 is the back surface of the first displacement member 630 and the front base 620. Since the rigidity in the direction of being sandwiched between the front surface and the front surface can be increased, the tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward can be effectively suppressed.

Next, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48. FIG. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. Further, FIG. 43 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the left rotation unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, the left rotation unit 700 is arranged so that the base body including the rear base 710 and the front base 720 and the base end side of the base body can be displaced on the front side of the front base 720. The first displacement member 730, the second displacement member 740 displaceably arranged on the tip side of the first displacement member 730, and the driving force for displaceting the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. A connecting member that connects the drive motor 750, which is arranged on the back surface of the rear base 710, the transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 750, and the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740. It mainly includes a connecting first member 760 and a connecting second member 770), and a cover body 780 that is laid down on the lower end side front surface of the front base 720.

A part of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 751, rack member 752, and second pinion 753) is housed between the facing surfaces of the back base 710 and the front base 720. On the back surface of the front base 720, a pair of insertion pins 722 to be inserted into the sliding groove 752a of the rack member 752 is provided so as to project in order to define the moving direction of the rack member 752.

Circular shaft support holes 723, 724, 725 are formed through the front base 720, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 and the transmission member 754 are formed in each of the shaft support holes 723, 724, 725. The rotary shaft 754a and the rotary shaft 761 of the connecting first member 760 are rotatably supported. Similarly, a front view circular shaft support hole 781 is formed through the cover body 780, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 781.

Further, a base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and a receiving recess 727 is recessed. The base-side engaging member 726 includes a base portion 726a erected from the front surface of the front base 720 and a bent portion 726b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 726a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. In the second displacement member 740, the engagement surfaces are formed so as to be engaged with each other with the displacement side engaging member 742 described later. As a result, as will be described later, the tilting of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720 in the forward direction can be suppressed (see FIG. 47).

The receiving recess 727 is a recess having a substantially rectangular shape in front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726, and is a recess of the bent portion 742b in the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740. By being formed with an opening area larger than the outer shape, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742 is formed so as to be acceptable. As a result, as will be described later, at the retracted position, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the front base 720 in the proximity direction can be allowed, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47 (c)).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 mounted on the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 are teeth. The rack member 752 is formed as a rack in which the rack gear to be combined is geared on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member.

The rack member 752 is provided with two sliding grooves 752a having a long hole shape in the front view extending along the longitudinal direction thereof, and a pair of insertion pins 722 of the front base 720 are inserted into each of the sliding grooves 752a. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a defined state. That is, the rack member 752 is held in a linear motion between the facing surfaces of the back base 710 and the front base 720.

The transmission member 754 includes a rotating shaft 754a projecting from the back surface on one end side, and a drive pin 754b projecting from the front surface on the other end side opposite to the rotating shaft 754a. By being inserted through the shaft support hole 724, the shaft is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. The drive pin 754b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a drive groove 762 described later in the first connecting member 760.

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750, the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 via the linear motion of the rack member 752. By rotating the second pinion 753, the transmission member 754 is rotated about the shaft support hole 724 of the front base 720 as the center of rotation.

When the transmission member 754 is rotated, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to drive the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770, as will be described later. .. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 via the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770. Can be displaced relative to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

The first displacement member 730 has a rotation shaft 731 projecting from one end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42) and a shaft on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 42) opposite to the rotation shaft 731. A support hole 732 is formed through the support hole 732, and an oval sliding groove 733 in front view is recessed on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, and a connecting pin 734 is projected. Further, an engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction and on the side of the shaft support hole 732.

As described above, the rotating shaft 731 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted into the shaft supporting hole 723 of the front base 720 and the shaft supporting hole 781 of the cover body 780, and the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is a shaft. By being inserted through the support holes 723 and 781, it is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. That is, the base end side of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780.

The shaft support hole 732 is a circular hole when viewed from the front, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740. The sliding groove 733 is a concave groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the end portion of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted. The connecting shaft 790 pivotally supports the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 so as to be relatively rotatable. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member 730 faces the front. It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

The connecting pin 734 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section inserted into the sliding groove 772 described later of the connecting second member 770, and is on an extension line extending the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 in the extending direction thereof. Is placed in. Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 are made to match. Can be done. That is, as will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the form of the relative displacement of the connecting second member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is defined as a linear motion (slide displacement). Can be done (see FIG. 45).

The engaged portion 735 is a portion formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 that projects to a position where it overlaps with the second displacement member 740 in the rear view. The side engaging member 742 (the engaging surface of the bent portion 742b) is formed so as to be engaged (see FIG. 48). As a result, as will be described later, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 48).

The second displacement member 740 is a flange member that is fastened and fixed to the end face of the rotary shaft 741 and the displacement side engaging portion 742 that protrude from the back surface thereof, the receiving recess 743 that is recessed in the back surface thereof, and the end face of the rotary shaft 741. 744 and.

As described above, the rotary shaft 741 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730, and the rotary shaft 741 is inserted into the shaft support hole 732 to form a first displacement member. The second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported on the distal end side of the 730 in the longitudinal direction. The flange member 744 is formed so that the base end side to be fastened and fixed to the rotary shaft 741 has a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 732, whereby the rotary shaft 741 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 732.

A connecting pin 744a is projected from the back surface of the flange member 744 at a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 741. The connecting pin 744a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a connecting groove 772 described later in the connecting second member 770. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is acted on by the connecting groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 to cause a second displacement. The member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

The displacement side engaging member 742 includes a base portion 742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. As described above, in the retracted position, the engaging surfaces are formed so as to be engaged with the displacement side engaging member 726 of the front base 720, and in the overhanging position, the first displacement member 730 is engaged. An engaging surface is formed so as to be engaged with the joint portion 735.

The receiving recess 743 is a recess having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742, and is based on the outer shape of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720. Is also formed to have a large opening area so that the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726 can be accepted. As a result, as will be described later, at the retracted position, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the front base 720 in the proximity direction can be allowed, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47 (c)).

A rotating shaft 761 is projected from the back surface of one end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42) of the first connecting member 760, and a sliding groove 762 is opened in a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, and the second connecting member 770 is formed. The connecting groove 771 and the sliding groove 772 are opened at one end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 42) and the central portion in the longitudinal direction, respectively.

The rotating shaft 761 of the connecting first member 760 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 725 of the front base 720, and the connecting groove 771 of the connecting second member 770 is connected to the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740. Pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction are pivotally supported by a connecting shaft 790 inserted into the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 so as to be relatively rotatable.

That is, one end side of the connecting first member 760 in the longitudinal direction is displaceably connected to the front base 720, and one end side of the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction is displaceably connected to the second displacement member 740. The connecting portion (connecting pin 790) between the other ends of the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730.

As a result, as will be described later, the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are first connected while enabling the relative displacement of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 and the relative displacement of the first displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720. It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 from being exposed at the overhanging position and impairing the appearance (see FIGS. 44 (c) and 45 c (c)).

As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted into the drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760, and the first displacement member 730 is inserted into the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770. Connecting pin 734 is inserted.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. 44 is a front view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIG. 45 is a front view of the left rotating unit 700 when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. Further, FIG. 46 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

Note that FIG. 44 shows a state in which the cover body 780 is omitted. In addition, FIG. 44 (a) is shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 46 (a), FIG. 44 (b) is shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (b), and FIG. 44 (c) is shown in FIG. It is in the same state as 45 (c) and FIG. 46 (c), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged in front of the front base 720. Will be set up.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (a)), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 is projected by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754. By being pushed in the direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with its rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation.

When the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to each other. When pushed in the overhanging direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)) by the 790, the first displacement member 730 has its rotation axis as shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b). It is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with 731 as the center of rotation.

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 770 in which the connecting first member 760 and the other ends are connected by the connecting shaft 790 is lowered (lower side in FIG. 46 (a)). ), And the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 771 of the connecting second member 770 pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, whereby FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730. ).

In this case, the connecting second member 770 has a connecting shaft 790 and a first displacement member 730 along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770. By sliding the connecting pins 734 of the above, linear motion (slide displacement) is performed along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (b)), and the connecting first member 760 is driven further. When rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46B) with the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 extends in the overhanging direction with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation, as in the case described above. (FIG. 46 (b) counterclockwise), and with respect to the first displacement member 730, the second displacement member 740 is in the first direction (FIG. 46 (b) clockwise) with its rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation. Relative displacement (relative rotation) to.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted and the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c). The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions, and a state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed.

Contrary to the above case, the transmission member 754 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (c)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c). When driven, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 is pushed in the retracting direction (right side in FIG. 46C) by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754, so that the connection first member 760 is moved. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46C) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation.

When the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the connecting shaft 790 that connects the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770. By pushing in the retracting direction (right side of FIG. 46 (c)), the first displacement member 730 moves the rotating shaft 731 as shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b). It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46C) as the center of rotation.

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 770 in which the connecting first member 760 and the other ends are connected by the connecting shaft 790 is moved upward (upper side in FIG. 46 (c)). It is pushed up, and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 pushes up the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, whereby FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and FIGS. As shown in 6 (b), the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730. ).

From the states shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)), and the connecting first member 760 is moved. When the rotation shaft 761 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46B) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 46 (b) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. 46 (b) clockwise), and the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with its rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation. It is displaced (relatively rotated).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the start end of the movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected and the first displacement member 730 is erected as shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a). The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and a state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized.

As described above, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 includes connecting members (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) for connecting the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the second displacement member 730 is displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the first displacement member 730 as the first displacement member 730 is displaced (rotated). ) Can be done.

In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is erected between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 is displaced in the direction in which the first displacement member 730 projects and is separated from the front base 720 (extension direction). Then, the connecting member is exposed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 and becomes visible to the player, so that the appearance is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members, a connecting first member 760 and a connecting second member 770, and one end of the connecting first member 760 in the longitudinal direction is connected to the front base 720. The other end of the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction is connected to the second displacement member 740, and the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and the connection thereof. Since the portion (connecting shaft 790) is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730, even if the first displacement member 730 is displaced from the front base 720 in the direction of being separated (overhanging direction), the connecting member (Connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

In this case, as described above, the connecting second member 770 is held by the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear motion (slide displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member The amount of displacement (rotation angle) at which the 730 is displaced (rotated) in the direction (overhanging direction) in which the 730 projects from the front base 720 and is separated from the front base 720 is large (that is, the displacement amount of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770). Even in the case of (need to be increased), it is possible to prevent the connecting second member 770 from being visually recognized by the player by maintaining the state of being hidden behind the first displacement member 730. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

Here, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 740 is provided with a light emitting body (not shown), and an electric connection line W for supplying electric power to the light emitting body is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See FIG. 45). In this case, the connecting line W is introduced from the opening formed in the back surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitting body. Therefore, the connecting line W is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. Therefore, when the connecting member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, the connecting member may interfere with each other and damage the connecting line W.

In this case, as described above, the connecting member (connecting second member 770) is arranged on the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear motion (slide displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. , It is possible to prevent the connecting second member 770 from interfering with the connecting line W. Therefore, even if a large space for wiring the connection line W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730) is not secured, interference with the connection second member 770 can be avoided. The space for arranging the line W can be reduced, and the front view shape (particularly, the dimension in the width direction) of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

Here, if the above-mentioned connecting members (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) are provided, the driving force of the drive motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730). Even in the case of providing a drive groove and connecting the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 to the drive groove), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can perform the same operation as described above. it can.

However, in the case of this configuration, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is increased in size. That is, the connecting member needs to connect the connecting portions of the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable. It is arranged between the facing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720. Therefore, when a drive groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove, the transmission member 754 and the connecting member (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) are connected. It is necessary to provide a drive groove in the first displacement member 730 at a position that does not overlap with the displacement locus of the connecting member in order to avoid the interference of the above. Therefore, it is necessary to make the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 a size (area) including both the displacement locus of the connecting member and the drive groove, and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is correspondingly large. Increase in size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive groove 762 is provided in the connection first member 760, and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to drive the drive motor 750. Is provided to the connecting first member 760, so that the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be miniaturized.

That is, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the transmission member 754 and the connecting member (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds only to the displacement locus of the connecting member. The size (area) may be set, and it is not necessary to set the size (area) including the drive groove. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

Next, the engaging action of the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 700 for explaining the engaging action of the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XLVIIa-XLVIIa of FIG. 45 (a). To do.

Note that FIG. 47 (a) shows a state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. The state in which the displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position is shown in the figure. Further, FIG. 47 (c) shows a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in a direction close to the front base 720 in FIG. 47 (b).

As described above, the base side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement side engaging member 742 is projected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and these base side engaging members 742 are projected. The engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 are arranged in a posture in which their open sides (tip side of the bent portion 726b) face each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracting direction (upper side of FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bent portions 726b of each other , 742b can be made to enter the inner surface side of the other bent portions 726b and 742b, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted positions as shown in FIG. 47 (b). And the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is erected between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement are located at a position relatively distant from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. The member 740 is connected by the connecting member. Therefore, in the retracted position, even if the first displacement member 730 tries to tilt the tip portion (that is, the second displacement member 740) opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in the direction (forward) away from the front base 720, the front surface. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the connecting member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740.

However, in the present embodiment, the longitudinal end of the connecting second member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, while the longitudinal end of the connecting first member 760 is relatively to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. It is connected to the front base 720 at a close position. Therefore, in the retracted position, the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 becomes the base end (fulcrum), and the tip portion on the opposite side of the rotating shaft 731 (that is, the second displacement member 740 side) becomes the free end. In this state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the upright posture. Therefore, the first displacement member 730 has a free end due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member 740 (the side opposite to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, that is, the second displacement member 740 side). ) Is easily tilted in the direction away from the front base 720 (front, right side in FIG. 47 (b)).

On the other hand, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged in the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the second displacement member is attached to the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720. Since the displacement side engaging member 742 of the 740 can be engaged, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) on the opposite side of the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is separated from the front base 720 (forward, It is possible to suppress tilting to the right side of FIG. 47 (b).

The displacement side engaging member 742 may be projected from the back surface of the first displacement member 730. However, in the present embodiment, the displacement side engaging member 742 is projected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Will be done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be set to a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. As a result, it is effective that the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 opposite to the rotation shaft 731 is tilted in the direction away from the front base 720 (front, right side in FIG. 47 (b)). Can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the displacement side engaging member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, the displacement side engaging member 742 is located at a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member It becomes easily affected by the shaking of the 730 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 47), and the positional relationship between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, it becomes difficult to engage the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement side engaging member 742 is second as the engaging surface on the inner surface of the bent portion 742b moves from the tip end side of the bent portion 742b toward the proximal end side (base portion 742a side). It is formed so as to be inclined in a direction close to the back surface of the displacement member 740. As a result, the distance between the engaging surface and the back surface of the second displacement member 740 can be widened on the receiving side of the displacement side engaging member 742 (the tip end side of the bent portion 742b, the upper side in FIG. 47 (a)). Even if shaking occurs when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be easily engaged with each other. ..

In this way, while facilitating the engagement between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, when these engagements are started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are retracted. As the displacement toward the base side, the second displacement member 740 is brought closer to the front base 720 side (left side in FIG. 47 (b)) as the engaging surface of the base side engaging member 742 (bent portion 742b) is tilted. be able to.

As a result, at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 separate their tip portions (second displacement member 740 side) from the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. Not only can it be suppressed from tilting in the direction (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)), but also the protrusion dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720 can be suppressed, and the front base 720 due to the tilt can be suppressed. Due to the proximity of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are accompanied by a slight elastic deformation as a whole, and the front base of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 is utilized by utilizing the elastic recovery force. It is possible to suppress rattling with respect to the 720 and stably maintain the posture in the stopped state.

On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are directed toward the front base 720 with the tip portion (second displacement member 740 side) of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum with the rotation shaft 731 as a fulcrum (forward). , It is permissible to tilt to the left side of FIG. 47 (b)). In this case, the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are plate-like bodies bent in a substantially O-shaped cross section, and when tilted, the back or front base of the second displacement member 740. When it collides with the front of the 720, it is deformed in the bending direction, so there is a high risk of breaking.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the receiving recesses 727 and 743 for receiving the bent portions 726b and 742b of the other party are recessed in the front surface of the front base 720 and the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Since the opening is formed, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted in the direction close to the front base 720 (front, left side in FIG. 47 (b)). When this is done, the bent portions 726b and 742b of the other party can be accepted by the receiving recessed portions 727 and 743. As a result, breakage due to collision between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be suppressed.

At the time of the above-mentioned tilting, the back surface of the connecting second member 770 facing parallel to the front surface of the front base 720 collides with the front surface in a surface-to-plane manner over the entire surface, thus reducing the surface pressure at the time of collision. Can be (distributed). Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

48 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa portion of FIG. 45 (c), and FIG. 48 (b) is the direction of the arrow XLVIIIb of FIG. 48 (a). It is a side view of the 1st displacement member 730 and the 2nd displacement member 740 in view.

As described above, when the left rotation unit 700 is shifted from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the first displacement member 730 is overhanging and the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730. Is relatively displaced (rotated) about its rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c)).

As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), according to the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions (FIG. 45 (c)). (See), the engaging surface of the displacement side engaging member 742 (bending portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730, whereby the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are engaged. Can be combined with. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 740 from rattling with respect to the first displacement member 730 at the overhanging position.

In particular, since the engaging surface of the displacement side engaging member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed by the inclination. It can be displaced in a direction close to each other. Therefore, at the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

Further, in addition to the role of engaging the displacement side engaging member 742 with the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 at the retracted position and coupling the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720, the second displacement member 742 is at the overhanging position. Since the second displacement member 740 can be combined with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730 to be coupled to the first displacement member 730, the parts for both of these roles can be individually provided. It is not necessary to provide it, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. 51 (a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51 (b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51 (c) is a top view of the winning device 65.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 in the line LIIa-LIia of FIG. 51, and FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are shown in FIG. 52 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic view of the winning apparatus 65 in the line LIIIa-LIIIa and the line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 52 (b).

In FIG. 51, the opening / closing plate 860 is not shown, and in FIG. 53, the guide rib 813a is not shown. Further, FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superposed on the back side of the front base 810, and a back base 830 superposed on the back side of the intermediate base 820. A seesaw member 840 and a driven member 850 arranged between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening / closing plate 860 for opening and closing the winning opening 65a are mainly provided.

The winning device 65 is formed in a box shape having an internal space by the front base 810, the front base 820, and the back base 830, and a guide passage through which the winning ball is guided from the winning opening 65a is formed in the internal space. It is formed so that the weight of the game ball acts on the seesaw member 840 when the game ball passes through the guide passage.

The seesaw member 840 forms a first state in which one end side (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered and the other end side (other end decorative portion 843) is raised in a state where the weight of the game ball is not applied (FIG. 52 (a)), when the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side, a second state is formed in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered (see FIG. 52 (b)).

That is, the winning device 65 makes the seesaw member 840 alternately appear in the first state and the second state by utilizing the weight of the game ball passing through the guide passage, and one end side (one end decoration) of the seesaw member 840. The effect of displacing the body 853) and the other end side (the other end side decorative body 843) up and down is formed operably.

Here, as will be described later, the seesaw member 840 is made larger in the length dimension of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 than the length dimension of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting one end side and the other end side thereof. To. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass continuously, the game balls are likely to stay on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is likely to be maintained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls pass continuously, the weight of the game balls prevents the seesaw member 840 from remaining in the second state, and the first state and the second state. It is configured so that the effect of alternately appearing and can be surely executed. Hereinafter, the configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such an effect will be described.

The front base 810 includes a front board 811 forming the front surface thereof, a front first side wall 812, a front second side wall 813, a front first bottom wall 814, and a front second bottom wall 815 protruding from the back surface of the front board 811. And mainly prepare.

In the front base 810, recessed portions 811a and 811b formed by recessing the lower edge side thereof are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the width direction, and the seesaw member 840 is provided through the recessed portions 811a and 811b. And a part of the driven member 850 (one end side decorative portion 853 and the other end side decorative portion 843) is visibly exposed to the player.

The front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 are portions that form the side walls of the guide passage that guides the game ball, and are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval. The front first bottom wall 814 and the front second bottom wall 815 are portions that form the bottom wall of the guide passage, and are connected to the lower end side of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, respectively.

The open portion on the upper end side of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 facing each other is designated as a winning opening 65a, and the game ball flows into the guide passage from the opening portion (winning opening 65a). In this case, the front second side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 are inclined downward toward the front second bottom wall 815 and the front first bottom. The front second bottom wall 815 is arranged at a position lower than the wall 814. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a can be guided to the front second bottom wall 815 by the downward inclination of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814.

The front second bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815a that inclines downward toward a side away from the front substrate 811 (that is, the intermediate base 830 side). Therefore, the game ball guided by the front second bottom wall 815 rolls along the descending inclination of the guide bottom surface 815a and is guided to the guide passage (reception port 821b) of the intermediate base 830.

The guide ribs 813a are erected at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the front second side wall 813. The guide rib 813a is formed in a shape in which the height of the guide rib 813a is lowered from the front second side wall 813 as it is separated from the front base 811 so that the erecting tip surface thereof is an inclined surface. As a result, for example, when the ball flows into (falls) from the winning opening 65a into the guide passage, it collides with the front first side wall 812 and is bounced off, and as a result, the game ball advances to the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed. Even in this case, the game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide passage of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the vertical tip of the guide rib 813a.

The intermediate base 820 includes an intermediate substrate 821 that faces the front substrate 811 of the front base 810 at a predetermined interval, and an intermediate first side wall 822, an intermediate second side wall 823, and an intermediate bottom wall that protrude from the back surface of the intermediate substrate 821. 824 and mainly provided.

An opening / closing plate advancing / retreating port 821a, a receiving port 821b, a feeding port 821c, and a discharging port 821d are formed in the intermediate board 821, and a support shaft 821e and a bearing 821f are formed in front of the intermediate board 821. , The stopper portions 821g and 821h are projected.

The opening / closing plate advancing / retreating port 821a of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for allowing the opening / closing plate 860 to advance / retreat. When the opening 65a is closed and the opening / closing plate 860 is retracted (retracted) to the opening / closing opening 821a, the winning opening 65a is opened.

The receiving port 821b of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and the bottom surface of the opening. (Receiving bottom surface 821b1) is formed so as to be connected to the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815.

The delivery port 821c of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for sending the game ball from the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is the guide bottom surface 824a described later of the intermediate bottom wall 824. Is formed by. That is, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and is sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

The discharge port 821d of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825. The game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received in the discharge port 821d rolls on the discharge bottom wall 825 to a discharge passage (not shown) connected to the back side of the back base 830. Be sent out.

The support shaft 821e of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft-shaped body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840, and is inserted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The bearing 821f of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotating shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted through the bearing 821f.

The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate substrate 821 are portions for abutting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to regulate the rotation of the seesaw member 840, and the stopper portions 821g are on the other end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. The stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface (the surface opposite to the discharge surface 846), and the stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (the surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. Will be done.

The first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by restricting the rotation of the seesaw member 840 by the stopper portion 821h (see FIG. 52A), and the second state is that the rotation of the seesaw member 840 is a stopper. It is formed by being regulated by part 821g (see FIG. 52 (b)).

Here, as described above, the stopper portion 821g is formed at a position where it can come into contact with the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 opposite to the discharge surface 846, so that the discharge of the game ball can be stabilized. That is, when the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by the weight thereof, the stopper portion 821g supports the lower surface opposite to the discharge surface 846. Therefore, for example, the stopper portion 821h As compared with the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position close to the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface opposite to the inclined surface 845), the seesaw member 840 can suppress the shaking of the seesaw member 840 on the discharge surface 846 side. As a result, the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 can be stabilized.

The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 are portions that form the side walls of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side (the passage that guides the game ball received from the reception entrance 821b to the delivery port 821c), and are provided at predetermined intervals. They are arranged so as to face each other while being separated from each other. That is, the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 receive the game balls sent out from the guide passage on the front base 810 side along the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. The received game ball is guided toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 along a substantially vertical direction (FIG. 52 (a) vertical direction).

The intermediate bottom wall 824 is a portion forming the bottom wall of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and is connected to the lower end side of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, respectively. The intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a that inclines downward toward the outlet 821c side (that is, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). The game ball guided through the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and passes through the delivery port 821c in a substantially horizontal direction to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (FIG. It is sent out along 52 (a) left-right direction).

In this way, an intermediate bottom wall 824 (guide bottom surface 824a) is provided in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and the game ball that has rolled the guide bottom surface 824a is laterally laterally oriented to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. Since the game is guided from the side, the game balls can be guided one by one to the receiving surface 844, and a plurality of games can be played on the receiving surface 844 as in the case of dropping the game ball from above the receiving surface 844. It is possible to avoid stacking balls. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840.

Here, the extended length of the guide passage that guides the game ball along the substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side is twice the diameter of the game ball. It is preferably set as follows. In the present embodiment, the horizontal distance dimension L (see FIG. 52 (a)) from the extended tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the back wall 831 described later of the back base 830 is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Will be done. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

Further, the facing distance between the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 is set to the same size as the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the position of the game ball can be defined between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, the seesaw member 840 always rolls the guide bottom surface 824a and sends out the game ball from the delivery port 821c. It can be received by the receiving surface 844 (guided to the same position on the receiving surface 844).

In this case, the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed so that the height position of the descending inclined end end is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state (in the first state). See FIG. 53 (a)). As a result, as will be described later, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be performed promptly.

On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the descending inclination end is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53 (b)). As a result, as will be described later, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered by utilizing the step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the first state is formed. Can be made easier.

The back base 830 mainly includes a back wall 831, a discharge side wall 832, and a discharge ceiling wall 833. The back wall 831 is in contact with the rear end faces of the intermediate first side wall 822, the intermediate second side wall 823, and the intermediate bottom wall 824 of the intermediate base body 820 (that is, it is covered with the open portion on the back side). It is a part and forms a wall (back wall) on the back side of the guide passage.

The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 are portions that form the side wall and ceiling wall of the guide passage for guiding the game ball from the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown), and the discharge port 821d. It is extended along the outer edge of the. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the intermediate base 820, the discharge side wall 832 of the back base 830, and the discharge ceiling wall 833 is substantially the same as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. To. As a result, the width of the guide passage can be secured, so that a plurality of game balls can be smoothly guided. Further, even when the later game ball collides with the earlier game ball on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and is flipped up, the later game ball can be smoothly guided. Details will be described later.

The seesaw member 840 has a bearing 841 formed in a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connecting pin 842 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction, a other end decorative portion 843 formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction, and an upper surface thereof. It mainly includes a receiving surface 844, an inclined surface 845 and a discharge surface 846 to be formed, and a claw portion 847 erected on the discharge surface 846.

As described above, the bearing 841 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 821e projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted, and is a seesaw member via the support shaft 821e and the bearing 841. The 840 is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

The connecting pin 842 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connecting groove 852 described later of the driven member 850. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to the driven member 850. That is, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated with the support shaft 821e as the center of rotation, the connecting pin 842 acts on the connecting groove 852 to form a rotation centered on the rotation shaft 851 of the driven member 850. ..

The other end decorative portion 843 is a portion on which a design or the like is decorated on the front surface, and is visibly exposed to the player through the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810 as described above.

The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface-like portion in the guide passage of the intermediate base 820 that rolls the guide bottom surface 824a and receives the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c, and the inclined surface 845 has the receiving surface 844. It is a flat surface-like portion for rolling the received game ball to the discharge surface 846.

The receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 are in a no-load state (that is, the first state, see FIG. 52 (a)) in which the game ball is not placed on the seesaw member 840 regardless of the rotation position of the seesaw member 840. ), It is formed in a shape having a downward inclination toward the discharge surface 846. Therefore, in either the first state or the second state, the game ball received by the receiving surface 644 can be rolled from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 toward the discharge surface 646.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the receiving surface 844 is located on one end side (left side in FIG. 52 (a)) of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction with respect to the axial center of the bearing 841, the second state (the other end side is lowered). In a state where one end side is raised at the same time (see FIG. 52 (b)), when the receiving surface 844 receives the game ball, the weight of the received game ball causes the one end side (receiving surface 844 side) in the longitudinal direction to be raised. Can be lowered. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface portion for sending (discharging) the game ball from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820, and is from the front base 810 side to the intermediate base 820 side (FIG. 52 (b)). It is formed with a downward slope from the front side to the back side of the paper. Therefore, when the game ball is rolled to the discharge surface 846, the game ball can be rolled toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 due to the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846.

When the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, the claw portion 847 switches the rolling direction of the game ball toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. The guide surface 847a is provided as an inclined surface for guiding the contacted game ball toward the discharge port 821d. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 to quickly flow into the discharge port 821d. Therefore, as will be described later, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened to obtain the first state and the second state. Can be smoothly switched.

In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and is unevenly arranged on the side close to the front base 810 (opposite side to the discharge port 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840. Will be set up. As a result, as will be described later, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exposed surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, , The time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant, and as a result, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

The driven member 850 has a rotating shaft 851 projecting from the back surface of the driven member 850 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction, and a rotating shaft 851 that is juxtaposed below the rotating shaft 851 and has a long hole shape in front view on the back surface of the driven member 850. Mainly a connecting groove 852 that is recessed as a groove of the above, and a one-sided decorative portion 853 that is formed on the front surface of the driven member 850 and is visibly exposed to the player through the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810. Prepare for.

As described above, the rotating shaft 851 is a shaft-like body rotatably inserted into the bearing 821f projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820, and is a driven member 850 via the rotating shaft 851 and the bearing 821f. Is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

As described above, the connecting groove 852 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted, and the connecting pin 842 is slid along the extending direction of the connecting groove 852. , The driven member 850 is rotated with the rotation of the seesaw member 840.

When the seesaw member 840 is transitioned from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed up by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 is centered on the rotation shaft 851 in FIG. 52. (A) By rotating clockwise, the continuous acting member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is raised (see FIG. 52 (b)). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 transitions from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed down by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 is centered on the rotation shaft 851 in FIG. 52. (A) By rotating clockwise, the continuous acting member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered (see FIG. 52 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the link mechanism for connecting the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 to the connecting groove 852 of the driven member 850 and rotating the driven member 850 with the rotation of the seesaw member 840 is configured. The link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 with respect to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840. As a result, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) can be expanded, and the effect of the effect due to the displacement can be enhanced.

Here, since the seesaw member 840 can be rotated by utilizing the weight of the game ball, the transition from the first state to the second state can be easily performed at high speed and can be performed in a relatively short time. On the other hand, in the transition from the second state to the first state, the seesaw member 840 needs to be rotated only by its own weight, so that the operation is slow and the time is long. Transition from the second state to the first state in order to reliably switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840 when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage. It is necessary to promptly carry out.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the driven member 850 is connected to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, an external force that lowers the weight of the driven member 850 on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. (That is, it can be used as an auxiliary force for transitioning from the second state to the first state). As a result, the time required for the transition from the second state to the first state can be shortened, and as a result, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the seesaw member 840th. It is possible to facilitate alternating switching between the first state and the second state.

Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be described. When the game ball flows into the guide passage on the front base 810 side from the winning opening 65a, the game ball is collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and rolls on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. By doing so, the guide is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (to the right in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)), and flows from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side.

The game ball that has flowed into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side is in a substantially vertical direction between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 (downward in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)). Guided to reach the intermediate bottom wall 824. The guide direction of the game ball that has reached the intermediate bottom wall 824 is switched. That is, the game ball is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (to the left in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)) by rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and the intermediate base 820 is fed. It is sent out from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives the game ball on its receiving surface 844, the game ball rolls the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the discharge surface 846. The seesaw member 840 is moved by the weight of the game ball, and the seesaw member 840 is rotated clockwise with the rotation shaft 841 as the center of rotation (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is lowered). As shown in 52 (b), a second state is formed. However, in FIG. 52B, the illustration of the game ball is omitted.

When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 and a no-load state is formed in which the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotation shaft 841 due to its own weight. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the first state is formed by being rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52 (b) as the center (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised). The seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

In this case, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is lowered in the second state (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side)) due to the weight of the game balls. There is a risk that the first state and the second state cannot be switched alternately.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the seesaw member 840 has its receiving surface 844 located on one end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 52 (b)) with respect to the rotation shaft 841. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives the game ball on its receiving surface 844, the weight of the game ball supported by the receiving surface 844 can lower one end side in the longitudinal direction. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52 (b) with the rotation shaft 841 as the center of rotation (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised), and is shown in FIG. 52 (b). A second state can be formed (easily formed). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the guide passages for guiding the game balls are formed in the internal spaces of the front base 810, the intermediate base 820, and the back base 830, a plurality of game balls can be generated from the winning opening 65a. Even in the case of continuous inflow, a plurality of game balls can be stored by using the guide passage, and the plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. it can.

However, even when a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are sequentially guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in this way, the game balls are the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. In the form of being guided by falling from above the seesaw member 840, these plurality of game balls are likely to be stacked on the receiving surface 844, and the rolling of the game balls from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 is hindered. It is not possible to switch between the first state and the second state of the above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) having a guide bottom surface 824a extending in a substantially horizontal direction and rolling a game ball on the terminal side (outlet 821b side) of the guide passage. ) Is formed, and the game ball that has rolled the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the substantially horizontal direction (FIG. 53 (a) and FIG. 5 (b) left-right direction). Can be done. As a result, the game balls can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the receiving surface 844 can receive the game balls one by one from the horizontal passage). It is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being stacked vertically on the receiving surface 844. Therefore, the seesaw member 840 can be easily switched between the first state and the second state.

In this case, as described above, the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side runs the game ball along the substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52A) between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. A horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected to the downstream side of the passage (upstream passage), and the length of the horizontal passage is shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

That is, the extending length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (in the present embodiment, the extending tip to the back surface of the guide bottom surface 824a). The horizontal distance dimension L to the back wall 831 described later of the base 830 is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball), and only one game ball can be present in such a horizontal passage. , Since the extension direction of the horizontal passage and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different, when a ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. The time required for inflow to the horizontal passage can be increased by the amount of the change of direction.

Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball (next game ball) after the upstream passage changes direction. It takes time to flow into the horizontal passage, and after that, the game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. That is, the later game ball is separated from the earlier game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (b) and 53 (b), the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is above the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) in the second state. Since it is located, a step in the height direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53B) can be formed between the receiving surface 844 and the guide bottom surface 824a. As a result, in the second state, when the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is rolled to guide the game ball to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball is made to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collision with the step). The seesaw member 840's receiving surface 844 can be easily lowered (moved downward in FIG. 53 (b)) by utilizing this riding operation (collision). That is, one end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction can be easily lowered, and the first state can be easily formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the first state can be easily formed. It is possible to easily switch between the state and the second state alternately.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a)), the seesaw member 840 is in a no-load state, and the guide bottom surface of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is in a no-load state. The game ball guided from the 824a and received on the receiving surface 844 is quickly rolled toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846, and the weight of the game ball is applied to act on the other end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. It is required to lower (form a second state).

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a), the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is in the first state from the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). Is also located below, so it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collision with the step) as in the case of the second state described above, and it is possible to avoid a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly rolled from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 side to facilitate the formation of the second state.

In this first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed so as to be at the same height position (equal surface position) as the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). It is preferable to do so. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located below the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, the game ball is dropped from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844, so that the game ball bounces and the amount of the game ball bounces. This is because a time lag occurs and the load on the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 increases due to the impact of dropping, but these can be eliminated if they are at the same height position.

Next, the claw portion 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 52 (b).

As shown in FIG. 54, a claw portion 847 is erected on the seesaw member 840 from its discharge surface 846. The claw portion 847 includes a guide surface 847a formed so as to be inclined so as to approach the discharge port 821d from the inclined surface 825 side toward the other end decorative portion 843 side. As a result, when the game ball rolls along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (left-right direction in FIG. 54) on the discharge surface 846 toward the other end decorative portion 843 side (right side in FIG. 54), the game ball is rolled. Can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847, and the rolling direction thereof can be switched to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 (upper part of FIG. 54). The time on which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, the first state and the second state can be switched alternately. It can be done smoothly.

In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the other end decorative portion 843 side, the right side in FIG. 54) on the discharge surface 846, and the width direction of the seesaw member 840 ( In the vertical direction of FIG. 54), the arrangement is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side of FIG. 54). As a result, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exposed surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the second state is set). The formed time) can be easily made constant, and as a result, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

That is, in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 54), the game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54) is the discharge port. The distance to the discharge port 821d is long, and the game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821d, the upper side in FIG. 54) has a short distance to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, by arranging the claw portion 847 unevenly in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54), the claw portion 847 is close to the front base 810. The former game ball, which rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side (lower side in FIG. 54), collides with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 at an early stage and discharges from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, while the intermediate base. For the latter game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the 820 (upper side in FIG. 54), the collision of the claw portion 847 with the guide surface 847a can be delayed or prevented from colliding. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the total time during which the game ball is rolling on the discharge surface 846 can be brought close to the same. As a result, even when the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the game ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily kept constant.

Next, the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a schematic rear view of the winning device 65, where FIG. 55 (a) is the first state shown in FIG. 52 (a) and FIG. 55 (b) is the second state shown in FIG. 52 (b). Corresponds to each.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the width dimension of the discharge port 821d (the left-right dimension of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) is larger than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is set to a large size (approximately 2.5 times in this embodiment). As a result, with the previous game ball present on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) of the seesaw member 840, the next game ball is further moved to the other end side in the longitudinal direction. Even when the ball is rolled toward, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

For example, the rear game ball collides with the destination game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846, and the rear game ball is bounced back to the side opposite to the rolling direction (that is, the distance between the two game balls (FIG. 55). (A) and the left-right distance in FIG. 55 (b) are expanded in the width direction of the discharge port 821d), and even when each of these game balls is discharged to the discharge port 821d, the width dimension of the discharge port 821 is sufficient. By being secured in, each can flow smoothly.

Further, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d (vertical dimension of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) is a height dimension on the inclined surface 845 side rather than a height dimension on the discharge surface 846 side of the seesaw member 840. Is set to a larger dimension. As a result, the next game ball is further on the other end side in the longitudinal direction while the previous game ball is present on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) of the seesaw member 840. Even when the ball is rolled toward, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

That is, the rear game ball collides with the destination game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846, and the rear game ball is bounced upward or is bounced back to the side opposite to the rolling direction and is an inclined surface. Even when the ball is flipped upward by the 845, the rear game ball can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821 by utilizing the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the inclined surface 845 side. On the other hand, even if the earlier game ball collides with the later game ball, it is difficult to be flipped up. Therefore, by keeping the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the discharge surface 846 side low, the space required for the discharge port 821d It is possible to secure a space for arranging other members by that amount.

Next, the gaming area will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13 in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the center frame 86 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the game board 13, nails, windmills, inner rails 61, outer rails 62, various winning openings (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86, and the like are assembled to a wooden base plate 60. As described above, the area on the front surface of the game board 13 defined by the inner rail 12 is defined as the game area (the area where nails, winning openings, etc. are arranged and the fired ball flows down). Rail.

An opening is formed in the center of the game board 13, so that the third symbol display device 81, which is a display device, can be visually recognized. In this case, conventionally, the opening of the game board 13 is made larger than the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81, and the effect device is displaceably arranged on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) by that amount. A visible area is secured. However, since it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the game board 13.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center frame 86 to be built in the opening of the game board 13 (opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed from a light-transmitting material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter referred to as “center frame 86”) is formed. A "region forming portion R") forms a part of the gaming region. As a result, the effect device (in the present embodiment, the left rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized through the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 (through the watermark). Therefore, it is possible to increase the visible area of the left rotation unit 700 while securing the area for the ball to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, the illustration of the left rotation unit 700 which is visually recognized through the region forming portion R is omitted.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed so that the inner edge thereof reaches the outer edge of the game area (that is, the inner rail 61). The area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized can be secured as much as possible through the area forming portion R of 86.

On the other hand, since the width dimension of the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 is set to a size that allows the passage of only one game ball, the region forming portion R is formed through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, the region is formed). The area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized can be secured as much as possible without going through the portion R).

Hereinafter, the detailed configuration of the region forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the region forming portion R. Further, FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R in the LX-LX line of FIG. 59. In FIG. 60, the left rotation unit 700 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 58, the center frame 86 is erected from the back surface of the frame plate base portion 910 formed in the shape of a front view frame and the frame plate base portion 910, and is fitted inside the opening 60a of the base plate 60. It mainly includes a fitting wall portion 920 and an inner edge defining wall portion 930 that is erected from the front surface of the frame base portion 910 that is opposite to the inner fitting wall portion 920 and defines the inner edge of the game area.

The frame plate base portion 910 is a portion superimposed on the front surface of the base plate 60, and the front surface side thereof is a region on which the game ball flows down. The frame plate base 910 is provided with insertion holes 911 at a plurality of locations for inserting tapping screws for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60. Further, the outer edge of the frame plate base portion 910 is formed so as to be inclined downward so as to be smoothly connected to the front surface of the base plate 60. Due to this inclination, the rolling of the game ball can be made smooth.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, a columnar portion 940, a side wall portion 950, and a downstream wall portion 960 are erected from the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 in the region forming portion R of the center frame 86.

The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially rhombic cross section, and is arranged at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). As a result, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, the first path M1 is partitioned between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and the second path M1 is partitioned between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is partitioned.

The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion juxtaposed with the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940, and partitions the third path M3 between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. In this case, the portion of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 facing the side wall portion 950 is closer to the inner rail 61 side than the portion facing the columnar body 940.

As a result, the downstream side of the second path M2 is formed by bending toward the inner rail 61 side (side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first path M1 and the third path M3 are paths formed along the inner rail 61, they are connected to each other in a substantially linear shape. Further, the first path M1 and the third path M3 are formed as linear paths that allow the sphere to flow down in an inclined direction in the front view.

A concave groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910. The concave groove 971 is a portion for suppressing the flow velocity of the game ball, is formed as a concave portion having an inverted triangular cross section, and is repeatedly bent left and right like a saw blade in the front view, and the first path M1 and the first path M1 and the first. It extends along the path direction of the three paths M3.

Protrusions 972 are projected from the side surface portions 950 and the inner edge defining wall portions 930 so as to face each other. The protrusion 972 is a portion for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball, is formed in a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the erection direction of both wall portions 930 and 950. Each of these protrusions 972 is arranged at a position shifted in phase from the bent portion of the concave groove 971 along the path direction of the third path M3.

The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream end portion of the side wall portion 950, and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. Specifically, it is formed as a wall portion substantially orthogonal to the flow direction of the third path M3. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 has a portion corresponding to the downstream wall portion 940 formed along the downstream wall portion 960, whereby a fourth portion is formed between the inner edge defining wall portion 930 and the downstream wall portion 940. Route M4 is partitioned.

The width dimension of the first path M1 (opposite distance between the inner rail 61 and the columnar body 640), the width dimension of the second path M2 (opposite distance between the columnar body 640 and the inner edge defined wall portion 930), the width of the third path M3. Only a game ball having a dimension (opposite distance between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge regulation wall portion 930) and a width dimension of the fourth path M4 (opposite distance between the downstream wall portion 960 and the inner edge regulation wall portion 930) can pass through. Each is set to the width dimension. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball.

Next, the action of the region forming portion R thus formed on the flowing game ball will be described. The game ball guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flowing down from the upper area of the game area is bounced off by a nail or rolled along the inner edge regulation wall portion 930, and then the first path M1 or the first path M1 or the first. It flows into the region forming portion R from any of the two paths M2. The game ball that passes through the first path M1 or the second path M2 and flows down the third path M3 is collided with the downstream wall portion 960 and flows down to the lower region of the game area via the fourth path M4.

Here, since the region forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is formed of a resin material, nails cannot be planted. Therefore, the flow speed of the flowing game ball cannot be reduced, and it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the flowing game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected on the downstream side of the third path M3 (the confluence portion between the third path M3 and the fourth path M4) in the region forming portion R. The collision with the downstream wall portion 960 can reduce the flow speed of the game ball so that the player can easily see the flow ball.

In this case, since the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, is integrally formed with the center frame 86, it can be easily molded by resin molding with a mold, and the downstream wall portion 960 can be formed. It is not necessary to perform complicated work such as forming the above as a separate component and fastening and fixing it to the frame plate substrate 910. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, the third path M3 is formed in a straight line, and the flow speed of the game ball becomes relatively high. When the portion where the game ball repeatedly collides is borne by the downstream wall portion 960 formed of the resin material. , There is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall portion 960 is connected to the downstream side of the side wall portion 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased, and damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

In this case, an inclined surface 961 inclined toward the fourth path M4 is formed at the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960. As a result, the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 can be formed into a triangular shape in front view as shown in FIG. 59, so that the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased accordingly.

Further, when the game ball flowing down the third path M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960 after colliding with the inclined surface 961, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing in the direction of backflow through the third path M3. , The flow can be made to flow toward the outlet of the third path M3 while reducing the flow speed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced. Therefore, from this point as well, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

The side wall portion 950 is also a portion integrally formed with the center frame 86 and can be easily molded by resin molding with a mold. Therefore, as in the case of the downstream wall portion 960, the side wall portion 950 is formed as a separate part. It is not necessary to perform complicated work such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, since the side wall portion 950 having the role of partitioning the third path M3 can also serve to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be done.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the mode in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the inner rail 61 is that the gaming ball collides with the nail and then bounces, so that the speed is relatively slow and this collision occurs. It was unlikely that the inner rail 61 would be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) is directly visible through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, without the region forming portion R). In order to secure the maximum, the width of the region forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in the present embodiment, the width dimension that allows the passage of only the game ball in which the third path M3 is 1). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming portion R. Therefore, on the upstream side of the region forming portion R, it is necessary to significantly change the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed down the game region (in the present embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In such a form, a part of the game ball (the game ball flowing down the second path M2) collides with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage to the inner rail 61 (bending due to the collision). ..

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is arranged in parallel with the inner rail 61, the game ball flowing down the second path M2 is received by the side wall portion 950 and collides with the inner rail 61. It can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inner rail 61 from being damaged (bending due to collision).

That is, it is conceivable that the side wall portion 750 is not formed and the inner rail 61 also serves to partition the third path M3, but in this case, it is necessary to avoid the collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, on the upstream side of the region forming portion R, the width cannot be narrowed, and the opening (inner edge defining wall portion 930) of the center frame 86 must be arranged in a direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be directly viewed is reduced by that amount. Therefore, the present embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61 results in maximizing the area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be directly viewed.

As described above, since the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light transmitting material, the side wall portion 750 is formed from the light emitting body on the back side of the center frame 86 (side wall portion 950, recessed groove 971 and the like). It can function as a light guide body that guides the emitted light P to the game area. For example, the light P emitted from the back surface side and introduced into the side wall portion 950 is guided to the standing end surface (upper surface of FIG. 60) of the side wall portion 950 and irradiated from the standing end surface. Not only can the effect of the illuminated light P be exhibited, but the light P guided to the side surface of the side wall portion 950 (the surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930) is irradiated from the side surface of the side wall portion 950. can do. As a result, the light P is guided to the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 (upper side surface of FIG. 60) and the side surface of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (the surface facing the side wall portion 950), and the game is performed together with the light P emitted from the upper surface or the side surface. It is possible to exert the effect of the light P that illuminates the area where the ball rolls (the game ball when the game ball rolls).

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the back surface side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is emitted from the inner rail 61 side (inner edge regulation wall). Leakage from the side surface of the portion 930 (opposite side to the portion 930) to the outside can be reduced by the inner rail 61. That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the upright end face or the side surface (the side surface on the side facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, the amount of light that can be emitted from the standing end surface or the side surface of the side wall portion 950 can be increased, and as a result, the effect of the guided light P can be enhanced.

The light emitting body is arranged in the left rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the left rotation unit 700 is the back surface of the region forming portion R. Therefore, in the state where the left rotation unit 700 is arranged in the retracted position, the light P emitted from the light emitting body is guided through the side wall portion 950 while making the left rotation unit 700 visible through the region forming portion R. After making it visible to the player. That is, the shape of the left rotation unit 700 visually recognized via the region forming portion R can be associated with the light P emitted from the standing end surface of the side wall portion 950, and the player can visually recognize the light P. The effect of light P can be enhanced.

Here, as described above, protrusions 972 are projected from the facing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930, respectively. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be made to collide with the protrusion 972 to prevent the flow down. As a result, in the region forming portion R where the nail cannot be planted, the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball.

In this case, the protrusion 972 protruding from the side wall portion 950 and the protrusion 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are arranged so as to be out of phase with each other along the path direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a staggered pattern on the left and right facing surfaces. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be alternately collided with the left and right protrusions 972 to meander the game ball to the left and right. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down, and a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction (path direction of the third path M3) is given to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. Can be done.

Further, as described above, a concave groove 971 formed in a front view saw blade shape is recessed on the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be guided along the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meander to the left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easier to slow down the flow speed of the game ball, and also imparts a displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the flow direction (path direction of the third path M3) to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. Can be given.

Further, when the light emitted from the back surface side of the region forming portion R is guided toward the front surface of the game region, the light is diffused or collected in the concave groove 971 recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910. Since it can be used as a lens to illuminate, it is possible to enhance the effect of the guided light.

In this case, the bent portion of the concave groove 971 has a phase with respect to the protrusion 972 protruding from the side wall portion 950 and the protrusion 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 along the path direction of the third path M3. Are arranged in a staggered manner. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball that is guided by the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meanders to the left and right can be easily collided with the left and right protrusions 972 alternately. A synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of 971 and the action of protrusion 972. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be made slower, and the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

Since the protrusions 972 and the concave groove 971 slow down the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the third path M3, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed and the game from the third path M3 to the fourth path M4 can be suppressed. Contributes to smooth guidance of the ball.

Further, the terminal side of the concave groove 971 (the portion juxtaposed with the inclined surface 961) overlaps the downstream wall portion 960 in the extension direction and directs the exit of the third path M3. As a result, the game ball guided to the terminal side of the concave groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing in the direction of backflow of the third path M3, and it is possible to make the game ball flow down toward the outlet of the third path M3 while reducing its flow velocity. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 2013 in the second embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to substantially the uppermost part of the game area with respect to the game board 13 in the first embodiment. As a result, the directing device (in this embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) is directly connected through the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, not through the region forming portion R). The visible area can be further expanded as compared with the case of the first embodiment.

In the region forming member R, the formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is extended along the outer rail 62. As a result, the fifth path M5 and the sixth path M6 are partitioned between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 in the region above the return ball prevention member 68.

The facing distance between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is set to a dimension larger than twice and smaller than three times the diameter of the game ball. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the center frame 2086 is formed with passages (fifth path M5 and sixth path M6) through which the game balls can pass each other without colliding with each other between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930. The above-mentioned area where the effect device can be directly visually recognized through the opening can be secured to the maximum.

Further, the rotation shaft of the wind turbine WM is arranged substantially at the center between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 facing each other. As a result, the game ball can pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotating shaft of the wind turbine WM, and between the rotating shaft of the wind turbine WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930.

According to the region forming portion R formed in this way, the game ball launched from the ball launching unit and guided to the upper region of the game region by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is guided along the outer rail 62. As a result, after passing through the wind turbine WM, the vehicle is moved on the fifth route M5. In this case, by setting the firing intensity to a value larger than the reference value, the game ball can flow down to the right region beyond the upper top of the gaming area, while the firing intensity is set to a value smaller than the reference value. By doing so, the game ball can flow down (move the sixth path M6) along the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 without crossing the upper top of the game area. The game ball that has moved on the sixth path M6 passes through the wind turbine WM and then flows down to the third path M3.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. In the right-handed rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, a case where two members, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement member 642), can be displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 654 will be described. However, the clockwise rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment has three members, the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642), and the third displacement member 3660, as the transmission member 654 is displaced. Is displaceable. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 3600. In addition, in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, a state in which a part (rear base 610 and front base 620) of the right rotation unit 3600 is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right-handed rotating unit 3600 in the third embodiment has a third displacement member 3660 displaced so as to be slidable in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 62) of the first displacement member 3630. Be prepared. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3461) is the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. The driven member 3641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the third displacement member 3660 can be displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 (slide displacement). ..

The through groove 3636 is a groove-shaped opening formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the support shaft 632, and the groove width is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461. Will be done. Therefore, by displace the connecting pin 3461d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the driven member 3641 is allowed to rotate around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630.

The connecting pin 3461d is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the through groove 3636, and the projecting height thereof is set to a dimension that allows the first displacement member 3630 to project from the front surface. That is, in the assembled state, the tip end side of the connecting pin 3461d can be inserted into the sliding groove 3661 described later of the third displacement member 3660 via the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630.

A sliding groove 3661 is recessed on the back surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3662 is arranged above the sliding groove 3661. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a concave groove into which the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width, and the groove width is formed into a linear groove. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461.

The slide rail 3662 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660, and the back side rail fixed to the first displacement member 3630 and the back side thereof. It consists of a front rail that is connected so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible on the front side of the rail. By expanding and contracting the slide rail 3662 due to the relative displacement of the back rail and the front rail in the longitudinal direction, the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630.

When the third displacement member 3660 is arranged on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a part of the sliding groove 3661 is overlapped with the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (with the sliding groove 3661). (Crossed with through groove 3636). Therefore, the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630, and the connecting pin 3461d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636 to displace the connecting pin 3641d of the third displacement member. The third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 of the 3660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 by the connecting pin 3461d).

Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. 64 and 65 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 3600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 66 and 67 show the operation between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 3600 in each state at the time of carrying out.

It should be noted that FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c) are shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), and FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) are shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (FIG. 67). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 64 (c) is the same as FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 66 (c) is the same as FIG. 67 (a).

Here, in the third embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, whereby the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 3630 are slid. Where each of the 3660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), at the retracted position, the slide rail 3662 of the third displacement member 3660 is in a shortened state, and the connecting pin of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640. The 3461d is located on one end side of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (the end on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, on the right side in FIG. 66 (a)). In this case, the length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip end of the third displacement member 3660 is the dimension h1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 66 (a)), the states shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 66 (b) are passed, and then FIGS. 64 (c) and FIG. As shown in 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 3630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 3660. Therefore, since the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide in the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 3630. Be displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c) and 66 (a) to 66 (c), the length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip end of the third displacement member 3660. Is maintained at dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), the first displacement member 3630 is moved to FIG. 67 (a). While being maintained in the state (position) shown, the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, and the states shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b) are displayed. After that, it is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 65 (c) and 67 (c).

In this case, where the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3461 causes the connecting pin 3461d to be on the other end side (support shaft) of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660. The rotation is in the direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) of sliding toward 632 and the end portion on the side close to the shaft support hole 641a (left side in FIG. 67 (a)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. The slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed up in the extending direction. As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) and FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c), the third displacement member is the third. The length from the base end of the 1 displacement member 3630 to the tip end of the 3rd displacement member 3660 is changed (increased) from the dimension h1 to the dimension h3 via the dimension h2 (h1 <h2 <h3).

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 65 (c) and 67 (c), the first displacement occurs. While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 67 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 in the opposite direction, and FIG. After passing through the states shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b), they are arranged in the states shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 3461d to be connected to one end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a). The rotation is in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (c)) of sliding the unit toward the right side in FIG. 67 (c).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the lower side in FIG. Since the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed down in the shortening direction, the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the third displacement member 3660 is displaced from the base end of the first displacement member 3630. The length to the tip is shortened to the dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 moves the rotation shaft 631. It is rotated in the upright direction as a rotation axis and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3461 is the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660. The second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are integrally displaced together with the first displacement member 3630.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 3660 are not displaced. A form in which the third displacement member 3660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 and the first displacement member 3630 are maintained in a stopped state while the first displacement member 3630 is maintained in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the third displacement member 3660 is individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 65 and 67).

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described, but the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment is the first. The third displacement member 4660 is rotatable with respect to the first displacement member 4630. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 4600. In addition, in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, a state in which a part (rear base 610 and front base 620) of the right rotation unit 4600 is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably supported on one end side (upper side of FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. .. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3461d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. The driven member 3461 is relatively rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630, so that the third displacement member 4660 can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

A sliding groove 4661 is recessed on the back surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotating shaft 4662 is projected above the sliding groove 4661. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove into which the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width, and the groove width is formed into a linear groove. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461.

The rotating shaft 4662 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted into a shaft support hole 4637 formed on one end side (upper side of FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630, and is inserted through the rotating shaft 4662 and the shaft support hole 4637. The third displacement member 4660 is rotatably supported by the first displacement member 4630. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the rotating shaft 4662, whereby the rotating shaft 4662 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 4637.

In a state where the third displacement member 4660 is arranged (axially supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a part of the sliding groove 4661 is overlapped with the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding). The moving groove 4661 and the through groove 3636 intersect). Therefore, the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630, and the connecting pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636 to displace the connecting pin 3641d as the third displacement member. The third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the 4660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 by the connecting pin 3461d).

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. 70 and 71 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 72 and 73 operate between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 4600 in each state at the time of carrying out.

It should be noted that FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (c) are shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c), and FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) are shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (FIG. 73). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 70 (c) is the same as FIG. 71 (a), and FIG. 72 (c) is the same as FIG. 73 (a).

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, whereby the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 4630 are slid. Where each of the 4660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a), at the retracted position, the virtual line L1 passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotary shaft 4662) and is along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630. The angle formed by the virtual line L2 that passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotary shaft 4662) and along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is defined as the intersection angle θ1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 72 (a)), the states shown in FIGS. 70 (b) and 72 (b) are passed through the states shown in FIGS. 70 (b) and 72 (b). As shown in 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 4660, and the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3461 in the second displacement member 3640 is the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. The third displacement member 4660 is also displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 because it does not slide. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (c) and 72 (a) to 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line) The angle formed with L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 73 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 73 (a), the first displacement member 4630 moves to FIG. 73 (a). While being maintained in the state (position) shown, the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the states shown in FIGS. 71 (b) and 73 (b) are displayed. After that, it is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 73 (c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3461 is the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (on the traveling direction side of the connecting pin 3461d). The inner wall surface (upper side in FIG. 73A) is in the direction of being pushed up by the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461.

As a result, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) and 73 (a) to 73 (c). , The angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is changed (decreased) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3 < θ2 <θ1).

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 73 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 73 (c), the first displacement occurs. While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 73 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630 in the opposite direction, and FIG. After passing through the states shown in FIGS. 71 (b) and 73 (b), they are arranged in the states shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 73 (a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3461 around the support shaft 632 is the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (inner wall surface on the traveling direction side of the connecting pin 3461d, lower side in FIG. 73 (c)). ) Is in the direction of being pushed down by the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angles formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) intersect. It is increased to the angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 moves the rotation shaft 631. It is rotated in the upright direction as a rotation axis and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3461 is the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. The second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced. A form in which the third displacement member 4660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the third displacement member 4660 is individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 71 and 73).

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described, but the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment is the first. The third displacement member 5660 can appear and disappear in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 5600. In addition, in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, a state in which a part (rear base 610 and front base 620) of the right rotation unit 5600 is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the clockwise rotation unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment, the third displacement member 5660 is located in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 74) of the first displacement member 5630 in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. 76 (for example, FIG. 76). a) Arranged so that it can appear and disappear in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d of the second displacement member 5640 (driven member 5461) is the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. The third displacement member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 (in the front-rear direction) by being in contact with the back surface of the 5663 and rotating the driven member 5641 relative to the first displacement member 5630. Can be infested).

A pair of sliding holes 5638 are formed in the first displacement member 5630. The sliding hole 5638 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the sliding guide rod 5664 described later of the third displacement member 5660 is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sliding guide rod 5664. To. That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is slidably supported along the drilling direction of the sliding hole 5638, whereby the third displacement member 5660 is supported so as to be able to appear and disappear in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. Will be done.

The connecting pin 5641d is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the through groove 3636, and the tip is set to a protrusion height located in the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is brought into contact with the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 in the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630.

A sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are projected from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660. As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-shaped portion on which the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5461 is slid, and the back surface on which the connecting pin 5641d is slid is from one end (right side in FIG. 75). It is formed as an inclined surface that inclines upward toward the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the protruding height of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d slides on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from one end toward the other end (or in the opposite direction) with the rotation of the driven member 5641, the driven member is driven. The distance between the 5641 and the third displacement member 5660 is increased (reduced).

Here, the plate thickness of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is set to a dimension slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636, and the rear view shape is formed into a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the protruding tip side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 in a state where it can slide in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 appears and disappears in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630, not only the sliding guide rod 5664 but also the sliding inclined portion 5663 slides the third displacement member 5660. Since the motion can be supported (that is, supported at three places), it is possible to suppress the third displacement member 5660 from tilting forward and stabilize its infestation motion.

As described above, the sliding guide rod 5664 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is slidably supported by the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding hole 5638 is provided on the end surface in the axial direction. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the sliding guide rod C is fastened and fixed, thereby restricting the sliding guide rod 5664 from coming out of the sliding hole 5638.

In this case, the urging member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in a state of being elastically compressed (a state in which the total length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the force member S acts in the direction of separating the holding body C from the back surface of the first displacement member 5630. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is urged in a direction close to the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636.

Therefore, the driven member 5641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630, and the connecting pin 5641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, so that the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is displaced. 3 Act on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the displacement member 5660 (slide the connecting pin 5641d along the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663), and move the third displacement member 5660 back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630. It can be infested in the direction.

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. 76 and 77 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 78 and 79 are operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state at the time of carrying out. 80 and 81 are top views of the right-handed rotating unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

It should be noted that FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c) are shown in FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), 80 (a) to 80 (c), and 77 (a) to 77 (c). ) Are in the same state as FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (c) and 81 (a) to 81 (c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 76 (c) is the same as FIG. 77 (a), FIG. 78 (c) is FIG. 79 (a), and FIG. 80 (c) is FIG. 81 (a). is there.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, so that the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member Where each of the 5660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a) and 80 (a), in the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is set to be in a state of being close to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640. The connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 in FIG. 78 (a) is one end side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the end portion on the side where the protrusion height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is low). ) And the right side of FIG. 80 (a)). In this case, the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is defined as the dimension J1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 78 (a)), the states shown in FIGS. 76 (b), 78 (b) and 80 (b) are passed through the states shown in FIG. As shown in 76 (c), 78 (c) and 80 (c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 5630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 5660. Therefore, since the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5461 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660, the third displacement member 5660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 5630. Is displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), and FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), the third displacement member 5660 is the third displacement member. 1 It is maintained in a state closest to the displacement member 5630 (a state in which the protrusion amount is dimension J1).

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a) and 81 (a), the first displacement member 5630 is moved. While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (a), the second displacement member 5640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77 (b) and 79 (B) After passing through the states shown in FIGS. 77 (b) and 81 (b), they are arranged at the overhang positions shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c).

In this case, when the driven member 5641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5641 causes the tip of the connecting pin 5641d to be moved to the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660. The direction of sliding toward the end side (the end on the side where the protrusion height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is high, the upper left side in FIG. 79 (a), and the left side in FIG. 81 (a)) (FIG. 79 (a). ) Counterclockwise) rotation.

Therefore, the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (upper side in FIG. 81 (a)) by the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is projected forward with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c), 79 (a) to 79 (c) and 81 (a). In the section shown in FIG. 81 (c), the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is changed (increased) from the dimension J1 to the dimension J3 via the dimension J2 (J1). <J2 <J3).

Contrary to the above case, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 79 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (c), the second displacement member 5640 (connecting displacement member 642) is relative to the first displacement member 5630 in the opposite direction. After being displaced and undergoing the states shown in FIGS. 77 (b), 79 (b) and 81 (b), they are placed in the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a) and 81 (a). Displacement.

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 5641 about the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 5641d to protrude from the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660). The rotation is in the direction of sliding (clockwise in FIG. 79 (c)) at the end on the lower side, the lower right side in FIG. 79 (c), and the right side in FIG. 81 (c).

Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d is moved to one end side of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is retracted (immersed) to the rear (rear side) by that amount. Is allowed, the elastic recovery force of the urging member S causes the third displacement member 5660 to be brought closer to the first displacement member 5630, from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660. The amount of protrusion is shortened to the dimension J1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 76 (c), 78 (c) and 80 (c), the first displacement member The 5630 is rotated in the upright direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and is arranged at the retracted positions shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a), and 80 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, so that the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5461 is a sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660. Since the back surface of the 5663 is not slid, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are integrally displaced together with the first displacement member 5630.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member 5660 are not displaced. A form in which the third displacement member 5660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 76, 78 and 81) and a second displacement with respect to the first displacement member 5630 while maintaining the first displacement member 5630 in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 77, 79 and 81). In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid interference with the displacement in other adjacent units, and the movable range in such other units can be increased. Can be secured. Further, by projecting the third displacement member 5660 forward, the third displacement member 5660 can be brought closer to the player, and a powerful effect can be performed.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the period in which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced and the period in which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced coincide with each other has been described. In the clockwise rotation unit 6600, the period in which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced and the period in which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced are different. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 6600. In addition, in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, a state in which a part (rear base 610 and front base 620) of the right rotation unit 6600 is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the right-handed rotating unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment has a third displacement member in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 82) of the first displacement member 4630, as in the case of the fourth embodiment. The 4660 is rotatably supported, and the driven member 6641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the second displacement member 6640 (connecting displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are first displaced. It is displaced (rotated) relative to the member 4630.

In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed in a straight line, whereas the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 in the sixth embodiment is the working section 6641c1 as described later. It is formed by bending from the non-interfering section 6641c2 in a shape of abbreviated front view.

As a result, while the connecting pin 643 passes through the working section 6641c1, both the second displacement member 6640 (connecting displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630, while the connecting pin. During the period when 643 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is stopped.

The connecting groove 6641c is a groove-shaped opening through which the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted, and has an action section 6641c1 extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 6641. It is curved in an arc shape with the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) side concave and extends along the width direction of the driven member 6641 (that is, a shape that divides the annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631). It is provided with a non-interference section 6641c2 (formed in).

As will be described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that acts on the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642, and the non-interference section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. 84 and 85 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 86 and 87 show the operation between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 6600 in each state at the time of carrying out.

It should be noted that FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) are shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c), and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) are shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (Fig. 87). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 84 (c) is the same as FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 86 (c) is the same as FIG. 87 (a).

Here, the right-handed rotating unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment has substantially no other configuration except that the shape of the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is different from that of the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment. Since they are formed to be the same, the description of the same part will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 86 (a)) from the retracted positions shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 86 (a), the above is described. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the working section 635a of the first groove 635, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (driven member 6641) with respect to the first displacement member 4630 is not formed. , The second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630.

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) and 86 (a) to 86 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line) is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above. The angle formed by L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

In the state shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 87 (a), the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is the starting end of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 (the working section 6641c and the non-interfering section 6641c2. It is located at the end opposite to the connection portion (on the right side in FIG. 87 (a)). In this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is located at the connecting portion of the working section 635a and the non-interfering section 635b of the first groove 635.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 87 (a), the first displacement member 4630 is moved to FIG. 87 (a). While being maintained in the indicated state (position), the driven member 6641 whose inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 87 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 presses the support shaft 632. It is rotated in the direction of raising the connecting groove 6641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (b)) as the center.

Due to the rotation of the driven member 6641, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1 while sliding on the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b (clockwise in FIG. 87 (a)). As a result, the connecting pin 643 reaches the connecting portion of the working section 6641c1 and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b) (decorative portion 642b is lifted to the uppermost position). State) is formed.

In this case, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the same side (left side of FIG. 87 (b)) as the decorative portion 642b (that is, the position of the center of gravity of the connecting displacement member 642) with respect to the shaft support hole 642a. The connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed so that the inner wall surface of the non-interfering section 6641c2 can support the connecting pin 643 from below. That is, the non-interference section 6641c2 is formed as a surface whose inner wall surface intersects with the moving direction of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 rotates around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight at a predetermined angle. Will be done.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), the inner wall surface of the non-interfering section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 from below (regulates the movement of the connecting pin 643), thereby restricting the movement of the connecting displacement member. It is possible to regulate that 642 rotates about the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. That is, the connected displacement member 642 can be maintained in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

In the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), in the third displacement member 4660, as described above, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641. As a result, it is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes to the intersection angle θ2 ( Is reduced) (θ2 <θ1).

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), the inside of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 The wall surface is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line) The angle formed with L2) is changed (decreased) to the intersection angle θ3 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1).

In this case, since the non-interference section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c is curved in an arc shape centered on the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a), the driven member 6641 holds the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a). Even when rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (b) as the center, the inner wall surface of the non-interfering section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 from below, and the connecting displacement member 642 provides the shaft support hole 642a. Although the rotation is restricted by its own weight as the center, the connecting pin 643 is not pushed upward, and therefore the connecting displacement member 642 is not rotated in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation. That is, the connected displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the rotation of the third displacement member 4660 can be continued.

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the connected displacement member While the connecting pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interfering section 6641c2, the connecting displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c) (FIG. 85 (b)). And FIG. 87 (b)), while the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 passes through the working section 6641c1, the connecting pin 643 is pushed down by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1 to lower the decorative portion 642b. The connecting displacement member 642 is rotated in the direction around the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation.

The operation mode of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment formed in this way will be described with reference to FIG. 88 in comparison with the operation mode of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment.

88 (a) to 88 (c) are schematic front views of the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88 (d) to 88 (g) are right-handed rotating units in the sixth embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of 6600, and each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position is shown.

In the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630 and the first displacement member 4630 are not displaced. 2 Displacement member 3640 and third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (a form between FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b)), and the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (a form between FIGS. 88 (b) and 88 (c)). it can. In this case, in the latter form, the displacement period (start and end) of the second displacement member 3640 is substantially the same as the displacement period (start and end) of the third displacement member 4660.

On the other hand, in the right-handed rotating unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640, and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (FIGS. 88 (d) and 88 (e)). A form in which the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in a stopped state (FIG. 88). The form between (e) and FIG. 88 (f)) and the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640. Therefore, a form in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced (a form between FIG. 88 (f) and FIG. 88 (g)) can be formed.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement period (start and end) of the second displacement member 6640 and the displacement period (start and end) of the third displacement member 4660 can be made different. More specifically, while the displacements of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are started at the same time, the timing at which the displacements of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are stopped is shifted (second displacement member 6640). The displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped).

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. In the third embodiment, the case where the connecting displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaceably arranged in the first displacement member 3630 to form the right-handed rotation unit 3600 has been described, but in the seventh embodiment, the case has been described. In the clockwise rotation unit 7600, the third displacement member 7660 is displaceably arranged on the first displacement member 7630, and the connected displacement member 642 is displaceably arranged on the third displacement member 7660. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 7600. In addition, in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, a state in which a part (rear base 610 and front base 620) of the right rotation unit 7600 is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the right-handed rotating unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment, the third displacement member 7660 is rotatably supported in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 89) of the first displacement member 7630. , The connected displacement member 642 is rotatably supported by the third displacement member 7660. As will be described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated. Along with this, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of the center of rotation in a curved locus.

In the first displacement member 7630, a notch 7369 is formed at the edge on one end side (upper side of FIG. 90), and the space created by the notch 7369 is the support shaft 7665 of the third displacement member 7660, which will be described later. It is considered as the arrangement space of. A connecting groove 7641c is formed in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640. The connecting groove 7641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted.

The groove width of the connecting groove 7641c is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 643. Further, the total length (groove length) of the connecting groove 7641c is longer than that of the connecting groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. As a result, the relative displacement amount (relative rotation angle) of the connected displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be secured.

A support shaft 7665 is projected from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642, and the connection displacement member 642 is the third displacement member 7660 via the support shaft 7665 and the shaft support hole 642a. It is rotatably supported on the back of the.

A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 7665, thereby restricting the indicator shaft 7665 from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a. Further, the support shaft 7665 has a large diameter portion formed on the base side and a small diameter portion having a diameter smaller than that of the large diameter portion on the tip side, and the small diameter portion is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large diameter portion is a portion for raising the connecting displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660, and the raising of the large diameter portion causes the connecting displacement member 642 to be raised in the front-rear direction (for example, for example) with respect to the driven member 7641. , FIG. 91 (a) in the vertical direction of the paper surface) is set to be the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment.

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 7600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. 91 and 92 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 93 and 94 show the operation between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state at the time of carrying out.

It should be noted that FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) are shown in FIGS. 93 (a) to 93 (c), and FIGS. 92 (a) to 92 (c) are shown in FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (c). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 91 (c) is the same as FIG. 92 (a), and FIG. 93 (c) is the same as FIG. 94 (a).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, whereby the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640, and the third displacement member 7630 are slid. Where each of the 7660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 93 (a)) from the retracted positions shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 93 (a), the above is described. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the working section 635a of the first groove 635, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 7640 (driven member 7641) with respect to the first displacement member 7630 is not formed. , The second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 7630.

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) and 93 (a) to 93 (c), the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line) is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above. The angle formed by L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 94 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 94 (a), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is moved to the first groove 635. By passing through the non-interference section 635b of the above, the driven member 7641 rotates around the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a) while the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 94 (a). It is rotated in the direction of lifting the connecting groove 7641c and the connecting pin 3641d (counterclockwise in FIG. 94A).

As a result, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is formed by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed by the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 7641c of the driven member 7641. , Each is pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94 (a)).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, and the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual). The angle formed by the line L2) is changed (decreased) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 via the crossing angle θ2 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1), and the connecting displacement member 642 is attached to the support shaft 7665 (shaft support hole 642a). ) Is rotated in the clockwise direction in FIG. 94 (a), and the decorative portion 642b is lifted upward.

In this case, since the third displacement member 7660 is rotated in the direction of lifting the support shaft 7665 upward with the rotation shaft 4662 as the center of rotation, the rotation of the third displacement member 7660 is used to rotate the third displacement member 7660. The connecting displacement member 642 itself, which is pivotally supported by the support shaft 7665 of the above, can be lifted upward.

That is, according to the seventh embodiment, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 with the support shaft 7665 as the center of rotation, and the first displacement member 7630 has an arcuate locus. It can be displaced (lifted) upwards. As a result, the displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be linked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660 to form a more complicated embodiment, and the amount of protrusion of the decorative portion 642b upward (first). Crossing angle θ4, which is an angle formed by the virtual line L3 that passes through the axial center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and is along the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 64 with respect to the displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1)). Can be enlarged to give it a more upwardly protruding posture.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. In the first embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the outward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the overhang position to the retracted position. Although the case where the left rotation unit 700 is formed is described as described above, in the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the outward path and the return path. Is different. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotating unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotating unit 8700. Further, FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide unit 8773. In addition, in FIGS. 95 and 96, a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 8700 (rear base 710 and front base 720) is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the left rotation unit 8700 according to the eighth embodiment, a guide portion 8737 is recessed in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 95) in the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 8770. As will be described later, the guide portion 8737 is formed as a circumferential path, and the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8733, so that the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be different between the outward path and the return path.

The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that protrudes from the back surface of the flange member 8744 and is arranged eccentrically from the axial center of the rotating shaft 741, and its diameter is slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. By setting it to a small size, it can be moved along the guide portion 8773. An elastic body (not shown) made of a coil spring is housed in the connecting second member 8770 in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body connects the connecting pin 8744a to the connecting second member 8770. It acts in the direction of protruding from the back of the. Therefore, when the connecting pin 8744a moves along the guide portion 8773, the state in which the tip of the connecting pin 8744a is in contact with the bottom surface of the guide portion 8737 is maintained.

The guide portion 8737 is a concave groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section for guiding the connecting pin 8744a, is formed as a circumferential path, and has a plurality of steps (first to third steps 8737h to 8737j) in the path. Is formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

Specifically, the guide portion 8773 extends in a substantially straight line in front view along the width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 97) of the connecting second member 8770 starting from the position P1. A first groove 8737a and a second member connected to the end of the first groove 8737a and extending in a substantially straight line in front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction of FIG. 97) of the connecting second member 8770 starting from the position P2. It is connected to the end of the two grooves 8737b and the second groove 8737b, and is extended while being curved in an arc shape (in this embodiment, an arc shape that is convex in the direction away from the position P2) starting from the position P3. The end is formed from a third groove 8737c whose end is connected to the start end of the first groove 8737a.

A first step 8737h is formed at the connecting portion between the first groove 8737a and the second groove 8737b. The first step 8737h has a bottom surface on the start end side (position P2) of the second groove 8737b lower than the bottom surface on the end side of the first groove 8737a (located on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 97). It is a vertical plane that connects them. As a result, the movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8737a to the start end of the second groove 8737b is allowed, while the movement of the connection pin 8744a from the start end of the second groove 8737b to the end of the first groove 8737a is the second. It can be regulated by one step of 8773h.

Similarly, a second step 8737i and a third step 8737j are formed at the connecting portion between the second groove 8737b and the third groove 8737c and the connecting portion between the third groove 8737c and the first groove 8737a, respectively. The bottom surface of the second step 8737i on the start end side (position P3) of the third groove 8737c is made lower than the bottom surface of the end side of the second groove 8737b, so that the third step 8737j is on the start end side of the first groove 8737a. The bottom surface of (position P1) is formed lower than the bottom surface of the third groove 8737c on the terminal side.

As a result, the connection pin 8744a is allowed to move from the end of the second groove 8737b (third groove 8737c) to the start end of the third groove 8737c (first groove 8737a), while the third groove 8737c (first groove 8737a) is allowed to move. The movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the start end to the end of the second groove 8737b (third groove 8737c) can be regulated by the second step 8737i (third step 8737j).

That is, the connecting pin 8744a is only allowed to orbitally move the guide portion 8733 in the order of the first groove 8737a, the second groove 8737b, and the third groove 8737c along the directions of the arrows L1, the arrow L2, and the arrow L3. ..

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides (presses the inner wall surface) the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to form the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. Where the 8770 and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced, respectively, the mode of displacement of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 8770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101.

98 and 99 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position, and FIGS. 100 and 101 are from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the outbound route.

As shown in FIGS. 98A and 100A, at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged in front of the front base 720.

In this case, it passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741), the virtual line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741). The angle formed by the virtual line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle α1. Further, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is located at the position P1 (starting end of the first groove 8737a) of the guide portion 8737 (see FIG. 97), and the connecting second member 8770 is at the uppermost position (upper side of FIG. 100 (a)). ) Is pushed up.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is rotated around the rotation shaft 761 in the extension direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (a)). By being rotated in the (rotational) direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 8770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 101 (a)), and the guide portion 8737 (first) of the connecting second member 8770 is pulled downward. The inner wall surface of the groove 8737a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P1 guides the guide portion 8737 along the first groove 8737a. Guided in the direction of arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 100 (a)). Relative displacement (relative rotation) to (rotation), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α1 to the intersection angle α2. (Α1 <α2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), the connecting first member is similarly driven as described above. When the 760 is rotated in the extension direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the extension direction (FIG. 100 (b)) with the rotation axis 731 as the center of rotation. ) It is rotated counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 8770 is further pulled downward (lower right side in FIG. 101 (b)), and the guide portion 8737 of the connecting second member 8770 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8737a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a guides the guide portion 8737 along the first groove 8737a in the direction of arrow L1. Further guidance (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 100 (b)). Further relative displacement (relative rotation) to (rotation), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α2 to the intersection angle α3. ) (Α1 <α2 <α3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement is as shown in FIGS. 99 (b) and 101 (b). A state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the member 730 is formed. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided by the guide portion 8737 in the direction of the arrow L1 along the first groove 8737a, passes through the first step 8737h (jumps off), and then abuts on the inner wall surface of the second groove 8737b. , Positioned at position P2 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1 <α2 <α3). <Α4).

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the evacuation position will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105.

102 and 103 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhang position to the evacuation position, and FIGS. 104 and 105 are from the overhang position to the evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the return path. Note that FIG. 98 (a) is the same as FIG. 103 (b), and FIG. 99 (b) is the same as FIG. 102 (a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b). ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 104 (a), at the overhanging position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is located at the position P2 of the guide portion 8737 (the starting end of the second groove 8737b) ( (See FIG. 97), the connecting second member 8770 is in a state of being pulled to the lowermost position (lower right side in FIG. 104 (a)).

Contrary to the above case (outward route shown in FIGS. 98 to 101), the transmission member 754 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 104 (a). When it is rotationally driven to rotate), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 rotates the rotation shaft 731. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (upright) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104 (a)), and the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P2 is moved to the guide portion. 8737 is guided along the second groove 8737b in the direction of arrow L2 (see FIG. 97). In this case, as described above, the second groove 8737b is extended along the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 8770, and the relative displacement of the connecting second member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the longitudinal length of each other. It is a linear motion (slide displacement) in the direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8737b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member 730. Relative displacement (relative rotation) centered on the rotation shaft 741 of 740 is not formed. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), the first connection is performed as in the above case. The member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (b)) with the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (clock 104 (b)) with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation. It is rotated in a clockwise direction, and is further rotated (standing) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104 (b)), so that the connecting pin 8744a secondly pushes the guide portion 8737. It is further guided in the direction of arrow L2 along the groove 8737b, passes through (jumps off) the second step 8737i, and then abuts on the inner wall surface of the third groove 8737c to be positioned at position P3 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8737b, a relative displacement (relative rotation) around the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. Will be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is maximally erected and the first displacement is as shown in FIGS. 103 (b) and 105 (b). A state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the connecting second member 8770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, so that the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the third groove 8737c in the direction of arrow L3 and passes through the third step 8737j (). After (jumping down), it is positioned (returned) to the position P1 by hitting the inner wall surface of the first groove 8737a (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the outward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. ) Can be the same, while the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be different.

Specifically, on the outward path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is the displacement of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. While gradually increasing in proportion to the amount (rotation amount), on the return path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. While doing so, it is possible to form an embodiment in which the displacement is made toward the retracted position and the intersection angle α4 is reduced to the intersecting angle α1 in a short time immediately before being placed at the retracted position.

Further, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the grooves 8737a to 8737c of the guide portion 8773, even when the transmission member 754 (first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, the transmission member 754a is rotationally driven (displaced). The rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path in which the concave groove having a U-shaped cross section is continuous in an endless manner has been described. However, in the guide portion 9773 in the ninth embodiment, the connecting pin 744a is used. It is formed as an opening to be loosely fitted. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 106 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotating unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotating unit 9700. Note that FIGS. 106 and 107 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 9700 (rear base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, in the left rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment, a guide portion 9773 is formed with an opening on one end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side of FIG. 106) of the connecting second member 9770. As will be described later, the form of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is changed between the outward path and the return path by displacement of the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 in the guide portion 9773. can do.

The guide portion 9733 is connected to the first inner wall 9737a extending substantially linearly in the front view along the width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) of the connecting second member 9770 and the end of the first inner wall 9737a. A second inner wall 9737b extending in a substantially straight line in front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction of FIG. 106) of the connecting second member 9770, and being connected to the end of the second inner wall 9737b and having an arc shape. (In the present embodiment, an arc shape that is convex in the direction away from the connecting portion of the first inner wall 9737a and the second inner wall 9973b) is extended while being curved, and the end thereof is connected to the start end of the first inner wall 9973a. The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening to be the inner wall surface.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides (presses the inner wall surface) the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to form the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. Where the 9770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are displaced, respectively, the mode of displacement between the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 9770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described.

108 and 109 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 110 and 111 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the outbound route.

As shown in FIGS. 108 (a) and 110 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged in front of the front base 720.

In this case, it passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741), the virtual line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741). The angle formed by the virtual line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle β1. Further, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is located at the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9737a) of the first inner wall 9737a and the third inner wall 9737c of the guide portion 9733, and the connecting second member 9770 is at the uppermost position (FIG. It is in a state of being pushed up to 110 (a) upper side).

Further, the center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of action of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is the axial view of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the figure). In the state of 110 (a)), the side opposite to the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 110 (a)) passing through the center of gravity of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) and sandwiching the vertical line Z parallel to the direction of gravity. ) Is located.

Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lifting the connecting pin 744a upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110A) with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation. As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744a comes into contact with (presses) the first inner wall 9737a of the guide portion 9737.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is rotated around the rotation shaft 761 in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)). By being rotated in the (rotational) direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 9770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 110 (a)), and the inner wall surface of the guide portion 9737 of the connecting second member 9770 is pulled downward. (1st inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a directs the guide portion 9773 toward the second inner wall 9737b along the first inner wall 9737a. You will be guided in the direction.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 110 (a)). Relative displacement (relative rotation) to (rotation), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β1 to the intersection angle β2. (Β1 <β2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), the connecting first member is similarly driven as described above. When the 760 is rotated in the overhang direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (b)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhang direction (FIG. 110 (b)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. ) It is rotated counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 9770 is further pulled downward (lower right side in FIG. 110 (b)), and the guide portion 9737 of the connecting second member 9770 is further drawn. The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a guides the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9737a to the second inner wall 9737b. You will be further guided in the direction of.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 110 (b)). Further relative displacement (relative rotation) to (rotation), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β2 to the intersection angle β3. ) (Β1 <β2 <β3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement is as shown in FIGS. 109 (b) and 111 (b). A state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the member 730 is formed. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided by the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9737b, so that the connecting portion (second inner wall) of the first inner wall 9973a and the second inner wall 9973b is abutted. It is located at the beginning of 9737b). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle β3 to the intersection angle β4 (β1 <β2 <β3). <Β4).

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the evacuation position will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115.

112 and 113 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhang position to the evacuation position, and FIGS. 114 and 115 are from the overhang position to the evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the return path. Note that FIG. 112 (a) is the same as FIG. 109 (b), and FIG. 113 (b) is the same as FIG. 108 (a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b). ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 114 (a), at the overhanging position, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is a connecting portion (the first) of the first inner wall 9737a and the second inner wall 9737b of the guide portion 9733. 2 Located at the starting end of the inner wall 9737b), the connecting second member 9770 is in a state of being pulled to the lowermost position (lower right side in FIG. 114 (a)).

Further, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is connected to the connecting pin 744a with respect to the vertical line Z in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state shown in FIG. 114 (a)). It is located on the same side (right side in FIG. 114 (a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of pushing down the connecting pin 744a (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation. As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744a comes into contact with (presses) the second inner wall 9737b of the guide portion 9737.

From this state, contrary to the case described above (outward route shown in FIGS. 108 to 111), the transmission member 754 is in the opposite direction (FIG. 114 (Fig. 114)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 114 (a). a) When it is rotationally driven (counterclockwise), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 is moved. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (upright) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 9770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 114A). As described above, the connecting pin 744a is in a state of being abutted (pressed) against the second inner wall 9737b of the guide portion 9733 as the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight. It is guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9973c along the second inner wall 9973b.

In this case, as described above, the second inner wall 9737b is extended along the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 9770, and the relative displacement of the connecting second member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the longitudinal length of each other. It is a linear motion (slide displacement) in the direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730. Relative displacement (relative rotation) around the center of rotation is not formed. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), the first connection is obtained as in the above case. The member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114 (b)) with the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (clocked in FIG. 114 (b)) with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation. It is rotated in a clockwise direction, and is further rotated (standing) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 114 (b)), so that the connecting pin 744a secondly pushes the guide portion 9773. Further guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9973c along the inner wall 9973b and abutting against the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9737c, the connection portion between the second inner wall 9973b and the third inner wall 9973c (the starting end of the third inner wall 9973c) is reached. Be located.

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, a relative displacement (relative rotation) around the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4. Will be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is maximally erected and the first displacement is as shown in FIGS. 113 (b) and 115 (b). A state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the connecting second member 9770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, so that the connecting pin 744a is guided along the third inner wall 9737c toward the first inner wall 9737a, and the connecting pin 744a is guided toward the first inner wall 9737a. By abutting against the inner wall surface of the above, it is positioned (returned) to the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9737a) of the first inner wall 9973a and the third inner wall 9973c. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

In the present embodiment, when the state shown in FIG. 115 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 115 (b), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z, so that the second displacement member 740 is used. , Can be rotated prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770.

Specifically, in a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the same side as the connecting pin 744a (on the right side in FIG. 115 (a)) with respect to the vertical line Z, the second displacement member 740 is Since the connecting pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9737c by rotation due to its own weight, it gradually rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 115 (a) as the connecting second member 9770 is pushed upward (synchronically). On the other hand, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the opposite side of the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 115 (a)) beyond the vertical line Z due to this rotation, the second displacement member 740 Is rotated in the direction of lifting the connecting pin 744a upward by its own weight. That is, it is rotated prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the outward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. While the modes can be the same, not only can the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 be different, but on the return path, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement can be different. The angle formed by the member 740 (virtual line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the intersection angle β4, and immediately before being placed at the retracted position, the intersection angle β4 is changed to the intersection angle β1 at high speed (short time). A mode of reduction can be formed.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment is different from the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment only in that it includes a cage 10746, and has the same configuration other than that, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic rear view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment, and shows a state in which the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the vertical line Z. As shown in FIG. 116, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment, a cage 10746 is arranged on the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Here, the cage 10746 will be described with reference to FIG. 117.

117 (a) is a front view of the cage 10746, FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage 10746 in the CXVIIb-CXVIIb line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 117 (c) is a sectional view of the cage 10746. It is sectional drawing of the cage 10746 in the CXVIIc-CXVIIc line of FIG. 117 (a).

As shown in FIG. 117, the cage 10746 is formed in a tubular shape having an internal space having a circular cross section, and a predetermined heavy object is displaceably stored in the internal space. In the present embodiment, a predetermined heavy object is a liquid LQ, and about 1/3 of the volume of the internal space is filled with the liquid LQ. Therefore, the liquid LQ can be displaced to one end side or the other end side (right side or left side in FIG. 117C) of the cage 10746 in the longitudinal direction according to the inclination of the cage 10746 (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

It will be described back to FIG. 116. The cage 10746 has a posture (horizontal posture) in which the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z in the axial direction (that is, the state of FIG. 116) of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732). It is arranged on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740.

Therefore, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation, the cage 10746 in the horizontal posture is in an inclined posture in which the one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction is positioned downward. , The stored heavy object (liquid LQ) is displaced to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction (that is, the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

As a result, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated about the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation, the second displacement member 740 and the cage 10746 are integrated as a member as compared with the case where the cage 10746 is not arranged. It is possible to increase the amount of change in the position of the center of mass (center of gravity G') when it is regarded as.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. 118 and 119 are schematic rear views of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 120 and 121 are from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating a return path toward.

As shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member thereof is rotated. When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the 730, the cage 10746 is tilted according to the rotation position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space thereof is applied. The cage 10746 can be displaced to one end or the other end in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, the position of the center of gravity G'of the second displacement member 740 and the cage 10746 can be arranged at a position farther from the vertical line Z as compared with the case where the cage 10746 is not arranged.

Therefore, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9737c of the guide portion 9733, the rotation of the second displacement member 740 using the center of gravity G'is ensured by its own weight, and the connecting pin 744a is Can be easily maintained in a state of being in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9737c. As a result, the rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed, and the relative displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in the section where the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770, the center of gravity G'can be used to ensure the advance of the second displacement member 740. As a result, the rotation from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (shorter time) immediately before being placed in the retracted position.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. In the first embodiment, a case where a relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in both the outward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the overhang position to the retracted position will be described. However, in the counterclockwise rotating unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only in the outward path, not in the return path. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 shows a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 11700 (rear base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the second displacement member 740 and the connecting second member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism including a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774. In this case, as will be described later, since the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch, the linear motion of the connecting second member 11770 is converted into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740 on the outward path, while the connecting second member is converted on the return path. By restricting the conversion of the linear motion of the member 11770 into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be formed only on the outward path.

The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch in which a roller and a spring are interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring. The rotating shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 is fastened and fixed to the inner ring, and the rack gear 11774 is attached to the outer circumference of the outer ring. A gear to be meshed with is engraved. In this case, the pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of the second displacement member 740, while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

The rack gear 11774 is a gear engraved on the side surface of the second connecting member 11770, and is meshed with the pinion gear 11747. The engraving range of the rack gear 11774 is a range in which the meshing with the pinion gear 11747 is released when the connecting second member 11770 is pulled to the maximum downward (see FIGS. 126 (b) and 129). ).

An urging spring SP formed as a metal torsional spring is interposed between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. In the urging spring SP, the arm extending from one end of the coil portion is locked to the first displacement member 730 in a state where the coil portion is fitted onto the rotating shaft 741 and elastically twisted and deformed. An arm extending from the other end of the coil portion is locked to the second displacement member 740, and its elastic recovery force is applied to the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). It acts in the direction of maintaining the angle formed by the crossing angle γ1.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130.

Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides (presses the inner wall surface) the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to form the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. Where the 11770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are displaced, respectively, the mode of displacement between the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 11770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126.

123 and 124 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are directed from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the outbound route.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 125 (a), at the retracted position, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is an intersection angle. It is set to γ1. In this case, the connecting second member 11770 is in a state of being pushed up to the uppermost position (upper side in FIG. 125 (a)).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 125 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is rotated around the rotation shaft 761 in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 125 (a)). By being rotated in the (rotational) direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a) through the states shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 11770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 125 (a)), so that the rack gear 11774 of the connecting second member 11770 is a pinion gear. 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125 (a). The rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is defined as the rotation in the direction of transmitting the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, after going through the states shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b), as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a), the second displacement member 740 is the urging spring SP (see FIG. 122). ) Is elastically deformed in the twisting direction and is rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased. It is changed (increased) from the crossing angle γ1 to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1 <γ2 <γ3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is projected to the maximum as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), and the first displacement member The 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhang position.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), when the connecting second member 11770 is pulled to the lowermost position, the meshing of the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 is released. As a result, the second displacement member 740 receives the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP (see FIG. 122) and returns to the initial position. That is, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the evacuation position will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130.

127 and 128 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhang position to the evacuation position, and FIGS. 129 and 130 are from the overhang position to the evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the return path. Note that FIG. 127 (a) is the same as FIG. 124 (b), and FIG. 128 (b) is the same as FIG. 123 (a).

Here, the rotation position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b) is the same as the rotation position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b). ..

Contrary to the above case (outward route shown in FIGS. 123 to 126), the transmission member 754 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 127 (a) and 129 (a). When it is rotationally driven to rotate), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 rotates the rotation shaft 731. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 goes through the states shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 128 (a) and 129 (b) and 130 (a), and then goes through the states shown in FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b). ), It is placed (standing) in the retracted position.

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 129 (a)), so that FIG. 127 (b) and FIG. 129 (b) show. As shown, the rack gear 11774 is meshed with the pinion gear 11747, and the connecting second member 11770 is pushed further upward, so that the rack gear 11774 rotates the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129 (b). The rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is defined as the rotation in the direction of cutting the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, the displacement position shown in FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b) is changed from the state shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a). In the section until the second displacement member 740 is arranged in, the second displacement member 740 is not rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, and the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) The angle formed by is maintained at the intersection angle γ1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the outward path, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (tilted) in the projecting direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member 730 is tilted with respect to the first displacement member 730. 2 The displacement members 740 are gradually displaced relative to each other, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3. At the overhang position, a displacement mode that changes to the intersection angle γ1 is formed, but on the return path, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed (that is, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line). (While maintaining the angle formed by the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) at the intersection angle γ1), the first displacement member 730 rotates (stands up) in the retracting direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. It is possible to form a displacement mode.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of being projected from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engaging member 12726 in the twelfth embodiment is the front base 12720. It is arranged so that it can appear and disappear in front of. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 131 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 12700 according to the twelfth embodiment. 132 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 12720 in line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, in the left rotation unit 12700 according to the twelfth embodiment, the base side engaging member 12726 and the transmission member 12728 are housed in the internal space of the front base 12720, and the second displacement member is accommodated. An insertion member 12745 is arranged on the back surface of the 12740.

The base-side engaging member 12726 is a slide portion that is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 132 (a) vertical direction on the paper surface, FIG. 132 (b) vertical direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. A base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 12726c (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 132 (a) and the lower surface in FIG. 132 (b)).

In the base side engaging member 12726, the slide portion 12726c is slid and displaced toward the front along a guide groove (not shown), so that the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b are displaced from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (paper surface in FIG. 132 (a)). The slide portion 12726c slides toward the back side (the back side of the paper surface and the upper side of FIG. 132 (b)) along a guide groove (not shown) while projecting to the front side and the lower side of FIG. 132c (b). By being displaced, the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b can be immersed in the receiving recess 727.

In this case, an urging spring SP1 made of a coil spring is arranged between the front surface of the slide portion 12726c and the back surface of the front base 12720 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed, and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP1 is performed. The force keeps the base-side engaging member 12726 in an immersive state (the state shown in FIG. 132B). In this immersive state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 12720 are arranged flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the base side engaging member 12726.

The side surface of the slide portion 12726c (left side in FIG. 132 (b)) is formed as an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the transmission member 12728 toward the back side, and the inclined surface of the transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. Be abutted.

The transmission member 12728 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction (FIG. 132 (a) left-right direction, FIG. 132 (b) left-right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720, and is arranged on one end side (FIG. 132 (FIG. 132). b) The right side) is exposed from the insertion port 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720. Further, on the other end side (left side of FIG. 132B) of the transmission member 12728, an inclined surface is formed which is inclined in a direction away from the base side engaging member 12726 toward the front side, and the inclined surface is formed. , The inclined surface of the base side engaging member 12726 is brought into contact with the base side engaging member 12.726.

Therefore, by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 12726 and the transmission member 12728, the transmission member 12728 is slidably displaced in the direction closer to the base side engaging member 12726, whereby the base side engaging member 12726 is moved to the front side. The base side engaging member 12726 can be slid to the back side (inside the receiving recess 727) by sliding displacement (protruding) to the base side engaging member 12728 in a direction away from the base side engaging member 12726. It can be displaced (immersed).

An urging spring SP2 made of a coil spring is arranged between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the transmission member is generated by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP2. The 12728 is maintained at a position separated from the base-side engaging member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132 (b), that is, the position where the base-side engaging member 12726 is immersed).

The pressing member 12745 includes a base portion 12745a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 12740 and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the height of the base portion 12745a is set higher than the height of the base portion of the displacement side engaging member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745b can be inserted into the insertion port 12720a of the front base 12720. At the same time, the extending direction of the insertion portion 12745b is set to be the same direction (parallel) as the extending direction of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engaging action of the base side engaging member 12726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

FIG. 133 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 12700 for explaining the engaging action of the base side engaging member 12726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at that time is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 133 (c), and the second displacement member 12740 is in the state shown in FIG. 133 (d). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)) with respect to the front base 12720, first, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 The tip is brought into contact with one end side of the transmission member 12728 via the insertion port 12720a of the front base 12720.

When the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)) with respect to the front base 12720 from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a), the insertion portion 12745 b of the pressing member 12745 is displaced. By being inserted into the front base 12720 from the insertion port 12720a against the urging force of the urging springs SP1 and SP2, the transmission member 12728 is pushed in a direction close to the base side engaging member 12726 (slide displacement). Will be).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133 (b) and 133 (c), the base-side engaging member 12726 gradually protrudes to the front of the front base 12720 and is displaced toward the base-side engaging member 12726. The side engaging members 742 are brought close to each other, and the bent portions 726b and 742b of each other enter the inner surface side of the bent portions 726b and 742b of the other. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133 (d), when the second displacement member 12740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 12720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are projected to the overhanging positions, the elastic recovery force of the urging springs SP1 and SP2 causes the base-side engaging member 12726 to receive the receiving recess 727. You can immerse yourself inside. That is, in the immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 12726 can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface of the front base 12720. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 12720 is exposed, it is possible to improve the appearance by making it difficult for the player to see the base side engaging member 12726.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 projecting from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the thirteenth embodiment has been described. The displacement side engaging member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in the embodiment is engaged with the front wall surface of the front base 13720. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 13700 according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 135 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 13720 in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line in FIG. 135 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the counterclockwise rotating unit 13700 according to the thirteenth embodiment is attached to the front base 13720 on the front side (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 135 (a), lower side in FIG. 135 (b)) and the side surface side thereof. An opening 13720a connected to (the right side of FIGS. 135A and 135B) is formed, and the rotating member 13726 is rotatably arranged in the space formed by the opening 13720a.

The rotating member 13726 is formed in a cross-sectional view from the side surface portion 13726a that closes the side surface side of the front base 13720 and the front surface portion 13726b that closes the front side of the front base 13720 in the opening 13720a, and is formed in a cross-sectional view of the side surface portion 13726a. One side (opposite side of the front portion 13726b) is rotatably supported.

That is, the rotating member 13726 is arranged at the initial position (position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) that closes the opening 13720a by being rotated to one side about the shaft support portion of the side surface portion 13726a. By being rotated to the other side around the shaft support portion of the side surface portion 13726a, it is immersed in the front base 13720.

In this case, an urging spring SP3 made of a torsion spring is arranged between the front base 13720 and the rotating member 13726 in a state of being elastically twisted and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP3 causes the urging spring SP3 to be elastically deformed. The rotating member 13726 is maintained in its initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the front surface portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a and the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720 are arranged flush with each other, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the rotating member 13726.

The displacement side engaging member 13742 includes a base portion 13742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 13742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 13742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can come into contact with the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726. As a result, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b can rotate the rotating member 13726 in the immersion direction (see FIG. 136).

Next, the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engaging member 13742 will be described with reference to FIG. 136.

FIG. 136 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 13700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engaging member 13742, and when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state of is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 136 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 136 (b), and the second displacement member 13740 is in the state shown in FIG. 136 (c). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 136 (a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 The tip of the is abutted against the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726.

When the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720 from the state shown in FIG. 136 (a), the bent portion of the displacement side engaging member 13742 The 742b pushes (rotates) the rotating member 13726 in the immersion direction against the urging force of the urging spring SP3.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), the bent portion 742 b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 gradually enters the internal space of the front base 13720 through the opening 13720a, and is shown in FIG. 136 (c). As described above, when the second displacement member 13740 is arranged in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 can be engagedly faced with the back surface of the front base 13720. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 13720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are projected to the overhanging position, the rotating member 13726 is arranged (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP3. Can be made to. That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the front surface portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720, respectively. As a result, even when the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotating member 13726 can be made difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of being projected from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engaging member 14726 in the 14th embodiment is the front base 14720. It is arranged so that it can appear and disappear in front of. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 137 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the left rotation unit 14700 according to the 14th embodiment. 138 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 138 (b) is a line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 138 (a). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 14700 in the above. Further, FIG. 139 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the overhang position, and FIG. 139 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700, and FIG. 139 (b) is a CXXXIXb of FIG. 139 (a). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 in the-CXXXIXb line.

As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, in the left rotation unit 14700 according to the 14th embodiment, the base side engaging member 14726 is housed in the internal space of the front base 14720, and the rack member 14752 is located on one end side in the longitudinal direction ( A transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front surface of FIG. 137 (upper side).

The base-side engaging member 14726 includes a slide portion 14726c that is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 138 (b) and FIG. 139 (b) left-right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. , A base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 14726c (the surface on the left side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)).

The base side engaging member 14726 slides and displaces the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b toward the front along a guide groove (not shown) so that the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b can be moved from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (left side in FIG. 138 (b)). ) (See FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slidably displaced toward the back side (right side in FIG. 139 (b)) along a guide groove (not shown) to accept the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b. It can be immersed in the recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

In this case, an urging spring SP4 made of a coil spring is arranged between the back surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the back surface base 710 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP4. The force keeps the base-side engaging member 14726 in an immersive state (the state shown in FIG. 139 (b)). In this immersive state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 14720 are arranged flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the base side engaging member 14726.

The back surface of the slide portion 14726c (right side of FIG. 138 (b) and FIG. 139 (b)) is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 toward the upper side (upper side of FIG. 138 (b) and FIG. 139 (b)). It is formed as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front surface) of the transmission portion 14752b of the rack member 14752 is brought into contact with the inclined surface.

On the front surface of the transmission portion 14752b (left side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)), the base side engaging member 14726 (slide portion) is directed downward (lower side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)). An inclined surface inclined in a direction away from 14726c) is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c is brought into contact with the inclined surface.

Therefore, as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 14726 and the transmission portion 14752b, the base side engaging member 14726 slides toward the front side (direction protruding from the receiving recess 727). In addition to being able to be displaced, the base-side engaging member 14726 can be slid-displaced toward the back surface (direction of immersion in the receiving recess 727) as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced downward and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b are displaced from each other. It can be engaged, and it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting in a direction away from the front base 14720.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the uppermost position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the overhanging position, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP4 causes the base side to engage. The member 14726 can be immersed in the receiving recess 727. That is, in the immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 14726 can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface of the front base 14720. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 14726 is less likely to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of being projected from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engaging member 15726 in the fifteenth embodiment is the front base 15720. It is arranged so that it can be slidably displaced in front of the. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 140 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the left rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment. 141 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 15720 on the CXLIb-CXLIb line in FIG. 141 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the counterclockwise rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment is attached to the front base 15720 on the front side (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 141 (a), lower side in FIG. 141 (b)) and the side surface side thereof. An opening 15720a connected to (the right side of FIGS. 141 (a) and 141 (b)) is formed, and the front side (lower side of FIG. 141 (b)) of the front base 15720 in the space formed by the opening 15720a. A base-side engaging member 15726 is arranged in the portion so as to be slidable.

The base-side engaging member 15726 is formed in a flat plate shape having substantially the same shape as the front side of the front base 15720 in the opening 15720a (that is, a shape that closes the opening 15720a in the front view), and is formed on the front base 15720. 1 guide groove 15720b1 and 2nd guide groove 15720b2 are arranged so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (FIG. 141 (a) and FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction).

The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed so as to have a first inclination angle with respect to the left-right direction (left-right direction of FIG. 141 (b)) of the front base 15720 in the top view shown in FIG. 141 (b). The guide groove 15720b2 is formed so as to have an inclination angle (second inclination angle) smaller than the inclination angle of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction (FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction) of the front base 15720. To. In the present embodiment, the second inclination angle is set to 0 °. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed parallel to the left-right direction of the front base 15720.

Therefore, the base side engaging member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. 141 (b), so that the back side (FIG. 141 (b)) diagonally rearward of the front base 15720. It is slid and displaced toward the upper left side), and then, by being guided along the second guide groove 15720b2, it is slid and displaced toward the side of the front base 15720 (left side in FIG. 141 (b)), and the front surface. Immerse yourself in the interior of the base 15720.

In this case, an urging spring (not shown) made of a coil spring is arranged between the front base 15720 and the base side engaging member 15726 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the urging spring The elastic recovery force keeps the base-side engaging member 15726 in its initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the base side engaging member 15726 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 141 (a) and the lower surface in FIG. 141 (b)) and the front surface of the front base 15720 are arranged flush with each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the side engaging member 15726.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engaging action of the base side engaging member 15726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

FIG. 142 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 15700 for explaining the engaging action of the base side engaging member 15726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at that time is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 142 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), and the second displacement member 740 is in the state shown in FIG. 142 (d). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced with respect to the front base 15720 in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142 (a)), the displacement side engages. The tip of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted through the opening 15720a into the inside of the front base 15720, and the base portion 742a of the displacement side engaging member 742 is brought into contact with the side surface of the base side engaging member 15726.

When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142 (b)) with respect to the front base 15720 from the state shown in FIG. 142 (b), as shown in FIG. 142 (c). , The base portion 742a of the displacement side engaging member 742 pushes the base side engaging member 15726 along the first guide groove 15720b1 in the immersion direction (slide displacement) against the urging force of the urging spring. When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction from the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), the base-side engaging member 15726 is pushed in the immersion direction along the second guide groove 15720b2 (slide displacement). Will be).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), when the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742 is placed on the back surface of the base side engaging member 15726. , Can be engaged and face-to-face. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 15720 (lower side in FIG. 142C).

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the overhanging position, the base side engaging member 15726 is arranged (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring. ) Can be done. That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface of the front base 15720. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base-side engaging member 15726 are less likely to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 projecting from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement side engaging member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in the embodiment is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 143 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the left rotation unit 16700 according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 144 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 16720 at the CXLIVb-CXLIVb line in FIG. 144 (a).

Further, FIG. 145 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 16700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engaging member 16742, and the second displacement member 16740 is moved to the retracted position. The transition state when displaced toward is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 145 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 145 (b), and the second displacement member 16740 is in the state shown in FIG. 145 (c). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, in the left rotation unit 16700 according to the 16th embodiment, an opening 16720a is formed on the side surface (the surface on the right side of FIGS. 135A and 135B) of the front base 16720. ..

The displacement side engaging member 16742 includes a base portion 16742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 16742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. The height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720.

As a result, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is displaced through the opening 16720a as the front base. When the second displacement member 16740 is gradually entered into the internal space of 16720 and the second displacement member 16740 is arranged in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. It can be face-to-face as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 16720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the opening 16720a may be opened in the front base 16720, and it is not necessary to provide the base-side engaging member, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since the opening 16720a is arranged on the side surface of the front base 16720, the opening 16720a is visually recognized by the player when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the overhanging direction and the front surface of the front base 16720 is exposed. It can be made difficult and the appearance can be improved.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 projecting from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement side engaging member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in the embodiment is engaged with the back surface of the back surface base 710. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 146 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the left rotation unit 17700 according to the 17th embodiment. Further, FIG. 147 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit 17700 for explaining the engaging action of the rear base 710 and the displacement side engaging member 17742, and the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at the time is schematically illustrated.

The second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 147 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 147 (b), and the second displacement member 17740 is in the state shown in FIG. 147 (c). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the left rotation unit 17700 according to the 17th embodiment, the entire front surface and side surface of the front base 17720 on one end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side of FIG. 146) are formed as decorative surfaces. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base-side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted from the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

The displacement side engaging member 17742 includes a base portion 17742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 17742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. The height of the base portion 17742a is set so that the inner surface of the bent portion 742b can face the back surface of the back surface base 710 at a predetermined interval.

As a result, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 17742 is gradually moved toward the back surface side of the back surface base 710 with the displacement. When the second displacement member 17740 is arranged in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 17742 can be engagedly faced with the back surface of the back surface base 710. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 17720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to provide the base-side engaging member on the front base 17720, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, since it is not necessary to form an opening on the side surface of the front base 17720, it is possible to improve the appearance of the front base 17720 by avoiding that the functional part unrelated to the decoration is visually recognized by the player. Can be done. In other words, since it is not necessary for the player to obscure the side surface of the front base 17720 by the second displacement member 17740 arranged at the overhang position, the overhang amount of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the effect. be able to.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. In the right-handed rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the operation of displacementing (standing) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the overhanging direction toward the retracted position (standing operation of the first displacement member 630) is performed by the drive motor 650. Although the case where it is performed only by the rotational driving force has been described, the standing operation of the first displacement member 630 in the right-handed rotating unit 18600 of the 18th embodiment utilizes the action of the inertial force in addition to the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Is done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the right-handed rotating unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a front view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position, and FIG. 150 is a front view of the clockwise rotating unit 18600 when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section of.

In addition, in FIG. 149 (a) and FIG. 150 (a), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are arranged at the overhanging positions (that is, FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c)). Corresponds to. Further, FIGS. 149 (b) and 150 (b) correspond to FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b), and FIGS. 149 (c) and 150 (c) are shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 36 (b). Corresponds to 36 (a).

Further, FIG. 151 is a schematic rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 151 (a), 151 (b) and FIGS. 151 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 150 (a), 150 (b) and 150 (c), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the right-handed rotating unit 18600 in the eighteenth embodiment, the contacted portion 18629 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape from the front surface of the front base 18620 has a decorative portion 642b in the connecting displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. A substantially columnar contact portion 18644 is projected from the back surface. The contact portion 18644 is arranged at an end portion opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) in the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 18642.

As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the contacted portion 18629 and the contacted portion 18644 are in the middle of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 18644 is formed so as to be able to contact the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629 (the upper surface of FIG. 148).

Specifically, from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 149 (a), 150 (a) and 151 (a), as shown in FIGS. 149 (b), 150 (b) and 151 (b), The connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) in a direction retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 630, and FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c) and 151 (c). ), When the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated to the maximum with the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation, the contact portion 18644 comes into contact with the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629.

From the states shown in FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c), and 151 (c), rotation (standing) of the first displacement member 630 toward the retracted position centered on the rotation axis 631 is started. (See FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b)), the contact portion 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629, and the contacted portions 18629 and the contacted portion 18644 are separated from each other. The contact is released.

In this case, in the section until the contact portion 18644 comes into contact with the contacted portion 18629 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 149, 150 and 151), the drive motor 650 uses only the second displacement member 18640. It may be driven by rotation, and the drive load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. It is considered to be the load of. Further, since the displacement direction of the connected displacement member 18642 is the direction of descending downward in the direction of gravity, the load of the drive motor 650 is also reduced from that point.

On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, from such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from such a state, since the first displacement member 630 is operated to stand up against gravity, the load of the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased from this point as well.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connection displacement member 18642, and the connection displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633. When rotated as a center, the contact portion 18644 is brought into contact with the contacted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151 (c)).

That is, the rotation of the connection displacement member 18642 around the support shaft 633 can be restricted by the contact between the contacted portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 18642 can be stopped suddenly. , The inertial force of the connecting displacement member 18642 generated by the sudden stop is the force in the direction of displacement (that is, standing up) the first displacement member 630 in the retracting direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the center of rotation (arrow in FIG. 151 (c)). As F), it can act on the first displacement member 630.

As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630. Also, when added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650, the above-mentioned inertial force can be exerted as a force for assisting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (large) in the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 630 and 18640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the sex.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. In the clockwise rotation unit 18600 of the 18th embodiment, the case where the contact portion 18644 of the connection displacement member 18642 is brought into contact with the contacted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 has been described, but the connection displacement member 19642 in the 19th embodiment has been described. The contact portion 19644 of the above is in contact with the contacted portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 152 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 19600 in the 19th embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 19600.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in the clockwise rotation unit 19600 in the 19th embodiment, the driven member 19641 of the second displacement member 19640 and the connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the connecting displacement member 19642 are the first. It is set at a position different from that in the case of one embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

Specifically, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (the side opposite to the second groove 641b across the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side of FIGS. 152 and 153) is extended while being curved in an arc shape, and the curved portion thereof. A connecting groove 641c is arranged on the extending tip side of the. By this curved portion, the interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642a of the connecting displacement member 1964 is avoided. The connecting displacement member 1964 is formed by projecting a plate-shaped overhanging portion 19642c outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and a connecting pin 643 is projected on the front side of the overhanging portion 19642c.

In this case, in the above-described first embodiment, the axis of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 is centered, and the shaft of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642. The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is located inside (center side) of the virtual circle passing through the center.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a virtual center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641 passes through the center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 1964. The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is located on the outside of the circle.

Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the connected displacement member 1964 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is opposite to that in the case of the first embodiment. Here, the relative rotation in the opposite direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157.

154 and 155 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 19600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 156 and 157 show the operation between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state at the time of carrying out.

Note that FIGS. 154 (a), 154 (b) and 154 (c) are in the same state as FIGS. 156 (a), 156 (b) and 156 (c), respectively, and are in the same state as in FIG. 155 (a). ), FIG. 155 (b) and FIG. 155 (c) are in the same state as in FIGS. 157 (a), 157 (b) and 157 (c), respectively. Further, FIG. 154 (c) is the same as FIG. 155 (a), and FIG. 156 (c) is the same as FIG. 157 (a).

Here, the clockwise rotation unit 19600 in the 19th embodiment rotates relative to the first displacement member 19630 of the connection displacement member 19642 due to the difference in the positions of the connection portions (connection groove 641c and connection pin 643) described above. Since the other operation modes are formed substantially the same except that the direction of the above is opposite to that of the first embodiment, the description of the same portion will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 156, at the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 156 (a)), and the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is moved to the first groove 635 (action). By pushing down the inner wall surface of the section 635a) and the second groove 641b in the overhanging direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the overhanging direction in a state of being integrated with the second displacement member 19640.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 157 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 155 (a) and 157 (a), the drive pin 654b is moved to the first displacement member 19630. While passing through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 157 (a)).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), the driven member 19641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in the direction of raising the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 157 (b)). The rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 19642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 19642 lowers the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation. It is rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 108 (b)).

That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, the connected displacement portion 19642 is displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 19630 in the direction opposite to that in the case of the first embodiment. After that, as shown in FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is the non-interference section 635b and the second displacement member 19640 in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. By reaching the end of the two grooves 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

It will be described back to FIG. 152 and FIG. 153. In the present embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 19639 is projected from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, and a substantially cylindrical contact portion 19644 is projected from the front surface of the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642. .. The contacted portion 19639 is arranged between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630.

The contacted portion 19369 and the contacted portion 19644 are formed in a predetermined section in the middle of the displacement of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 1964 is formed so as to be in contact with the side surface (the surface on the right side of FIG. 153). Here, the action of the contact between the contacted portion 19639 and the contacted portion 19644 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 160.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position, and FIG. 159 is a front view of the clockwise rotating unit 19600 when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section of.

In addition, FIG. 158 (a) and FIG. 159 (a) show a state in which the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhanging positions (that is, FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c)). Corresponds to. Further, FIGS. 158 (b) and 159 (b) correspond to FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), and FIGS. 158 (c) and 159 (c) correspond to FIGS. 155 (a) and 157 (b). Corresponds to 157 (a).

Further, FIG. 160 is a schematic rear view of the right-handed rotating unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhanging position to the retracting position, and FIGS. 160 (a), 160 (b) and FIGS. 160 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 159 (a), 159 (b) and 159 (c), respectively.

From the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 158 (a), 159 (a) and 160 (a), as shown in FIGS. 158 (b), 159 (b) and 160 (b), the connecting displacement member 19642. Is rotated around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) in a direction retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, as shown in FIGS. 158 (c), 159 (c) and 160 (c). When the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated to the maximum with the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation, the contact portion 19644 comes into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639.

In this case, in the section until the contact portion 19644 comes into contact with the contacted portion 19639 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 158, 159 and 160), the drive motor 650 uses only the second displacement member 19640. It may be driven by rotation, and the drive load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. It is considered to be the load of.

On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contacted portion 19369, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. Therefore, from such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from such a state, since the operation is such that the first displacement member 19630 stands up against gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the abutting portion 19644 is provided on the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 1964, the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated around the support shaft 633, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642. The contact portion 19644 lifted upward in accordance with the above is brought into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160 (c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 1964 around the support shaft 633 can be restricted by the contact between the contacted portion 19638 and the contacting portion 19644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 1964 can be stopped suddenly. , The inertial force of the connecting displacement member 19642 generated by the sudden stop is displaced (that is, upright) in the retracting direction with the first displacement member 19630 as the rotation center with the rotation shaft 631 as the center of rotation (arrow in FIG. 160 (c)). As F), it can act on the first displacement member 19630.

As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630. Also, when added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650, the above-mentioned inertial force can be exerted as a force for assisting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 650 from being suddenly changed (largely), stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 19630 and 19640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and make the drive motor 650 durable. It is possible to improve the sex.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 840 (receiving surface 844) is performed regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (that is, either the first state or the second state). However, in the winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 20840 (reception surface 844) is restricted by the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment. Further, FIG. 162 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 20065 in a state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the first state, and FIG. 162 (b) shows a winning in a state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state. It is sectional drawing of the apparatus 20065. Note that FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 161 in the winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment, the seesaw member 20840 is formed with a regulating portion 20748. The restricting portion 20848 is formed as a substantially triangular portion in front view that is erected upward (upper side in FIG. 161) from the edge portion of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845.

As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 is in the first state, the regulating portion 20748 is located outside the opening region of the delivery port 821c, whereby the opening width of the delivery port 821c is widened. (FIG. 162 (a) left-right dimension) is maintained at a dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is permitted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 is in the second state, the regulating unit 20848 is brought closer to the delivery port 821c side as the seesaw member 20840 rotates, and the regulating unit 20848 A part is located inside the opening area of the outlet 821c (that is, a part of the restricting part 20848 overlaps the opening area of the outlet 821c). As a result, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is reduced to the dimension W2, which is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (W2 <W1). Therefore, the sending of the game ball from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is restricted (prohibited).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the guide passage (delivery port 821c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (allowable) according to the state of the seesaw member 20840. Or regulation).

That is, in the first state, the game ball is sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, and the game ball is rolled from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to rotate the seesaw member 20840. , The second state can be formed quickly.

Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 started to rotate toward the second state, when the game balls were further continuously sent out from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844, they were sent out first (received by the receiving surface 844). ) A state in which the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is formed, and the seesaw member 20840 is likely to be maintained in the second state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 is started to rotate toward the second state, the regulating unit 20848 narrows the opening width of the sending port 821c to the dimension W2, so that the receiving surface from the sending port 821c It is possible to regulate (prohibit) the delivery of the game ball to the 844 and secure the time for discharging the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d.

That is, until the discharge of the game ball from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d is completed and the game ball on the seesaw member 20840 is exhausted, the game ball is waited to be sent from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Can be made to. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

The dimension W2 may be larger than the diameter of the game ball as long as it is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, since the opening width of the sending port 821c is narrowed by the regulating unit 20848, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to pass through, and the time required for sending the game ball from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is increased accordingly. It can be made to (delay the passage of the game ball). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the case where the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d by rolling along the downward slope of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 has been described. The winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 for pushing out the game ball and discharging it to the discharge port 821d. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

163 (a) and 163 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 21065 according to the 21st embodiment, and correspond to FIG. 54.

As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. The rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 and comes into contact with the game ball on the seesaw member 840 regardless of whether the seesaw member 840 forms the first state or the second state. Placed at a possible height position.

The rotating member 21870 has a shaft support 21871 that is rotatably supported on the back surface of the front base 810 through which a shaft support pin (not shown) is inserted, and a shaft support 21871 that projects unilaterally from the shaft support 21871 and a delivery port 821c. The plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 facing the plate, and the plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and the extrusion plate facing the discharge port 821d while projecting from the shaft support 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872. It is equipped with 21873.

The shaft support portion 21871 is arranged in a posture in which the axial direction thereof is along the direction of gravity (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)) (that is, orthogonal to the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21872 and the extruded plate 21873 are connected with a predetermined intersection angle with the shaft support portion 21871 as the intersection center. Therefore, the rotating member 21870 is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of the shaft support portion 21871 (gravity).

In this case, in the rotating member 21870, when the extrusion plate 21873 is rotated along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 163 (a)), the receiving plate 21872 is the seesaw member 840 as shown in FIG. 163 (a). At the rotational position of the receiving plate 21872 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the posture is such that the receiving plate 844 is projected upward (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)). The extruded plate 21873 is in a posture of projecting upward from the inclined surface 845 and / or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

That is, in the rotating member 21870, at the rotational position where the extrusion plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (lower side in FIG. 163 (a)), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), at the rotational position where the receiving plate 21872 is retracted to the side opposite to the delivery port 821c (lower side in FIG. 163 (b)) in the posture of being advanced toward the side close to 821c. The extruded plate 21873 is in a posture of being advanced toward the side close to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 from the delivery port 821c. When the game ball is sent out to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 receives the extruded plate 21873. Is rotated in a direction that projects above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be pushed out by the extrusion plate 21873 and discharged to the discharge port 821d.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened so that the first state and the second state can be set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

The game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 is in a posture in which the extruded plate 21873 is projected above the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 (that is, the posture). , The game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 163 (b)) is retracted from the extruded plate 21873 even if it is arranged in the posture shown in FIG. 163 (b). Since it is rolled along the discharge surface 846, the rotating member 21870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving plate 21872 is projected upward from the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163 (a)).

In this way, the rotating member 21870 utilizes the rolling of the game ball to be in an initial position (a position where the game ball can be received by the receiving plate 21872 of the game ball and pushed out by the extrusion plate 21873, that is, FIG. 163. It is possible to return to the position shown in (a)). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for driving by the driving means and detection by the sensor device, and it is possible to reduce the product cost accordingly.

Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

164 (a) and 164 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065 according to the 22nd embodiment, and correspond to FIG. 54. Further, FIGS. 165 (a) and 165 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065, which correspond to FIG. 52.

Here, the winning device 22065 in the 22nd embodiment has an opening 22489 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projecting piece 22874 projecting from the rotating member 22870 with respect to the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment. Further, only the points to be provided are different, and the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the rotating member 22870 is provided with a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting pieces 22874 protruding from the side surface of the lower side (seesaw member 22840 side, lower side of FIG. 165) of the extrusion plate 21873. Will be set up. On the other hand, a plurality of openings 22489 for receiving the projecting pieces 22874 are formed (at three locations in the present embodiment) in the plate-shaped portion where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 are formed.

The projecting piece 22874 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 in the front view (direction view of the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 22840, that is, the state shown in FIG. 165). To. On the other hand, the opening 22489 is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 in the front view (direction view of the rotation axis (shaft support portion 21871) of the rotation member 22870, that is, the state shown in FIG. 164). It is formed.

Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 is rotated between the first state and the second state with the support shaft 821e (bearing 841) as the center of rotation, and the rotating member 22870 is rotated about its movable range with the shaft support portion 21871 as the center of rotation. In any case, it is possible to prevent the projecting piece 22874 from being interfered with the inner edge of the opening 22489. As a result, the seesaw member 22840 and the rotating member 22870 can be made independent of each other and can be smoothly rotated.

Here, as in the case of the 21st embodiment described above, when the extruded plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 does not have a protrusion, the seesaw member 840 forms the second state (or a state close to it). When the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the extrusion plate 21873, the distance between the extrusion plate 21873 and the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846. Therefore, the lower portion of the extrusion plate 21873 is brought into contact with the upper portion of the game ball (the portion on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)). Therefore, it takes a long time for the extruded plate 21873 to come into contact with the upper portion of the game ball, and it becomes difficult to quickly discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d by that amount. Further, it becomes difficult to sufficiently apply the rotational energy of the rotating member 21870 formed by receiving the game ball by the receiving plate 21872 to the game ball via the extrusion plate 21873.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the projecting piece 22874 is projected downward (seesaw member 22840) from the extruded plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 165 (b). In the state where the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the projecting piece 22874.

Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion (lower portion of FIG. 164 (a)) of the game ball. Therefore, the time until the projecting piece 22874 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d by that amount. Further, the rotational energy of the rotating member 22870 formed by receiving the game ball by the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently given to the game ball via the projecting piece 22874.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened so that the first state and the second state can be set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

Next, the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. In the 21st embodiment, the case where the rotating member 21870 is arranged (rotatably supported by the shaft) on the front base 810 has been described, but the rotating member 23870 of the 23rd embodiment is arranged (rotatably) on the seesaw member 840. (Axial support). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 166 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 23065 according to the 23rd embodiment. 167 (a) and 167 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 23065, which correspond to FIG. 54. Further, FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 23065, which correspond to FIG. 52.

Here, the winning device 23065 in the 23rd embodiment is different from the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is arranged and the presence / absence of the stopper portion 23875, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, the rotating member 23870 according to the 23rd embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a shaft support pin 23876 inserted through the shaft support portion 21871. In this case, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the axial direction of the shaft support portion 21871 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840, and is below the extrusion plate 21873. The side surfaces face substantially parallel to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the first state or the first state as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b). Regardless of which of the two states is formed, the extrusion plate 21873 can be made to face the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

Therefore, unlike the case of the 21st embodiment described above (that is, the lower portion of the extrusion plate 21873 is brought into contact with the upper portion of the game ball (the portion on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a))), the extrusion plate 21873 Can be brought into contact with the side portion (lower portion of FIG. 167 (a)) of the game ball. Therefore, the time until the extrusion plate 21873 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (extruded) to the discharge port 821d by that amount. Further, the rotational energy of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball by the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently given to the game ball via the extrusion plate 21873.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened so that the first state and the second state can be set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

Here, in the rotating member 23870 of the present embodiment, the stopper portion 23875 is projected from the back surface of the extrusion plate 21873 (the surface opposite to the side where the game ball is pushed out), and the stopper portion 23875 hits the back surface of the front base 810. It is possible to contact. In the state where the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the back surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167 (a)), the extruded plate 21873 of the rotating member 23870 is in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (FIG. 167 (a) left-right direction). It is placed at the rotation position along it.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the stopper portion 23875 is omitted and the extrusion plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810, the extrusion plate is closer to the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846. It is possible to make the 21873 stand by and shorten the time until the extruded plate 21873 comes into contact with the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d.

Here, as described above, even if the rotating member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the extruded plate 21873 is projected above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (b)). The game ball (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 167 (b)) received by the receiving plate 21872 is rolled along the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 while retracting the extruded plate 21873, thereby causing the receiving plate 21872. The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving surface 844 is projected upward (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (a)).

In this case, in the present embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840, a predetermined gap is formed between the extrusion plate 21873 and the front base 810. Therefore, when the extruded plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810, the game ball may roll in a direction away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling locus of the game ball increases. Therefore, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

On the other hand, by projecting the stopper portion 23875 from the back surface of the extruded plate 21873, the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 167 (b)) is placed on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. It is possible to prevent the extrusion plate 21873 from being pushed back too far toward the back side of the front base 810 when rolled along the same line (see FIG. 167 (a)). That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from unnecessarily rolling in the direction away from the discharge port 821d, so that the game ball can be quickly discharged to the discharge port 821d.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the stopper portion is not formed on the back surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810 (FIG. 167 (b). )reference). That is, when the receiving plate 21872 receives the game ball and the rotating member 23870 is rotated by utilizing the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 formed because the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840. The rotation angle of the rotating member 23870 (the rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (b)) can be increased.

As a result, the time during which the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21872 can be lengthened (that is, the impulse received by the rotating member 23870 from the game ball can be increased). Therefore, the rotational energy of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball on the receiving plate 21872 can be increased, and even when a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, they can be increased. By extruding the extrusion plate 21873, a plurality of game balls can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened so that the first state and the second state can be set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

Next, the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in the horizontal posture has been described, but in the seesaw member 840 in the 24th embodiment, the posture of the rotation shaft is tilted with the rotation. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 according to the 24th embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, in the winning device 24065 according to the 24th embodiment, bearing portions 24816 and 24286 are projected from the back surface of the front base 24810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. The bearing portion 24816, 24862 is a portion that rotatably supports both ends of the rotating shaft 24877 on its inner peripheral surface, and has a substantially U-shaped protrusion in front view with the upper side (upper side of FIGS. 169 and 170) open. Formed as a part.

In the present embodiment, the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 has a larger radius of the inner peripheral surface with respect to the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 24820. As a result, as will be described later, rotation of one end in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the end on the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed) is allowed.

The rotating shaft 24877 is a shaft-shaped body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the intermediate base 24820. Here, the rotation shaft 24877 will be described with reference to FIG. 171.

171 (a) is a front view of the rotating shaft 24877, and FIG. 171 (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft 24877 in the direction of the arrow CLXXIb of FIG. 171 (a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the rotating shaft 24877 includes a main body portion 24877a formed as a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and a cam portion 24877b formed at an axial end portion of the main body portion 24877a. The cam portion 24877b is formed so as to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 24877a (that is, the distance from the axial center of the main body portion 24877a to the outer peripheral surface of the cam portion 24877b is changed according to the rotation angle. ) Formed as a so-called disc cam.

It will be described back to FIG. 170 and FIG. 171. The rotary shaft 24877 is set so that the axial length of the main body portion 24877a is larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotating shaft 24877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and the main body portion 24877a protruding from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are the bearing portion 24816 and the intermediate base of the front base 24810. It is pivotally supported by the bearing portion 24826 of 24820 (see FIG. 173). The rotating shaft 24877 is fixed to the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 after being positioned in a predetermined phase (rotational position).

Next, the action of the cam portion 24877b on the rotating shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 172 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 172 (b) shows a winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. It is a cross-sectional view of. 173 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 on the CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa line in FIG. 172 (a), and FIG. 173 (b) is a sectional view of the winning device 24065 on the CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb line in FIG. 172 (b). It is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a), in the first state, the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 173 (a)) of the rotating shaft 24877. Both ends in the axial direction are axially supported by the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 and the bearing portion 24823 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward at the first tilt angle toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a) toward the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one end in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 as the rotation angle increases. However, by gradually acting on the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810, the height position on one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the forming side of the cam portion 24877b) is gradually raised.

As shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and 173 (b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position on one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the forming side of the cam portion 24877b) becomes the maximum. The axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is tilted downward from the front base 24810 to the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the inclination angle of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 is increased to a second inclination angle larger than the first inclination angle described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle). (Case), if the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is strong (large), the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 earlier, and the second state cannot be surely formed, while the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is high. If is loose (small), the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 will be delayed, and the residence time thereof will be long, so that the alternating switching between the first state and the second state will not be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively gentle (small) in the initial stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being discharged from the discharge surface 846 from being accelerated (that is, to keep the game ball on the discharge surface 846) so that the second state can be reliably formed. it can.

On the other hand, at the final stage, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is made relatively strong (large) so that the game ball can be quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, so that the game can be played on the discharge surface 846. The time on which the sphere is placed (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened so that the first state and the second state can be switched smoothly.

Next, the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in the horizontal posture has been described, but in the seesaw member 840 in the 25th embodiment, the posture of the rotation shaft is tilted with the rotation. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 according to the 25th embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065.

As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, in the winning device 25065 in the 25th embodiment, bearing portions 25816 and 24286 are projected from the back surface of the front base 25810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816, 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and are formed in the same shape as each other.

The rotating shaft 25877 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 25810 and the intermediate base 24820, and the axial length thereof is the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The dimension is set to be larger than the axial length. Therefore, the rotating shaft 25877 is fitted inside the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions of the bearing 841 protruding from both ends in the axial direction are pivotally supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 25820, respectively. (See FIG. 177).

Further, on the back surface of the front base 25810, a push-up portion 25817 is projected from the side of the bearing portion 25816. The push-up portion 25817 is located on the movement locus of the discharge surface 846 forming portion when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is discharged when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It comes into contact with the lower surface of the surface 846 forming portion. By this contact, as will be described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the push-up portion 25817, and the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

Next, the action of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 176 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in the state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 176 (b) shows the winning device 25065 in the state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. It is a cross-sectional view of.

Further, FIG. 177 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176 (a), and FIG. 177 (b) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 in the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in the CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc line in FIG. 176 (b), and FIG. 177 (d) is a CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId line in FIG. 176 (b). It is sectional drawing of the winning apparatus 25065 in. Note that FIGS. 176 (a) and 176 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a), and 177 (b), in the first state, the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817 are separated from each other, so that the rotation shaft 25877. In a posture in which the axial center of the rotary shaft is parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. To. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward at the first tilt angle toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a) and 177 (b) toward the second state, and the discharge surface 846 forming portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. The lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion is brought into contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

From this state, when the seesaw member 840 is further rotated toward the second state, the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion is in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817, so that the seesaw member 840 has a rotation shaft 25877. Is rotated while lifting one end side in the axial direction (left front side in FIG. 174, left side in FIG. 177 (a)), and the discharge surface 846 forming portion is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (right back side in FIG. 174). , FIG. 177 (b) right side) is lowered.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 (b), 27 (c) and 177 (d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 25877 is the inner circumference of the bearing portion 25816. It is lifted from the bottom surface, and the axis of the rotating shaft 25877 is tilted downward from the front base 25810 toward the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the inclination angle of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 is increased to a second inclination angle larger than the first inclination angle described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, until the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion comes into contact with the push-up portion 25817. In the section), while maintaining the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 at the first inclination angle (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is not changed), the final stage (the discharge surface 846 forming portion). In the section after the lower surface of the seesaw is brought into contact with the push-up portion 25817), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be sharply increased to the second inclination angle.

As a result, in the initial stage, it is possible to easily suppress the early discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, the game ball can be easily retained on the discharge surface 846), so that the second state can be formed more reliably. .. On the other hand, in the final stage, the game ball can be quickly and easily discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, so that the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 (that is, the second state is formed). It is possible to shorten the time) so that the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed more smoothly.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the concave groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 in the third path M3 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the groove is projected from the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910. In addition to being provided, a convex strip extending in a substantially saw blade shape in front view may be provided. In this case, as in the case of the concave groove 971, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the ridge and meander to the left and right. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down, and the movement of the game ball can be changed. A ridge can also be used as a lens that diffuses or condenses light.

In each of the above embodiments, in the second state, the case where the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located above the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. In the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 coincides with the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 in the height direction or is located below the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a. It may be formed so as to do so.

In the third embodiment, the case where the third displacement member 3660 is relatively slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by utilizing the expansion / contraction operation of the slide rail 3662 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a groove is provided in one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and a pin that slides along the groove is provided in the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and a pin for the groove is provided. The third displacement member 3660 may be slidably displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 by utilizing the sliding of the above.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the own weight (action of gravity) of the second displacement member 740 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane is used to move the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in either one direction or the other direction. You may be urged to. Thereby, the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the liquid LQ is used as a predetermined heavy object has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other heavy objects may be any one that can displace (for example, roll or slide) the internal space of the cage 10746 along the longitudinal direction as the posture of the cage 10746 changes, and for example, iron or lead. Examples include a sphere and a columnar body made of iron. In that case, the internal space of the cage 10746 does not need to be sealed.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where a predetermined heavy object is held in the internal space of the cage 10746 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined heavy object is held at the center of gravity via a string or a link. It may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing through G to the second displacement member 740. Also by this, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation, a predetermined heavy object can be displaced to the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the cage 10746 is arranged at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. However, it is preferable to position the center of the cage 10746 in the longitudinal direction on the vertical line Z passing through the center of gravity G.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the second displacement member 740 returns to the intersection angle γ1 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP, but this is not necessarily the case. The urging spring SP may be omitted and the second displacement member 740 may be subjected to its own weight (action of gravity).

In the 24th and 25th embodiments, the case where the rotating shaft 24877 is pivotally supported in a posture parallel to the horizontal direction (FIG. 173 (a) left-right direction) in the first state has been described. In the first state, the height position of one end in the axial direction (the forming side of the cam portion 24877b) of the rotating shaft 24877 is higher (or lower) than the other end side in the axial direction. It may be set to the position. That is, the above-mentioned first inclination angle (inclination angle at which the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is downwardly inclined toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) is the above-mentioned second inclination angle (second inclination angle). It suffices if the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the two states is formed so as to be able to be increased to an inclination angle larger than the inclination angle (inclination angle downwardly inclined toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820).

In the 21st and 22nd embodiments, the case where a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotating members 21870 and 22870 and the front base 810 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the extruded plate 21873 and the front base 810. In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. As a result, the same effect as in the case of the 23rd embodiment can be obtained.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the clockwise rotation unit 600 as an example>
A base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable with respect to the base member, a transmission member for transmitting a driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a transmission member thereof. In a game machine including a driving means for applying a driving force to the vehicle, the transmission member includes a driving pin, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member include a first groove and a second groove, respectively. The first groove includes an action section that is acted on by the drive pin and a non-interference section that the drive pin does not interfere with, and the second groove includes at least an action section that is acted on by the drive pin, and the first groove is provided. The groove and the second groove are overlapped, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the drive pin is inserted into the first groove and the second groove. Displacement machine A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force is applied to a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A directing member having a transmitting member to be transmitted and a driving means for applying a driving force to the transmitting member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement are provided through the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994).

According to this gaming machine, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmitting member, the effecting member is driven from the transmitting member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member via the first groove and the second groove. Is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced with respect to the base member.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for arranging the first groove and the second groove is increased, and the front view of the effect member is increased accordingly. There was a problem that the outer shape of the machine became large. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, and it is not preferable to increase the size of the outer shape of the effect member in front view because it hinders the increase in size of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the first groove and the second groove are overlapped (superimposed). Compared with the case of the conventional product in which the groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for the arrangement of the first groove and the second groove can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape in the front view. In this case, even when the size of the liquid crystal display device is required to be increased, the space in the thickness direction (front-back direction) is relatively large, and the first groove and the second groove are formed like the gaming machine A1. In the configuration of superimposing the above, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape in the front view by using a relatively large space in the thickness direction, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device.

Further, according to the gaming machine A1, since the drive pin is inserted into the overlapped first groove and the second groove, the drive force from the transmission member is transferred by the drive pin 1 to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. It is not necessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, the parts can be shared, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The member is displaced with respect to the base member. In this case, in the state where the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are affected by the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, while only the action section of the second groove is from the transmission member. In the state of being acted (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is displaceably arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member, and is connected to a driven member on which the second groove is formed and a driven portion thereof. The gaming machine A2 is provided with a connecting displacement member displaceably arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member and having a decorative portion.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is displaceably arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member, and the driven member on which the second groove is formed and the driven member thereof. Since a connected displacement member that is connected to the driven portion and is displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member is provided, a link structure can be formed by the driven member and the connected displacement member. As a result, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the connected displacement member can be largely relative-displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member is capable of forming a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped with each other.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped with each other. It is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape of the displacement member in the front view.

In the gaming machine A3, the first displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the second displacement member has a posture in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are overlapped with each other. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable on the back surface of the first displacement member at the retracted position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the second displacement member can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member in the retracted position in a posture in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are overlapped. Since it is formed, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape of the first displacement member and the second displacement member arranged at the retracted position in the front view by the amount of the overlap.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member includes an overhanging portion formed by projecting to the opposite side of the decorative portion with a portion displaceable to the first displacement member. A game machine A5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member projects to the opposite side of the decorative portion with a portion displaceable to the first displacement member. Since the overhanging portion to be formed is provided, the overhanging portion can play the role of a weight.

For example, when driving the driven portion and lifting the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member upward, the overhanging portion is formed on the opposite side of the decorative portion, so that the weight of the overhanging portion is used. , The decorative part can be easily lifted upward. Therefore, the overhanging portion can be lifted quickly and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. Further, after the decorative portion is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion and the weight of the overhanging portion can be suspended, so that the decorative portion can be compared with the case where only the decorative portion is formed in the cantilever state. The lifted posture can be stabilized and the driving force required to maintain the posture can be suppressed.

A6 of the gaming machine A5, wherein the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that the driven portion is driven and connected. When the displacement member is displaced, the overhanging portion is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that rattling of the connected displacement member (decorative portion) can be suppressed. In addition, since the overhanging portion that serves as a weight can also serve to suppress rattling by contacting the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape in the gaming machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, so that it is possible to secure the weight and rigidity while reducing the outer shape. it can. Therefore, while the overhanging portion is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, in a state where it cannot be seen from the front), the connected displacement member can be displaced while functioning as a weight and the back surface of the first displacement member. It is possible to surely exert the function of suppressing rattling by contacting with.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member and a protruding portion projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion. The 1-displacement member includes an abutting portion formed so as to be in contact with the protruding portion, and the bearing portion pivotally supports the first displacement member in a raised state from the base member, and the protruding portion has the above-mentioned. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is restricted within a predetermined range by abutting the contact portion.

According to the game machine A8, in the game machine according to any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing portion provides the first displacement member. Since the bearing is supported in a raised state from the base member, it is possible to form a space for arranging the second displacement member between the base member and the first displacement member by such raising. Therefore, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be arranged in a superposed posture.

In this case, according to the gaming machine A8, the base member further includes a protruding portion formed so as to project from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the first displacement member is a contact portion formed so as to come into contact with the protruding portion. The contact portion is brought into contact with the protruding portion, so that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be regulated within a predetermined range. That is, in order to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superposed position, the bearing portion that raises the first displacement member from the base member has relatively high rigidity and is located on the outer peripheral side thereof. When a dead space is formed, a protruding portion is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the contact portion is brought into contact with the protruding portion so that the first displacement member can rotate relative to the base member. The rigidity of the regulated part can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

A9 of the gaming machine A8, wherein the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that when the first displacement member is displaced, By contacting the protruding portion of the base member with the back surface of the first displacement member, rattling of the first displacement member can be suppressed. Further, since the protruding portion having the role of regulating the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can also have the role of contacting the first displacement member and suppressing rattling, the structure can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

In particular, in the gaming machine A9 subordinate to the gaming machine A2, since the second displacement member (driven member and connected displacement member) is arranged on the first displacement member, the first displacement member is the weight of the second displacement member. It is necessary to rotate with respect to the base member while supporting the machine, which tends to cause rattling. Therefore, a configuration in which the protruding portion of the base member is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member to suppress rattling of the first displacement member is effective.

In the gaming machine A9, the one end side of the first displacement member in the longitudinal direction is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protruding portion of the base member is at the edge portion of the first displacement member on one end side in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protruding portion of the base member is one end in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the side edge portion, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, the protruding portion can be arranged at a position where the tilt can be suppressed. As a result, the rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

In the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is continuously provided on the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is continuously provided on the front surface of the base member, so that the rigidity of the protruding portion is increased. Can be done. In particular, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, the rigidity in the direction supporting the tilt (that is, the direction in which the protruding portion is pressed against the front surface of the base member) can be increased, so that the first displacement member rattles. Sticking can be effectively suppressed.

A12 of the gaming machines A12, wherein the base member includes an inclined surface formed by chamfering a ridge line portion on a side surface and a front surface thereof.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the side surface and the ridge line portion of the front surface. 2 It is possible to prevent the displacement member from being locked to the side surface of the base member so that it cannot be displaced. In this case, in the present invention, since the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is displaceably arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member in a cantilevered state, the first displacement member or (and) the second displacement member is When the second displacement member is displaced, the connected displacement member of the second displacement member tends to swing in the direction of being close to and separated from the base member, and the connected displacement member is likely to be locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, a configuration in which the base member is provided with an inclined surface is particularly effective.

In the gaming machine A12, in the second displacement member, the connecting displacement member is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the base member is projected from the front surface thereof and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A game machine A13 characterized by having ridges.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A12, the base member includes a ridge protruding from the front surface thereof and extending along the displacement direction of the second displacement member, so that the tip of the ridge is provided. Can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the second displacement member.

Here, in the second displacement member, since the connecting displacement member is formed of a light-transmitting material, when the connecting displacement member is displaced and visually recognized by the player, the irradiated light is transmitted to produce an effect. Can be enhanced. In this case, when the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the front surface of the base member when the second displacement member is displaced, the connecting displacement member becomes cloudy due to rubbing against the front surface of the base member. The effect of transmitting light from the connected displacement member is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A12, a ridge is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the ridge can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member. Cloudiness due to can be partially. As a result, it is possible to exert the effect of transmitting light through the connected displacement portion.

In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member is provided with a connecting pin that connects the driven member and the connecting displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the ridges of the base member are formed by the second displacement member. The gaming machine A14 characterized in that it is extended along the locus of the connecting pin when it is displaced.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connecting pin that connects the driven member and the connecting displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and has a protrusion of the base member. Is extended along the trajectory of the connecting pin when the second displacement member is displaced, so that the connecting pin can be brought into contact with the protruding tip of the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness due to rubbing against the ridges on the portion of the connecting displacement member made of the light-transmitting material, and to exert the effect of transmitting light through the connecting displacement member. Can be done.

The gaming machine A13 or A14 includes a gear interposed between the driving means and the transmission member, and the base member includes a gear receiving portion for axially supporting the gear in its internal space, and the base member thereof. The gaming machine A15, wherein the gear receiving portion is projected from the front surface of the base member, and the ridge is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13 or A14, the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion protruding from the front surface of the base member, so that the second displacement member is the base. It is possible to prevent the gear receiving portion protruding from the side surface of the member from being locked and unable to be displaced or being hindered from being displaced. In other words, by providing a ridge on the front surface of the base member and extending the ridge to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion, it is possible to project the gear receiving portion from the front surface of the base member. Can be done. As a result, the gears can be stored in the internal space of the base member in a rotatable state while reducing the thickness dimension of the base member. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (that is, the gear is held by the gear receiving portion of the base member, so that the drive shaft of the drive means only needs to be inserted into the gear. ) Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member is a retracted position located in front of the base member. It is formed so as to be displaceable with an overhang position that projects in a direction away from the base member, and the rotation axis of the first displacement member is arranged on the overhang position side of the rotation axis of the transmission member. A game machine A16 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation axis of the first displacement member is the transmission member. Since it is arranged on the overhanging position side of the rotation axis of the above, the area of the first displacement member overhanging to the overhanging position can be made larger, while the first displacement member can be located between the retracted position and the overhanging position. Even in the case of, a transmission member can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it easily invisible to the player.

In the gaming machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is said when the second displacement member is projected to an overhanging position. A game machine A17 characterized in that it is formed so as to be in contact with a bearing portion.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effect of the game machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member has the second displacement member overhanging to the overhanging position. When this is done, the bearing portion of the base member is formed so as to be in contact with the bearing portion, so that the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, since the transmission member having the role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means can also serve as a stopper for restricting the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range, the structure can be changed. It can be simplified and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the bearing portion is a portion for raising the first displacement member from the base member and arranging the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superposed position, and the rigidity is relatively high. When a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side thereof, the transmission member is brought into contact with the bearing portion to ensure the rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member. Therefore, the durability can be improved, the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine A17, when the transmission member is recessed with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion and the second displacement member is projected to the overhanging position, the bearing portion receives the recess. A gaming machine A18 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and when the second displacement member is projected to the overhanging position, the bearing Since the portion is formed receptively in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be secured. In other words, since the position of the rotation axis of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing portion while securing the movable range of the transmission member, the first displacement member retracts while suppressing the outer shape of the first displacement member. During the displacement between the position and the overhanging position, it is possible to easily form a state in which the transmission member is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, a state in which the transmission member cannot be seen from the front).

In any of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted on by the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member and the second. After each of the displacement members is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove is affected by the transmission member, and the non-interference section causes the transmission member to be non-interfering with the first groove. The gaming machine A19 characterized in that the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions. ..

According to the game machine A19, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are each displaced in the first direction, and then the first displacement member is displaced. The 1 displacement member is stopped and the 2nd displacement member is displaced in the second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A18, the inertia associated with the stop of the first displacement member displaced in the first direction. The forces can be canceled by the inertial force when the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. As a result, the load on the parts due to the action of the inertial force can be reduced, and the durability can be improved.

The gaming machine A19 includes one or a plurality of gears that are interposed between the driving means and the transmitting member to transmit a driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A game machine A20 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. Therefore, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the weight is increased. The heavy first displacement member can be stopped first, and the lighter second displacement member can be stopped last. Thereby, the load on the gear can be reduced.

That is, from a state in which the transmission member is driven in the forward direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is second. Since the transition to the state of being displaced in the direction is performed by shifting the transmission member from the transmission section of the first groove to the non-interference section, the rotation of the driving means and the gear is continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, the load on the gear does not occur. On the other hand, the transition from the state in which the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state in which the second displacement member is also stopped is the rotation of the driving means and the gear. However, since the member to be stopped in this case is only the second displacement member having a light weight, the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A20, a third displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the first displacement member is provided, and the third displacement member is displaced by the action of the second displacement member. The gaming machine A21 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine A21, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A20, a third displacement member displaceable is provided on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is the second displacement member. Since it is displaced by the action of the member, the third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a third groove, and the third groove is provided. The gaming machine A22 includes an action section that is acted on by the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere with each other.

According to the game machine A22, in addition to the effect of the game machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member has a third groove. Since the third groove includes an action section that is acted on by the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere, both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. It is possible to form a mode in which only one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

A23 of the gaming machine A21, wherein the second displacement member is displaceably arranged on the third displacement member.

According to the game machine A23, since the second displacement member is displaceably arranged in the third displacement member, when the third displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member, the third displacement member is displaced. By causing the second displacement member to be relatively displaced, the relative displacement of the third displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be superimposed on the relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the third displacement member, and as a result, the first displacement member can be superposed. The amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member can be increased.

<Concept of the invention using the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 as an example>
The base member, the first displacement member displaceable on the base member, the second displacement member displaceable on the first displacement member, and the first and second displacement members thereof. A driving means for generating a driving force for displacement and a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member are provided, and the second displacement member moves with the displacement of the first displacement member. In a gaming machine that is displaced relative to a first displacement member, the connecting member is connected to a connecting first member whose one end is connected to the base member and the other end to the other end of the connecting first member. Along with this, a connecting second member whose one end is connected to the second displacement member is provided, and a connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. A game machine B1 characterized by this.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the first displacement member. There is a gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for displacementing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). -17886 (No. -17886).

According to this gaming machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connecting member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, so that the first displacement member is displaced. , The second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the base member, the connecting member connecting the base member and the second displacement member is exposed, so that the game is played. There is a problem that it becomes visible to a person and the appearance is spoiled.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the connecting member is connected to the first connecting member whose one end is connected to the base member and the other end to the other end of the connecting first member and to the second displacement member. A first displacement member is used as a base because it is provided with a second connecting member to which one end is connected, and the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. Even when the member is displaced in a direction away from the member, the connecting member (connecting first member and connecting second member) can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

In the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member, and the second connecting member of the connecting member is slidably displaced on the first displacement member. The gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member, and the connecting second member of the connecting member can be slidably displaced on the first displacement member. Since it is arranged, when the first displacement member is rotated with respect to the base member, the amount of rotation is large (that is, it is necessary to increase the amount of displacement of the connecting first member and the connecting second member). Even so, it is possible to maintain the state in which the connecting second member of the connecting member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and avoid being visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second connecting member of the connecting member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

Further, even when an electrical connecting wire is wired to the first displacement member, the connecting second member of the connecting member is arranged so as to be slidable on the first displacement member, so that the connecting wire and the connecting second member can be slidably displaced. It is possible to easily suppress the interference with. Therefore, in order to avoid interference, it is not necessary to secure a large space for wiring the connecting wire, and the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a driving body driven by the driving means, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is transferred from the driving body to the connecting first member. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted to the member.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, a driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is generated. Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted from the driving body to the connecting first member, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member.

That is, the connecting member is located between the first displacement member and the base member because the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. When connecting the drive body to the first displacement member, the drive body and the connecting member may interfere with each other. Therefore, it is necessary to connect the drive body to the first displacement member at a position that does not overlap with the displacement locus of the connecting member. There is. Therefore, it is necessary to make the front view shape of the first displacement member a size including the displacement locus of the connecting member and the connecting portion to which the drive body is connected, and the front view shape of the first displacement member is increased by that amount. To do. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member may be set to a size corresponding only to the displacement locus of the connecting member. Since it is not necessary to include the connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member and is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the base member is a base-side engaging member. The displacement side engaging member formed so as to be engaged with the base side engaging member in a state where the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position is the first displacement member or the second displacement member. A game machine B4 characterized in that one is provided.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the connecting member is connected between the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. The base member and the second displacement member are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to incline the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the gaming machine B4, in the connecting member, since the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member, the first displacement member is in the retracted position. With the rotating shaft as the base end, the portion opposite to the rotating shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) becomes the free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation axis (second displacement member side) tends to tilt in the direction away from the base member.

In this case, according to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B3, the base member includes the base side engaging member, and one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member engages on the displacement side. When the member is provided and the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are formed so as to be engageable. It is possible to prevent the portion (second displacement member side) from tilting in the direction away from the base member.

In the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, since the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member, the engagement position between the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member is set to the first. The position can be set relatively away from the rotation axis of the displacement member. Therefore, by utilizing the engagement of the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation axis (second displacement member side) is tilted in the direction away from the base member. It can be effectively suppressed.

In the game machine B5, the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member and the tip of the base portion. Each of the bent portions has an inner surface as an engaging surface, and the first displacement member is displaced from the overhanging position to the retracted position so that the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other. , The engaging surface of the bent portion of the base side engaging member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side, or (and) the engagement of the bent portion of the displacement side engaging member. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engagement tip side thereof.

Here, when the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member as in the game machine B5, the engagement position between the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member is from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since the positions are relatively distant, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member due to the shaking of the first displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the engaging surface of the bent portion of the base-side engaging member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side, or (and) the displacement-side engaging. The engaging surface of the bent portion of the member is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side, that is, the engaging surface of the bent portion and the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member. Since the distance between the two members is wider toward the engagement tip side, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, even if the first displacement member is shaken, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member Can be easily engaged.

Further, according to the gaming machine B6, the engaging surface of the bent portion of at least one of the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member is inclined as described above, so that the first displacement member is directed to the retracted position. When displaced, the second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member as the engaging surface of the bent portion is tilted. As a result, at the retracted position, the protrusion dimension of the second displacement member from the base member can be suppressed, and the rattling of the second displacement member can be absorbed to maintain the posture.

In the game machine B5 or B6, the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member and the tip of the base portion. Each of the bent portions having an inner surface formed as an engaging surface is provided, and the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other by displacement of the first displacement member from the overhanging position to the retracted position. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a bent portion of the other party is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5 or B6, a receiving portion for receiving the bent portion of the opponent is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member. In the state where the displacement member is arranged in the retracted position (the state in which the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are engaged), the bent portion is accepted by the receiving portion and approaches the base member of the second displacement member. Displacement in the direction can be tolerated. Therefore, the vertical dimensions of the base portion of the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are increased to facilitate the engagement between the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, and at the retracted position, the second Displacement of the displacement member in a direction close to the base member can be allowed to prevent damage due to collision.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, when the first displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, the displacement side engaging member is engaged with the first displacement member. The gaming machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B3 to the game machine B7, when the first displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, the displacement side engaging member becomes the first displacement member. It is engaged, that is, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be coupled via the displacement side engaging member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member from rattling with respect to the first displacement member at the overhanging position. Further, the displacement side engaging member, which engages with the base side engaging member at the retracted position to connect the second displacement member to the base member, engages with the first displacement member at the overhanging position to perform the second displacement. Since the member can be combined with the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, an interposing means provided between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is provided, and the interposing means is provided with respect to the base member. The mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member differs depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction. The gaming machine B9 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, an interposing means provided between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is provided, and the interposing means is provided. Is the action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member in the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member. Since the modes are different, the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be determined depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction with respect to the base member. Can be different.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposing means includes a guided portion disposed at one end of the first displacement member or the connecting second member, and one end of the first displacement member or the connecting second member. It is provided on the other side with a guide portion for guiding the guided portion, and the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the second displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that by guiding the guide portion by different paths of the guide portion, the mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is different.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, the interposing means depends on the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member. By guiding the guide portion by different paths of the guided portion, the mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is different. The mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be easily changed. That is, the degree of freedom in the design can be increased.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposing means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is released. The gaming machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, the interposing means causes an action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is released, so that the first displacement with respect to the base member is released. It is possible to make it easy to make the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member significantly different depending on the case where the member is displaced in the first direction and the case where the member is displaced in the second direction.

<Concept of the invention using the center frame 86 as an example>
Displaceable between a gaming board having a gaming area on the front surface and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the gaming board, and an overhanging position visible through the opening. In a gaming machine provided with a displacement member, a center frame formed of a light-transmitting material and incorporated in an opening of the gaming board is provided, and the center frame forms a part of the gaming area. A gaming machine C1 comprising a region forming portion.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area on the front surface and an opening formed in the center, and a tension that can be visually recognized through a retracted position and an opening on the back side of the game board. There is a gaming machine provided with a displacement member that is formed so as to be displaceable between positions (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

According to this gaming machine, the opening of the gaming board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device to secure a visible area for the displacement member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down in the gaming area, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the gaming board, and a region where the displacement member can be visually recognized is provided. There was a problem that it could not be secured sufficiently.

On the other hand, the gaming machine C1 includes a center frame formed of a light-transmitting material and built in the opening of the gaming board, and the center frame includes a region forming portion forming a part of the gaming region. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the region forming portion. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient area where the displacement member can be visually recognized while securing an area for the ball to flow down in the game area.

In the gaming machine C1, the region forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous region from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming region as a part of the gaming region. C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the area forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous region from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming area as a part of the gaming area. Therefore, the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized can be secured as much as possible.

In the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows the passage of only one gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows the passage of only one gaming ball, so that the area forming portion is set to a width that allows the passage of only one gaming ball. That is, it is possible to secure the maximum visible region of the displacement member (without passing through the center frame).

In the gaming machines C2 or C3, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a downstream wall portion that is erected on the downstream side of the region and is integrally formed with the center frame.

Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and nails cannot be planted, the flow speed of the game ball becomes high, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, since the region forming portion of the center frame includes a downstream wall portion erected on the downstream side of the region, the gaming ball flowing down the region forming portion hits the downstream wall portion. Can be touched. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the flow speed of the gaming ball can be reduced to make it easier for the player to see. Further, since the downstream wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and it is not necessary to fasten and fix another part, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. ..

In the gaming machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a side wall portion that is erected in the region to partition a passage through which the game ball flows and is integrally formed with the center frame, and the side wall portion is downstream. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is connected to a wall portion.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a side wall portion that is erected in the region and divides the passage through which the gaming ball flows, and the side wall portion thereof is downstream. Since it is connected to the wall portion, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion that receives the flowing game ball can be increased. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the downstream wall portion. Further, since the connecting wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and it is not necessary to fasten and fix another part, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. .. Furthermore, since the side wall portion of the role of partitioning the passage through which the game ball flows can also serve as the role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. be able to.

The gaming machine C5 includes an inner rail that guides a game ball that is erected and launched from the front surface of the gaming board to the gaming area, and the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail. Machine C6.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the mode in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the inner rail is that the ball collides with the nail and then collides with the inner rail, which is relatively slow and damages the inner rail. There was no problem such as inviting. On the other hand, in the present invention, in order to secure the maximum visible region of the displacement member, the width of the region forming portion forming a part of the gaming region is narrow (for example, only one gaming ball is allowed to pass). Width to be set). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed down at the area forming portion. Therefore, on the upstream side of the region forming portion, it becomes necessary to guide the game ball flowing down the game region toward the region forming portion, and as a result of the guidance, a part of the game ball is on the inner rail at a relatively high speed. There is a risk that the inner rail will bend.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged side by side on the inner rail, the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area is guided toward the region forming portion, and as a result, the gaming ball is directed toward the inner rail. Even if it flows down, it is possible to catch the game ball at the side wall portion and avoid colliding with the inner rail. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, it is possible to suppress bending of the inner rail.

The gaming machine C5 or C6 includes a light emitting means that is arranged on the back side of the region forming portion of the center frame and is formed so as to be able to emit light, and the side wall portion emits light emitted from the light emitting means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to function as a light guide body that guides the gaming region to the front side.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is formed so as to be able to function as a light guide body that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the gaming region. It is possible to exert the effect of the effect. In particular, in the gaming machine C7, which is subordinate to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged side by side with the inner rail, the leakage of light can be reduced by the inner rail, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. .. As a result, the effect of light can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the back surface of the region forming portion of the center frame.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is set to the back surface of the region forming portion of the center frame. Is placed in the retracted position, the displacement member is visible through the region forming portion of the center frame, and the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacement member is guided through the side wall portion. It can be visually recognized. As a result, the effect of producing light can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the region forming portion of the center frame is erected in the region to partition a passage through which the game ball flows down, and a pair of side wall portions integrally formed with the center frame. The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that one or a plurality of protrusions are projected on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and nails cannot be planted in the region forming portion, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions becomes high, and the game ball flowing down is played. It becomes difficult for a person to see.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, one or a plurality of protrusions are projected on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, so that the game ball flows down the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions. In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the protrusion to prevent its flow. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball.

In the gaming machine C9, the gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the protrusions on one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the protrusions on the other facing surface are arranged in a staggered manner.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the protrusions on one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the protrusions on the other facing surface are arranged in a staggered pattern, so that the protrusions are divided into the pair of side wall portions. When a game ball flows down the passage, the game ball can be made to collide with the left and right protrusions alternately to meander the flowing game ball. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball, and the flowing game ball can be made to be orthogonal to the flowing direction. It can be displaced to change the movement of the game ball.

In the game machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a concave groove that is recessed in the front surface thereof and extends in a substantially saw blade shape.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C10, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a concave groove recessed in the front surface thereof and extended in a substantially saw blade shape, so that the region forming portion can be played. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the inner surface of the concave groove to meander. As a result, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. Further, according to the gaming machine C11 which is subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the concave groove can be used as a lens to guide the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front surface of the gaming area, and the effect of the light is exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C11, the concave groove is arranged so that its bent portion is displaced with respect to the protrusion in the flow direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect of the game machine C11, the concave groove is arranged so that the bent portion thereof is displaced from the protrusion in the flow direction of the game ball, so that the game ball flows down the region forming portion. In this case, the game balls that meander by being guided by the inner surface of the concave groove can easily collide with the protrusions alternately. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the concave groove and the action of the protrusion. As a result, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. In addition, the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

In the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge that protrudes from the front surface of the gaming machine C10 and extends in a substantially saw blade shape.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C10, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge protruding from the front surface thereof and extending in a substantially saw blade shape, so that the region forming portion can be played. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the outer surface of the ridge to meander. As a result, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. Further, according to the gaming machine C13 which is subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front surface of the game area by using the convex stripe as a lens, and the effect of the light is exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C13, the convex strip is arranged so that the bent portion thereof coincides with the flow direction of the game ball with respect to the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C13, the ridges are arranged so that the bent portion thereof coincides with the flow direction of the gaming ball with respect to the protrusions, so that the gaming ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the game balls that meander by being guided by the outer surface of the protrusions can easily collide with the protrusions alternately. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the ridges and the action of the protrusions. As a result, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. In addition, the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

In any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal side of the concave groove or the ridge is oriented so that its extension direction overlaps with the downstream wall portion and directs the exit of the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions. Characteristic gaming machine C15.

According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal side of the concave groove or the ridge is partitioned by a pair of side wall portions while its extension direction overlaps the downstream wall portion. Since the exit of the passage is directed, the gaming ball guided to the terminal side of the concave groove or the ridge can be made to collide with the downstream wall portion from an oblique direction, thereby suppressing the bouncing of the gaming ball and its addition. While reducing the flow speed, the game ball can flow down toward the exit of the passage. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged from the exit of the passage.

<Concept of the invention using the winning device 65 as an example>
A first seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. The seesaw member in a gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing the game ball on the other end side of the rotation axis. The seesaw member is provided with a guiding means for guiding the game ball to, and the seesaw member is provided with a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means, and the receiving surface is located on one end side of the rotation axis. Game machine D1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered. In addition to forming the first state in which the other end side is raised, the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered in the second state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a gaming ball is dropped on a seesaw member in the first state and the gaming ball is placed between the rotation shaft and the other end side, the weight of the gaming ball causes the gaming ball to be placed. The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form a second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is discharged, the other end side is raised and one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately make the first state and the second state appear, and the effect of the action of displacement one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member up and down is produced. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously dropped, the other end side is lowered and one end side is maintained in the raised second state, and the first state and the second state are obtained. There was a problem that it was not possible to switch between.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, in the seesaw member, since the receiving surface for receiving the gaming ball guided by the guiding means is located on one end side of the rotation axis, the other end side is lowered and one end side is raised. Even in the second state, one end side can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving surface. That is, it is possible to form a first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so that when the gaming ball guided by the guiding means is received in the first state, the gaming ball can be sent to the other end side. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so that when the gaming ball guided by the guiding means is received in the first state, the gaming ball can be sent to the other end side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably switch from the first state to the second state.

The form in which the game ball is formed so as to be able to be sent to the other end side is, for example, a form in which the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end side to the other end side even in the first state, and a protrusion is formed on the receiving surface. An example is a form in which the protrusion is formed in a shape in which the game ball guided by the guiding means is repelled to the other end side.

In the gaming machines D1 or D2, a decorative member that is rotatably supported by an axis is provided, one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member is rotated around a rotation axis of the seesaw member. The gaming machine D3, characterized in that is displaced.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, a decorative member rotatably supported is provided, one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the rotation axis of the seesaw member is centered. Since a link mechanism is formed in which the decorative member is displaced with the rotation, the movable range of the decorative member can be expanded and the effect of the effect can be enhanced by the link ratio.

Here, in order to reliably switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member, the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised when the load is not applied. It is preferable that the seesaw member can be returned at an early stage. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since the decorative member is connected to one end side of the seesaw member, the weight of the decorative member is applied to one end side of the seesaw member to lower the one end side. be able to. Therefore, when the no-load state is reached, the seesaw member can be easily returned to the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and as a result, the seesaw member is in the first state and the second state. It is possible to easily switch between states.

The weight of the decorative member hinders raising one end side of the seesaw member (forming a second state), but since the weight of the game ball is sufficiently heavy, the game ball is from the rotation axis of the seesaw member. By placing the seesaw on the other end side, it is possible to form a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guiding means is provided with a passage through which the gaming ball passes, and a rolling motion in which the gaming ball rolls while being extended in a substantially horizontal direction on the terminal side of the passage. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball that has rolled on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided to a receiving surface of the seesaw member from a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guiding means includes a passage through which the gaming balls pass, so that the passages can be used to store a plurality of gaming balls. , The plurality of game balls can be guided in order from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

However, even in this case, in the form in which the game balls are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member by dropping from above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, these plurality of game balls are on the receiving surface. It is not possible to switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member alternately.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D4, a horizontal passage having a rolling guide surface extending in a substantially horizontal direction and rolling the game ball is formed on the terminal side of the passage, and the horizontal passage is rolled. Since the game balls that have rolled on the motion guide surface are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member from a substantially horizontal direction, they can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member (that is, the receiving surface is horizontal). You can receive one ball at a time from the aisle), and you can avoid stacking multiple game balls on the receiving surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member.

In the game machine D4, the guiding means includes an upstream passage that is connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extends in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and has an extension length of the horizontal passage. The game machine D5 is characterized in that the size is set to be smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the guiding means is provided with an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extended in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage. Since the extended length of the horizontal passage is set to a size smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even if a plurality of game balls are stored in the passage, one game ball is placed on the receiving surface of the seesaw member. It is possible to guide while separating the intervals.

That is, since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, it is possible that only one game ball exists in the horizontal passage, and the extension of the horizontal passage is also possible. Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different, when a ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. The time required for inflow to the horizontal passage can be increased. Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball after the upstream passage flows into the horizontal passage while taking time to change direction, and after that, it takes time. The game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the later game ball is separated from the earlier game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member one by one at intervals.

In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state (a state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered), the receiving surface of the seesaw member rolls in the horizontal passage. Since a step is formed above the guide surface, that is, between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface, the gaming ball that has rolled on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage guides the seesaw member to the receiving surface. When this is done, the gaming ball can be made to ride on the receiving surface (collide with a step), and this riding operation (collision) can be used to make it easier to lower the receiving surface of the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised.

In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. The featured gaming machine D7.

Here, the fact that the seesaw member is in the first state means that the seesaw member is in the no-load state, and the game ball guided from the horizontal passage and received on the receiving surface is promptly sent out to the other end side. It is required that the weight of the game ball acts on the other end side of the rotation axis and the other end side is lowered (forming the second state).

In this case, according to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or the rolling of the horizontal passage. Since it is located below the motion guide surface, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, unlike the case of the second state, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and it is possible to avoid a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly sent out to the other end side, and as a result, it is possible to easily form a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In the first state, it is preferable that the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. When the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, the game ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is dropped onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member. Bounces, which causes a time lag and increases the load on the rotating shaft of the seesaw member due to the impact of dropping.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is formed by bending the other end side of the seesaw member upward in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is bent upward in an abbreviated shape on the other end side in the axial view of the rotation axis. Since it is formed, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

That is, if the seesaw member has an insufficient downward inclination on the other end side of the rotation shaft, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, the other end side is lowered, and the second state is set. The formation time) becomes longer, and the alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. However, if the entire area on the other end side of the rotation shaft is inclined downward, the other end side protrudes from the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member (that is, the space required for the arrangement of the seesaw member becomes large). ). On the other hand, if the length from the rotation shaft to the other end side is shortened so as to fit in the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, that is, Since the other end side is lowered and the time during which the second state is formed is shortened and the formation of the second state is uncertain, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. Further, in order to keep the length from the rotating shaft to the other end side within the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member, the downward inclination of the other end side of the rotating shaft becomes insufficient. ..

On the other hand, by forming the other end side of the seesaw member into a shape that bends upward in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, each of the above-mentioned problems can be solved, and as a result, It is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which a game ball rolled from its rotation axis toward the other end side is provided, and the seesaw member is provided on the other end side of the seesaw member. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that a claw portion formed so as to be able to switch the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolled from the rotation axis toward the other end side toward the inflow port is provided.

According to the gaming machine D9, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, on the other end side of the seesaw member, the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolled from the rotation axis toward the other end side is directed toward the inflow port. Since the claw portion that is formed so as to be switchable in the direction is projected, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the inflow port. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the seesaw member (that is, the time when the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, and the first state and the second state It is possible to suppress the inhibition of alternating switching with.

In the gaming machine D9, the claw portion is unevenly arranged on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D9, the claw portion is arranged on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the rolling position of the game ball is the position of the seesaw member. Even if there is variation in the width direction, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member (that is, the time when the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) It can be made constant and easy.

That is, the game ball that rolls on the back side in the width direction (opposite side of the inflow port) of the seesaw member by arranging the claws unevenly on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member Since the distance to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, the game causes the seesaw member to collide with the claw at an early stage and roll to the inflow port, while rolling the seesaw member in front of the width direction (the side closer to the inflow port). Since the ball has a short distance to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, the collision with the claw portion can be delayed. As a result, in each of the former and the latter, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member can be made as close as possible.

As a result, even when the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member (that is, the other end side is The time during which the second state is formed after being lowered) can be easily made constant.

In any of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which the game ball rolled from its rotation axis toward the other end side is provided, and the width of the inflow port is the diameter of the game ball. The gaming machine D11 characterized in that the dimensions are set to be larger than twice.

According to the gaming machine D11, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which the game ball rolled from its rotation axis toward the other end side is provided, and the width of the inflow port is provided. Is set to a size larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, so that the next game ball is further rolled toward the other end side while the previous game ball is present on the other end side of the seesaw member. In this case, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the inflow port. For example, even when the later game ball collides with the earlier game ball and each of these game balls is simultaneously rolled to the inflow port, each of these game balls can flow smoothly.

In the gaming machine D11, the inflow port is set to a larger dimension on the rotating shaft side than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D11, the inflow port is set to a larger dimension on the rotation shaft side than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member. Even if the next game ball is further rolled toward the other end side and collides with the previous game ball existing on the other end side of the seesaw member, each of these game balls can be smoothly moved to the inflow port. It can be inflowed. That is, even if the game ball after colliding with the previous game ball is flipped up, the height dimension of the inflow port on the rotation axis side is increased, so that height can be used to move the game ball after that. It can be discharged smoothly. On the other hand, even if the earlier game ball collides with the later game ball, it is difficult to be flipped up. Therefore, the height dimension on the other end side is lowered so that the earlier game ball smoothly flows into the inflow port. While making it possible, the space required for the inflow port can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

One of the gaming machines D1 to D12 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member when the seesaw member is arranged in at least the second state. Game machine D13.

According to the gaming machine D13, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D12, a suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member is provided in a state where the seesaw member is arranged in at least the second state. , It is possible to secure a time for the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member to be ejected. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine D13, the guiding means includes an outlet for sending a game ball to the seesaw member, and the suppressing means includes a regulating portion arranged on one end side of the seesaw member with respect to the rotating shaft. When the seesaw member is rotated to at least the second state, at least a part of the regulating portion is projected to the outlet, thereby suppressing the delivery of the game ball from the outlet to the seesaw member. The game machine D14.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D13, the suppressing means includes a regulating portion arranged on one end side of the seesaw member with respect to the rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated to at least the second state. By projecting at least a part of the regulation unit to the delivery port, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member is suppressed, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the seesaw member can also be used as a mechanism for projecting the regulating portion from the outlet, and a driving mechanism for displaceing the regulating portion and a control means for controlling the displacement timing can be eliminated.

In addition, the state in which the regulation unit is projected to the delivery port and the delivery of the game ball is suppressed is when the game machine cannot pass through the delivery port and when the game ball can pass through the delivery port. Both are included. Even in the latter case (passable), the regulation part is projected to the delivery port and the passage width of the delivery port is narrowed, so that the game ball is collided with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the regulation part. Since it is sent from the delivery port, the throwing of the game ball is suppressed. That is, the game balls in a continuous state can be separated.

<Concept of the invention using the winning device 65 as an example>
A first seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. In a gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing the gaming ball on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the rotating shaft is formed. The game machine E1 is provided with a discharge means for facilitating the discharge of the game ball mounted on the other end side of the ball.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered. In addition to forming the first state in which the other end side is raised, the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered in the second state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a gaming ball is dropped on a seesaw member in the first state and the gaming ball is placed between the rotation shaft and the other end side, the weight of the gaming ball causes the gaming ball to be placed. The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form a second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is discharged, the other end side is raised and one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately make the first state and the second state appear, and the effect of the action of displacement one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member up and down is produced. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously dropped, the other end side is lowered and one end side is maintained in the raised second state, and the first state and the second state are obtained. There was a problem that it was not possible to switch between.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the seesaw member includes a discharging means for facilitating discharging the game ball mounted on the other end side, so that the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in the state, the game ball can be discharged from the other end side by the discharging means, the weight of the game ball on the other end side can be removed, and the one end side can be easily lowered. That is, the state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is terminated early, and one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. The first state can be formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine E1, the discharging means includes a shaft support that is rotatably supported by a shaft, a receiving portion that is arranged on one side of the shaft support and receives a game ball guided by the guide means, and a receiving portion thereof. When the receiving portion receives the game ball guided by the guide means, the extruded portion is provided with the extruded portion arranged with the shaft support portion interposed therebetween, and the extruded portion is rotated around the shaft support portion. The gaming machine E2, wherein the portion is projected toward the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, when the receiving portion receives the gaming ball guided by the guiding means, the extrusion portion is a seesaw member due to the rotation around the shaft support portion. Since it protrudes to the other end side, the gaming ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the extrusion portion and discharged from the seesaw member. As a result, the other end side of the seesaw member can be raised by ejecting the game ball by the extrusion portion, and one end side of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving portion. It can be terminated early to make it easier to switch between the first state and the second state alternately. Further, since the receiving portion rotates the discharging means (protrudes the extruding portion) by utilizing the operation of receiving the game ball, it is possible to eliminate the need for a drive mechanism for such rotation and a control means for controlling the rotation timing thereof.

In the gaming machine E2, the discharging means is characterized in that the shaft support portion is rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the discharging means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member, so that the relative position of the discharging means with respect to the seesaw member can be fixed. .. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guide means can be easily received by the receiving portion, the rotation around the shaft support portion can be reliably formed, and the extruded portion projected to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation is played. By making it easier to come into contact with the ball, the game ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, with respect to a virtual plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the seesaw member and the shaft support portion of the discharge means, the discharge means has a larger retractable amount of the receiving portion than the extrusion portion. A game machine E4 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the discharging means has a larger retractable amount than the extrusion portion of the receiving portion, so that the discharging means when the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion. The angle of rotation of the ball can be secured, and the energy received from the received game ball can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to secure the pushing force of the game ball by the extruded portion due to the retreat of the receiving portion. That is, the game ball can be quickly and easily discharged.

On the other hand, since the amount of retreat of the extruded portion is smaller than that of the receiving portion, the rolling locus of the game ball is increased when the game ball that rolls the seesaw member toward the other end side retracts the extruded portion. Can be suppressed, and the game ball can be easily ejected quickly.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharging means is mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft by raising one of the rotating shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction. A gaming machine E5 characterized by facilitating the ejection of placed gaming balls.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E4, the discharge means raises one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction. The angle of downward inclination of the seesaw member from one axial direction to the other in the axial direction of the rotating shaft can be increased so that the game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft can be discharged from the seesaw member. This makes it easy to switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

It should be noted that the fact that one axial direction of the rotating shaft is relatively higher than the other axial direction of the rotating shaft means that it is sufficient if the rising amount of one axial direction is larger than the rising amount of the other axial direction. Therefore, the state after raising may be arranged at a position where one axial direction is lower than the other axial direction.

In the game machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, the discharge means axially one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member. In the second section, which is not raised relative to the other and is closer to the second state than the first section, one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is relative to the other axial direction. A game machine E6 characterized by being raised in a targeted manner.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5, the discharge means is a rotation axis of the seesaw member in the first section when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state. In the second section, in which one of the seesaw members is not raised relative to the other in the axial direction and is closer to the second state than the first section, one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member is in the axial direction of the other. Since it is relatively raised with respect to the above, the second state can be reliably formed, and the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

That is, if the operation of raising one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction is performed from the first section, the discharge of the game ball is accelerated and the second state is surely formed. Can not. On the other hand, if the operation of raising one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction cannot be performed, the discharge of the game ball will be delayed (the residence time will be long), and the second state will occur. It becomes easier to maintain.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is changed to the other axial direction. On the other hand, since the ball is not raised relatively, it is possible to suppress the early discharge of the game ball (that is, to keep the game ball staying) and to make it easier to surely form the second state. On the other hand, in the second section, since one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction, the game ball can be quickly discharged and the game ball is placed. The time (ie, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to smoothly switch between the first state and the second state while ensuring that the second state can be formed.

In the game machine E5 or the game machine E6, in the seesaw member, a cam is formed at least in one of the axial directions of the rotation shaft, and as the rotation shaft rotates, from the axis of the rotation shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by increasing the distance between the two.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed at least in one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. By increasing the distance of the seesaw member, one of the rotating shafts of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other in the axial direction, so that the drive mechanism for operating the rotating shaft and the control for controlling the drive timing thereof are controlled. Means can be eliminated. In addition, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of the first and second sections can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member is provided with a push-up portion arranged on a movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, and the push-up portion hits the seesaw member. The gaming machine E8, characterized in that one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by being brought into contact with the seesaw member.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member is provided with a push-up portion arranged on the movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state. When the push-up portion comes into contact with the seesaw member, one of the rotary shafts of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other in the axial direction. Therefore, a drive mechanism for operating the rotary shaft and its drive are used. The control means for controlling the timing can be eliminated. In addition, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of each section can be increased.

<Concept of the invention as an example of the base side engaging member 12726>
In a gaming machine including a base member and a displacement member whose base end side is rotatably arranged and rotated between a retracted position and an overhanging position, the base member includes a base side engaging member. At the same time, in a state where the displacement member includes a displacement-side engaging member formed so as to be engageable with the base-side engaging member at the retracted position and the first displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, the base. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to see in the front view of the member.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force is applied to a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A directing member having a transmitting member to be transmitted and a driving means for applying a driving force to the transmitting member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement are provided through the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994).

In this conventional gaming machine, a connecting member is connected between the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are located at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. 2 The displacement member is connected by the connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to incline the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the gaming machine F1, the base end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the shaft, while the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) is the free end. Therefore, at the retracted position, the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) tends to tilt (fall forward) in the direction away from the base member due to its own weight and the weight of the decorative portion arranged on the front side.

In this case, according to the game machine F1, in a state where the base member includes the base side engaging member, the displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member, and the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base side engaging member is provided. Since the member and the displacement side engaging member are formed so as to be engageable, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from tilting in the direction away from the base member on the side opposite to the base end side (tip side).

On the other hand, when the base member is provided with the base side engaging member and the displacement member is provided with the displacement side engaging member in this way, when the displacement member is extended to the overhanging position, the front surface of the base member is provided. Is exposed, so that the base-side engaging member is visible to the player, and the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to see in the front view of the base member, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being spoiled.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to appear and disappear in front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to a retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves to the front of the base member. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that when the displacement member is rotated to an overhanging position while being projected from the base member, the base-side engaging member is immersed toward the back surface side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to be able to appear and disappear in front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the overhanging position, the base-side engaging member is engaged. Since the mating member is immersed toward the back surface side of the base member, the base side engaging member can be difficult to see from the player in the front view of the base member, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being spoiled.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member is projected from the front of the base member, so that the height of the displacement-side engaging member protruding from the back of the displacement member is reduced accordingly. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement side engaging member from interfering with other members when the displacement member is rotated. In other words, since the protruding height of the displacement side engaging member can be lowered, a space for displacement of other members can be secured.

The gaming machine F2 includes a driving means for rotationally driving the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base-side engaging member is projected from the front of the base member by the action of the driving force of the driving means. A game machine F3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, a driving means for rotationally driving the displacement member with respect to the base member is provided, and the base-side engaging member is a base member due to the action of the driving force of the driving means. Since it is projected from the front, it can also be used as a driving means to reduce the product cost. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member can also be used as the driving force for projecting the base-side engaging member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for such projecting.

In addition, as a form in which the base side engaging member is projected by the action of the driving force of the driving means, when the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement member directly or indirectly engages the base side. When the member is displaced in the projecting direction or the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is displaced, the base side engaging member is directly or indirectly displaced in the projecting direction by the displacement member. The form to be displaced is exemplified.

The gaming machine F3 is provided with an urging means for urging the base-side engaging member toward the immersion direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the urging force of the urging means acts. The gaming machine F4, wherein the base-side engaging member is returned to the immersion position.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, an urging means for urging the base-side engaging member in the immersion direction is provided, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the attachment is provided. Since the base-side engaging member is returned to the immersion position by the action of the urging force of the force means, it is not necessary to link both the projecting direction and the immersion direction with the action of the driving force of the driving means, and only the projecting direction is linked. Therefore, the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to be retractable from the front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves to the front of the base member. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is rotated to an overhanging position while being retracted from the base member, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front side of the base member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the base side engaging member is retracted from the front of the base member when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position. By engaging the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, it is possible not only to prevent the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) of the displacement member from tilting in the direction away from the base member, but also to prevent the base side engaging member. By narrowing the distance between the engaging surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible to suppress rattling in the front-rear direction on the tip side of the displacement member.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the overhanging position, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base-side engaging member is visually recognized by the player in the front view of the base member. It can be made difficult and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being spoiled.

<Concept of the invention using the clockwise rotation unit 18600 as an example>
The base member, the first displacement member displaceable on the base member, the second displacement member displaceable on the first displacement member, and the first and second displacement members thereof. In a game machine provided with a driving means for driving the first displacement member, the first displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in at least the first direction, and the second displacement member can be brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member. The inertial force that is formed and generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member is allowed to act as a force in the direction that displaces the first displacement member in the first direction. Characteristic gaming machine G1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force is applied to a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. There is a gaming machine provided with a driving means to be provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to form a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced and a mode in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, for example, in the embodiment in which only the second displacement member is displaced, the load of the driving means is relatively small, while in the embodiment in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced. Since the load of the drive means is relatively large, the load of the drive means suddenly changes (increases) when the mode is switched. Therefore, there is a problem that stable (constant) displacement is difficult, such as a decrease in the durability of the drive means and a decrease in the displacement speed when the mode is switched.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the second displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the first displacement member or the base member, and is generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member. Since the inertial force to be applied acts as a force in the direction of displacement of the first displacement member, the first aspect of displacement of the second displacement member is switched to the second aspect of displacement of the first displacement member. At that time, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means. As a result, the durability of the driving means can be improved, the decrease in the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first aspect to the second aspect can be suppressed, and stable (constant) displacement can be easily performed. ..

As the first aspect and the second aspect, for example, the first aspect displaces only the second displacement member, and the second aspect displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, an embodiment in which the first aspect displaces only the second displacement member and the second aspect displaces only the first displacement member is exemplified. In the latter aspect, in particular, when the load required for the change of the first displacement member is sufficiently larger than the load required for the displacement of the second displacement member (for example, the weight of the first displacement member as compared with the second displacement member). Is effective when you think enough).

In the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the directions of the rotation axes of the second displacement member are parallel to each other.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the directions of the rotation axes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are parallel to each other, the inertial force generated when the second displacement member comes into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is generated. As a force that displaces the first displacement member in the first direction, it can be efficiently acted on the first displacement member.

In the gaming machines G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member comes into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a component downward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine G3 characterized by.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member comes into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the direction of gravity. Since the direction includes the heading component, it is possible to easily secure the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

A gaming machine G4 in any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, wherein the first direction is a direction including a component that goes upward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the first direction is the direction including the component going upward in the direction of gravity, so that the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to use the inertial force generated by the contact with the member as an auxiliary force in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction.

In any of the game machines G1 to the game machine G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side and the other end side of the second displacement member is approached to one end side of the first displacement member from a direction opposite to the first direction, the second displacement member The gaming machine G5, wherein the other end side of the machine is in contact with the base member.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is first displaced. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side of the member and the other end side of the second displacement member is approached to one end side of the first displacement member from a direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the base member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the base member is efficiently acted as a force in the direction of displacement of the first displacement member in the first direction. Can be done. That is, when switching from the first aspect of displacement of the second displacement member to the second aspect of displacement of the first displacement member, the action of the inertial force is assisted to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as a force.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, improve the durability of the drive means, and reduce the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be suppressed to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any of the game machines G1 to the game machine G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side of the first displacement member and is approached to one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the second displacement member The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the other end side of the first displacement member is in contact with the first displacement member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is first displaced. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side of the member and the other end side of the second displacement member is approached from the same direction as the first direction to one end side of the first displacement member, the other end of the second displacement member. Since the side is in contact with the first displacement member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is efficiently used as a force in the direction of displacement the first displacement member in the first direction. Can act on. That is, when switching from the first aspect of displacement of the second displacement member to the second aspect of displacement of the first displacement member, the action of the inertial force is assisted to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as a force.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, improve the durability of the drive means, and reduce the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be suppressed to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any of the game machines G1 to G7, a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first displacement member and the second displacement member is provided, and the first displacement member is the drive pin. The second displacement member is provided with a first groove having an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that is connected to the action section and does not interfere with the drive pin, and the second displacement member is an action section that is acted on by the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced by displacement of the drive pin in the first groove and the second groove which are overlapped with each other. Amusement machine G8.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the action section affected by the drive pin and the action section, and the drive pin interferes with each other. Since the second groove of the second displacement member includes at least an action section that is acted on by the drive pin, the drive pin provides a non-interference section of the first groove and an action section of the second groove. By being displaced, the first aspect in which the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in the stopped state, and the drive pin is displaced in the working section of the first groove and the working section of the second groove. As a result, it is possible to form a second aspect in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and it is possible to smoothly shift from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5, and G1 to G8, the gaming machine K1 is a slot machine. .. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5, and G1 to G8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. K2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5, and G1 to G8, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine K3, which is characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 61 Inner rail 86, 2086 Center frame 600, 3600, 4600, 5600, 6600, 7600, 18600, 19680 Left rotation unit (displacement member)
610 Back base (base body)
620, 18620 Front base (base body)
620a Inclined surface 621 Bearing recess (gear receiving part)
623 Protruding part (gear receiving part)
626 Convex 627 Bearing part 628 Protruding part 630, 3630, 4630, 5630, 19630 First displacement member 631 Rotating shaft 634 Contact part 635 First groove 635a Action section 635b Non-interference section 640, 3640, 5640, 6640, 7640, 18640, 19640 Second displacement member 641,3641,5641,6641,7641, 1961 Driven member 641b Second groove 6641c, 7641c Connecting groove (third groove)
6641c1 Working section 6641c2 Non-interfering section 3641d, 5641d Connecting pin (drive pin)
642,18642, 1964 Connection displacement member 642b Decorative part 642c Overhang part 643 Connection pin 650 Drive motor (drive means)
651 1st pinion (gear)
652 Rack member (gear)
653 2nd pinion (gear)
654 Transmission member 654a Rotating shaft 654b Drive pin 654c Recessed part (recessed part)
660, 3660, 4660, 5660, 7660 Third displacement member 700, 8700, 9700, 10700, 11700, 12700, 13700, 14700, 15700, 16700, 17700 Right rotation unit (displacement member)
710 Back base (base body)
720, 12720, 13720, 14720, 15720, 16720, 17720 Front base (base body)
726, 1276, 14726, 15726 Base side engaging member 726a Base 726b Bending 727 Receiving recess (receiving part)
730 First displacement member 740, 12740, 16740, 17740 Second displacement member 742, 13742, 16742, 17742 Displacement side engaging member 742a, 13742a, 16742a, 17742a Base 742b Bending portion 743 Receiving recess 8744a Connecting pin (intermediate means, Guided part)
11747 Pinion gear (intermediate means)
750 drive motor (drive means)
754 Transmission member (driving body)
760 First connecting member (connecting member)
770, 8770, 9770 Connecting second member (connecting member)
8773,9773 Guidance unit (intermediate means)
11774 rack gear (intermediate means)
25817 Push-up part (discharge means)
821c Outlet 821d Outlet (inlet)
821e Support shaft (rotation shaft)
824 Intermediate bottom wall (guidance means)
824a Guidance bottom (guidance means, rolling guide surface)
840, 20840 Seesaw member 844 Receiving surface 847 Claw part 20884 Regulatory part (suppressing means)
850 driven member (decorative member)
21870, 22870, 23870 Rotating member (discharging means)
21871 Shaft branch 21872 Receiving plate (Receiving part)
21873 Extruded plate (extruded part)
24877b Cam section (cam, discharge means)
950 Side wall part 960 Downstream wall part 971 Concave groove 972 Protrusion R Region forming part L Extension length of horizontal passage SP1 to SP4 Biasing spring (urging means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and the weight of the game ball is applied to the first state in a no-load state. Then, there is a gaming machine that forms the second state, respectively (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-283136

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a plurality of gaming balls are continuous, the first state and the second state cannot be switched alternately.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily switching between a first state and a second state.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a seesaw member whose one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is in a no-load state. Then, the first state is formed in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis, so that one end side is raised and the other end side is raised. It forms a lowered second state, and includes a discharge means that facilitates discharge of the game ball placed on the other end side of the rotation shaft.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the containment body. (A) is a side view of the housing in the direction of arrow XVIIIa of FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the housing in the direction of arrow XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st rotating body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body. It is a side schematic view of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side schematic view of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. (A) is a front view of the central rotating unit in the state of being arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotating unit in the state of being arranged in the overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central rotating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. (A) is a front view of the connected displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connected displacement member in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a side view of the connected displacement member of FIG. 32 (a). It is sectional drawing of the connection displacement member in the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. (A) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the connected displacement member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the connected displacement member in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). It is a figure. (A) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the first displacement member, and (b) is a front view of the front base and the first displacement member in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 3C is a schematic side view, and FIG. 40C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the first displacement member in the XLc-XLc line of FIG. 40A. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is sectional drawing of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the XLVIII portion of FIG. 47 (c), and FIG. 48 (b) is the first displacement member in the direction of arrow XLVIIIb of FIG. 48 (a). It is a side view of the second displacement member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device. (A) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning apparatus in the line LIIa-LIIA of FIG. 51. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device in line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 52 (a), and FIG. 52 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device in line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 52 (b). It is a rear schematic diagram of a winning device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board which partially enlarged the LVI part of FIG. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board which partially enlarged the LVI part of FIG. It is a front perspective view of a center frame. It is a front view of the region forming part. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a region forming portion on the LX-LX line of FIG. 59. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 4th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a top view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a top view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. (A) to (c) are schematic front views of the right-handed rotating unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are schematic front views of the right-handed rotating unit according to the sixth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 8th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of a guide part. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit in tenth embodiment. (A) is a front view of the cage, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage on the CXVIIb-CXVII line b of (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the cage on the CXVIIc-CXVIIc line of (a). It is sectional drawing of a cage. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit in eleventh embodiment. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from a retracted position to an overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the left rotation unit in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base in the line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base in the line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the front base and the displacement side engaging member. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the left rotation unit in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotating unit in a state where the second displacement member is arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross section of the left rotating unit in the CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line of (a). It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the left-handed rotating unit in a state where the second displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the left-handed rotating unit in the CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base on the CXLIb-CXLIb line in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the left rotation unit in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base on the CXLIVb-CXLIVb line in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the front base (opening) and the displacement side engaging member. It is a partial decomposition perspective view of the left rotation unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a top surface schematic view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the back base and the displacement side engaging member. It is an exploded perspective view of the right-handed rotation unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-hand rotation unit in 19th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning apparatus in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning apparatus in the 21st embodiment. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning apparatus in the 22nd embodiment. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning apparatus. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning apparatus. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device. (A) is a front view of the rotation axis, and (b) is a side view of the rotation axis in the direction of the arrow CLXXIb of (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa line in FIG. 172 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb line in FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device according to the 25th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa line in FIG. 176 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb line in FIG. 176 (a). ) Is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc line in FIG. 176 (b), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId line in FIG. 176 (b).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning opening 640, a third winning opening 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the plastic ball flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 has won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. And the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The time is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the closed state (closed state). Compared to the case where the ball is in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, the ball is more likely to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that the opening times of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are not changed or are opened during the probability change or the time reduction. In addition to changing the time, the change may be made to increase the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened at one time more than usual. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. At least one of the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened may be changed in a certain time and one time. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, or the first per hit. The electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 may not be opened the number of times, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of any one of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82, and the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is displayed. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing, and a sphere of a first through gate 66 and a second through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol with passing as a trigger is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400, and the left-right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 overhangs into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It is made visible through the part.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device has a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. Is a variable display that alternately lights and lights for a predetermined time. When it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the pachinko machine 10 draws a winning lottery. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 is attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment). The 1 electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. be able to. Therefore, during the probability change and the time saving, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82.

It should be noted that during the probability change or the time reduction, the probability of hitting is increased, or the probability of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are increased for each hit, or the number of times of opening is increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the time reduction, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the spheres have passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held spheres is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol. It is also lit and displayed on the hold lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembling position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. Further, a third winning opening 82 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. As a result, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. , But the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 is three, and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. May be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the ball can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

Further, a second electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a is displayed. The open state (enlarged state) is set, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the third winning opening 82.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a is also longer than during the normal period. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is high even in a low probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is the same in the state. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball goes to the first winning opening 64 when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is set higher than when winning a prize. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a as in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the ball can always win a prize. It is in a state.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning opening 64 without an electric accessory (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64. It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of big hit lottery and aim to be a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 is likely to be in an open state, and the third winning opening 82 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the third winning opening 82 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to open the second electric accessory 82a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the third winning opening 82.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

Not limited to the above-described form, either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 may draw a winning lottery for a symbol different from the second symbol when the ball passes through. The second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 or the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state by the lottery of the symbol. In this case, since the symbols drawn by the ball passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are different, the electric accessory that the ball passes through and opens the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. Will be selected one by one.

As a result, for example, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit to the right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is drawn. When a hit is selected in the lottery of 2 symbols, the 2nd electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is hit to the left and passed through the 1st through gate 66, a symbol different from the 2nd symbol is drawn and the 2nd symbol is drawn. When a hit is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, the first electric accessory 640a can be opened in a gaming state.

Therefore, if the game state is such that the lottery of the second symbol is easy to win during the probability change, and the game state is such that a symbol different from the second symbol is easy to win during the time reduction, right-handed during the probability change and the second through gate 67 In a gaming state where it is easy to win a ball by opening the second electric accessory 82a by passing through, and during a short time, hit left to pass through the first through gate 66 and open the first electric accessory to win the ball. You can make the game state easy to play. Therefore, the gaming states during normal, time saving, and probabilistic change can be set to different gaming states, so that the player can enjoy each gaming state.

In addition, when the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, if the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, it is different from the second symbol. When a symbol is drawn and a lottery of a symbol different from the second symbol is selected, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and when the ball is left-handed to pass through the first through gate 66, the second symbol is passed. Is drawn, and when a hit is selected for the second symbol, the second electric accessory 82a can be opened in a gaming state.

In this case, regardless of the probability change or the time reduction, when the ball passes through the second through gate 67 by hitting the right, the first electric accessory is released and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 by hitting left, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and the ball can be put into a gaming state in which it is easy to win a prize in the third winning opening 82. Therefore, the player needs to change the way of hitting from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to change the way of hitting the player at any time, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 64, and the third winning opening 82 becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variable time) is set. After that, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to display the jackpot. Occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. , The left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the rotating body elevating unit 300 is arranged in the lowered position, and the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 are arranged in the overhanging position. The state in which the body elevating unit 300 is arranged in the ascending position and the center rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 are arranged in the retracted position is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 210, a rotating body elevating unit 300 emits light upward. The decoration unit 400 and the central rotation unit 500 are arranged, and the right rotation unit 600 and the left rotation unit 700 are arranged on the left and right respectively.

The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one side (left front side of FIG. 6) is opened by each of these wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a box-shaped accommodating body 330 in which a plurality of units (three in the present embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality of rotating body elevating units 300 (two in the present embodiment) accommodating each of the accommodating bodies 330. ) (1st rotating body 340a and 2nd rotating body 340b) are mainly provided.

The plurality of housings 330 are independently formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, at the ascending position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Will be done.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotatably supported by the accommodating body 330, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by the rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let me. The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three outer peripheral surfaces.

In the present embodiment, the drive sources of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are shared by the drive motor 350 of 1, and while the component cost can be reduced, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340a and the second rotating body can be reduced. The combination of the figures of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine types of combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). The details will be described later.

The light emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light emitting device 420 arranged in the central portion of the base body 410, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 421 arranged inside the light emitting device 420. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to be irradiated), the effect of light emission is performed. The details will be described later.

The central rotation unit 500 includes a back surface base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 whose base end side is rotatably supported by the back surface base 510, and is arranged on the back surface side of the light emitting decoration unit 400. The pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the overhanging position (see FIG. 7) protruding into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the back side of the light emitting decoration unit 400 so as to be invisible to the player. It is rotated to and from the retracted position (see FIG. 8). The details will be described later.

The right-handed rotating unit 600 includes a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) arranged in front of the front base 315 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and a displacement in which the base end side is rotatably supported by the base body. A member (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640) is provided. On the other hand, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) arranged on the front surface of the front base 317 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and the base end side is rotatably supported by the base body. A displacement member (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640) is provided. Each displacement member has an overhang position (see FIG. 7) overhanging into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and a retracted position (see FIG. 7) that is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player. (See FIG. 8). The details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 60, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22.

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit 300. Further, FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for raising and lowering the central housing body 330, and a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R for raising and lowering the left and right housing bodies 330, respectively. It is formed from 3 units of. The left unit 300L is superposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby the three accommodating bodies 330 are arranged side by side in the width direction.

Here, the detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C is provided on the front side of the front base 311 having an L-shape in front view, the front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the back base 311 and the front side of the front base 312. The drive motor 320 to be arranged, the accommodating body 330 which is raised and lowered with respect to the rear base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, and the first rotating body 340a and the first rotating body 340a accommodated in the accommodating body 330. It mainly includes a two-rotating body 340b and a transmission mechanism accommodated between the facing surfaces of the rear base 311 and the front base 312 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the accommodating body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and geared on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member, and the rack gear 324 are arranged on one side and the accommodating body 330 is arranged on the other side. It includes a connecting member 325 to be installed.

A pair of shafts are projected from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. Further, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the connecting members 325 (rack gear 324) are arranged by these slide guides 351 and 352. ) And the housing 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 325 and the housing body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into a linear motion of the rack gear 324. With the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the housing body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion in which the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically elongated portion in which the accommodating body 330 is arranged by the horizontally elongated portion between the lower end sides thereof. It is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the central accommodating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position while the left accommodating body 330 is arranged in the descending position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. , It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

The slide guide 351 is a linear guide including a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back surface base 311 and a sliding body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, which will be described later. Further, the slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail fixed to the back base 311 and the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the accommodating body 330, and the first rail and the second rail of both. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism including an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left accommodating body 330 is juxtaposed on the side of the central accommodating body 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) is correspondingly increased. ) The dimensions become longer. Further, as described above, in order to avoid visual recognition from the player, a horizontally long portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape in front view, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central housing 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central accommodating body 330, the central accommodating body 330 is arranged in the raised position. However, the extended slide guide 352 regulates the swing in the left-right direction, and the posture of the central housing body 330 can be stabilized. On the other hand, in the state where the central housing body 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L has a rear base 313 formed vertically in front view and arranged in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313 thereof. The intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, the front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, the drive motor 320 arranged on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and the driving force of the drive motor 320. The housing body 330 that is raised and lowered with respect to the bases 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b that are housed in the housing body 330, and the housing bodies 313 to 315 are housed between the facing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 320 to the housing body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L is a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and geared on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member, and a connecting member 326 for connecting the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

A shaft is projected from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on this shaft. Further, a shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole and rotatably supported.

A slide guide 351 is arranged in a vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14) on the front surface of the rear base 313, and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. .. Further, a guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. A guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is extended in the guide plate 353 in the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the housing body 330 is provided through the collar C in the guide groove 353a. It is inserted. Therefore, the housing body 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the housing body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 becomes a linear motion of the rack gear 324. It is converted, and the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 along with the linear motion of the rack gear 324 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L has a rear base 316 formed in a substantially L shape on the front surface and connected to the right end portion of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and a rear base 316 thereof. The front base 317 overlapped on the front side of the rear base 313, the drive motor 320 arranged on the front side of the front base 317, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 raises and lowers the rear base 316 and the front base 317. The accommodating body 330 is accommodated between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330, and the facing surfaces of the rear base 316 and the front base 317, and accommodating the driving force of the drive motor 320. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism that transmits to the body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R is a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a flat plate member meshed with the pinion gear 323. It includes a rack gear 324 formed as a rack with teeth cut on the side surface, and a connecting member 327 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing body 330.

A shaft is projected from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is arranged in a vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16) on the front surface of the rear base 316, and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. .. Further, in the front base 316, a guide groove 316a which is an elongated hole-shaped opening is extended along the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the housing body 330 is collared in the guide groove 316a (FIG. It is inserted via (not shown). Therefore, the housing body 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316a of the back base 316. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 327 and the housing body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the rack gear 324 has a linear motion. Along with the linear motion, the housing body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the lateral width dimension of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central accommodating body 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surfaces of the left accommodating body 330 and the right accommodating body 330, the lateral widths of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). The dimensions can be shortened (in the left-right direction) to increase its rigidity. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the left and right accommodating bodies 330 (make it difficult to swing in the left-right direction).

Along with this, it is not necessary to dispose a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right accommodating bodies 330, and the guide plate 353 or the guide grooves 353a, 316a of the back base 316 guide the guide plate 353 or the back base 316. Therefore, the posture can be sufficiently stabilized. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the accommodating body 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the housing body 330. 18 (a) is a side view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIa of FIG. 17, and FIG. 18 (b) is a front view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). Is. In addition, in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B, the state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the accommodating body 330 is arranged on the inner surface side of the base 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 arranged on the left and right sides of the base 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition wall body 334 and the decorative body 335 arranged on the front surface of the base 331 are provided, and the respective parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

The base 331 is a member forming the back surface (back side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (upper side and lower side in FIG. 18B) of the housing body 330, and is a combination of three plate-shaped members. Is formed integrally. A reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is arranged on the front surface of the portion forming the back surface of the accommodating body 330.

The reflective portion RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that projects at least in the vertical direction from the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18 (b)).

The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members forming the left and right side surfaces of the housing body 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are bored at two positions, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which the fixed shaft 341 described later of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is inserted, and holds the fixed shaft 341 non-rotatably. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape obtained by removing one of the inner peripheral surfaces of the holding holes 332a and 333a, which are partitioned by connecting two points on the circumference of the circular shape with a straight line.

The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332, and a transmission gear 352 and an intermediate gear 354 are rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332. Further, the partition body 334 is provided with insertion holes 334a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 at two locations.

The decorative body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in the shape of a front view frame by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The housing body 330 formed in this way is driven by a drive motor 350 arranged on the partition body 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 350, and a second rotating body 340b. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and a detection mechanism that detects the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 is a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 meshed with the drive gear 351 in this order. It is equipped with a gear train consisting of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is fixed to each of the axial end faces.

Here, the detailed configuration of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different. Therefore, in the following, the first rotating body 340a is a representative example. The description of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 rotatably supported at both ends (shaft portion 341a) of the fixed shaft 341 in the axial direction, and a pair of end face plates 342 thereof. It mainly includes three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) erected between the end face plates 342.

The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341b and shaft portions 341a connected to both ends of the body portion 341b in the axial direction. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side wall bodies 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing body 330, and connects a pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and a pair of shaft portions 341a. It is provided with a body portion 341b to be formed.

The shaft portion 341a has a shape in which the vertical cross-sectional shape of the shaft is formed by removing one of the circular shapes obtained by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape in which a part of the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder is chamfered by a flat surface). The shape is similar to that of the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall bodies 332 and 333. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be held in the accommodating body 330 (side wall bodies 332 and 333) so as not to rotate.

A plurality of (4 in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be applied to the inner surfaces of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C.

In this case, in the state where the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held non-rotatably, the body portion 341b sets the irradiation direction of the LED 344 to the front surface of the accommodating body 330 (decorative body 335). The opening 335a and FIG. 18B are arranged in a posture (rotational position) toward the front side of the paper surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display board arranged on the front surface (“visual position” described later) of the housing body 330 among the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. it can.

Since the fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends open in the axial direction, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed and the wiring is routed by utilizing the internal space. It can be pulled out of the housing 330 through the opening at the directional end. Further, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 is made non-rotatable with respect to the housing body 330, so that even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force of twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342a having a circular axial cross section is formed in the center thereof. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341. As a result, the end face plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing body 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

Here, since the body portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft portion 341a, the end face plate 342 is formed between the side wall bodies 332 and 333 of the housing body 330 and the body portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. The second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342 of the second rotating body 340b, but the mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are plate-shaped members having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and are paired by connecting the outer edges of both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342. It is erected between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular columnar body together with the end face plate 342.

A figure is drawn on the outer surface of each of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, when the triangular columnar body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the display boards 343A to 343C are made visible to the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

At least a part of the outer surface of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as will be described later, even if there is a deviation of a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotation position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, each display board 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of the ~ 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

In the present embodiment, in the axial view of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise ends of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward. The central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. As a result, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. Further, the radius of the arc of the arcuate portion formed by being curved is a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each display board 343A to 343C (for example, twice or more and four times). The following) is set.

Here, in the following, the front surface of the accommodating body 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B) is used as the arrangement position of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular columnar body is rotated. The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "visual position", and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the housing 330 (base 331). The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface becomes invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visible position, the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). .. When the triangular columnar body is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is arranged in the visible position, and the second display plate 343B or the third display is displayed. The other side of the plate 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at the shielding positions.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C have a transmitting portion PN through which light can be transmitted. Is formed in preparation for a part. Further, on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is arranged.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position where the inner surface of the display board arranged at the visible position among the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in a state where the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transmissive portion PN of each display board 343B, 343C and directly viewed by the player. Can be made to.

On the other hand, in the state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. After transmitting the light through the transmitting portion PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, the light is reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base 331 of the housing 330, and the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base 331. It can be indirectly visually recognized by the player.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at the rotating position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the base 331 of the housing body 330 is visually recognized. It is possible to remind the player of the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. Thereby, the player can expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a is rotated to a position where the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C can be visually recognized.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflecting plate is accompanied by the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (display boards 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (vertical spacing in FIG. 18B), or The apparent diameter of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) can be increased or decreased, and the outer surfaces (display plates 343A to 343C) of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b face each other with respect to the reflecting plate RF. The angle can be changed. That is, as the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate, the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmitting portion PN is visually recognized as the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base 331. The mode (for example, the size of the area where the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

It will be described back to FIG. 17 and FIG. The detection mechanism is a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362 having a diameter. A terminal gear 363 having a detected plate 363a projecting outward in the direction and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detected plate 363a of the terminal gear 363 are provided.

The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the substrate 331 with the detection region arranged on the movement locus of the plate to be detected 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detected plate 363a. That is, the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position) based on the detection result of the sensor device 364.

Next, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both of these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. As a result, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Further, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite directions to those described above.

As a result, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b visually recognized by the player is changed in order. In this case, the combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b was limited to three sets in the conventional product.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally driven by the drive motor of 1, for example, the combination that can be formed is, for example, the first display plate 343A and the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a. The first combination of arranging the first display plate 343A of the two rotating bodies 340b at the display position, the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340b at the display position. There were only three sets of the second combination to be arranged, the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b to be arranged at the display position.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are independently rotated and driven by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations can be combined. It can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the cost of parts increases because two drive motors are required.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while limiting the number of drive motors 350 to only one, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, nine sets of combinations are quickly displayed by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotating positions without requiring perfect matching of the rotating positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. You can get it out. The combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 20 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are side schematic views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing the transition state when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. From (a) to FIG. 21 (e), No. 20 is shown in FIG. In the states shown as 1 to 5, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) show No. 20 in FIG. It corresponds to each of the states shown as 6 to 10.

In FIG. 20, as a combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position is indicated by the reference numeral “A” or “A ′”. The state in which the second display board 343B is arranged is represented by the code "B" or "B'", and the state in which the third display board 343C is arranged in the visual position is represented by the code "C" or "C'". Will be done.

For example, No. 20 in FIG. 10 In the state represented by "A, C'", the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions, respectively, and the first rotating body. From 340a, the figure drawn on the first display board 343A and from the second rotating body 340b, the figure drawn on the third display board 343C correspond to a state in which the player can visually recognize them.

Further, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C of the first rotating body 340a are referred to by reference numerals “A to C” to be second. The first display plates 343A to the third display plates 343C of the rotating body 340b are illustrated with reference numerals "A'to C'", respectively.

Here, in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to each is set to different values. In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b is rotated 108 degrees. It is formed to do.

No. 20 in FIG. As shown in 1 and FIG. 21 (a), from the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at the visible positions (No. 20 of FIG. 20). 1 "A', A", the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visible position, the No. 20 in FIG. 20 is displayed. As shown in 2 and FIG. 21B, the second rotating body 340b arranges the second display plate 343B in the visible position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, since the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees, there is a difference (deviation) of 12 degrees between the two rotating positions, but each rotating body 340a , 340b is difficult for a player who visually recognizes the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees from the direction perpendicular to the axis, and as a result, each second display plate of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of the 343B are each arranged at the visible position (the second combination is formed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward in the axial view of the fixed shaft 341. (That is, the surface on which the figure is drawn is curved along the rotation direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b). , It can be difficult to recognize the difference (deviation) in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

No. 20 in FIG. From the state shown in 2 and FIG. 21 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visible position, the No. 20 in FIG. 20 is displayed. As shown in 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. 20 in FIG. From the state shown in 4 and FIG. 21 (d), No. In the rotation of the section up to the state shown in 9 and FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a arranges the display boards 343A to 343C in the visible position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while the second rotating body 340a. The 340b is arranged at a position where its rotation position is deviated from the first rotating body 340a. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the deviation of the figure (combination is not established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

No. 20 in FIG. From the state shown in 9 and FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed in the visible position, FIG. No. 20 As shown in 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b arranges the third display plate 343C in the visible position. As a result, a third combination (No. 10 “C', A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

According to the present embodiment, even in the section where the deviation of the figure (combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20) is formed, the second rotation is performed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figures visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure will be combined in the third combination.

After that, it is substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 21 (a) of FIG. 20 to the state shown in No. 9 and FIG. 22 (e) of FIG. 20). By repeating the embodiment twice more, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

In this case, No. 20 in FIG. 11-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A', in FIG. 20) may be considered. B "), a fifth combination (No. 12" B', C "in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In addition, No. 20 in FIG. 21-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A', in FIG. 20) may be considered. C "), an eighth combination (No. 22" B', A "in FIG. 20) and a ninth combination (No. 30" C', C "in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is a plurality of gears (drive gears 351 to second gear 355). It is formed as a gear train composed of (five gears), and is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

As a result, the rotation period of the first rotating body 340a and the rotation period of the second rotating body 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired). Any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified to reduce component costs and improve durability and reliability, but each gear is always meshed. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse.

Therefore, for example, the section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which the table in FIG. 20 is advanced in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) and the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established) is formed. Then, after or immediately before the third combination (No. 10 “C', A” in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. It is possible to repeat a series of operations of returning to the direction (upward in FIG. 20), whereby it is possible to make the player expect the appearance of the third combination.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) appears. When it is necessary to move the table in FIG. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), in addition to revealing the ninth combination, the table in FIG. 20 is moved in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20). It is also possible to proceed to and reveal the ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is repeated once. As long as it is done, the desired combination of figures can be quickly revealed.

Here, in the case where the second rotating body 340b is rotated 60 degrees with respect to the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is the rotation of the first rotating body 340a. On the other hand, when it is set to "1 / integer" times), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (deviation) in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can be done. However, in this case, the maximum number of combinations of figures is three.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 11 in FIG. 20). 21 "A', C"), but in the remaining 6 combinations (2nd, 3rd, 5th, 6th, 8th and 9th combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body It is allowed that a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle occurs at the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be set to 9.

That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by the drive motor 350 of 1, if the number of figures that can be combined is set to 9, the rotation of the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotating body 340a. It is not achievable only by forming a transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotating body 340b and the second rotating body 340b as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, at the rotating positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. This is possible for the first time by allowing a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle to occur. As a result, it is possible to reduce the required number of drive motors 350 and reduce the product cost while improving the effect of the effect by increasing the number of possible combinations of figures.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) in which a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle occurs at the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In combination), the stop position for stopping the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B", No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A" in FIG. 20), FIG. 21 As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotating position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to make them inconspicuous.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 "C', A", No. 20 "C', B" and No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20). As shown in FIG. 22E, since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is preceded, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotation position whose phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotating position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d). For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 114 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to make them inconspicuous.

As described above, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, each accommodating body 300 is formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, and in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are mounted on the game board 13. It can be placed on the back of the player to make it invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b can be quickly made to appear at a required timing.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the combination of nine sets of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the 1-rotating body 340a and the 2nd rotating body 340b relatively many times, which increases the time.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging each of the housing bodies 300 in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player. Can be done. As a result, the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated to a predetermined rotation position in advance without being recognized by the player, and as a result, it is necessary. When the timing comes, each accommodating body 300 is placed in the ascending position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed, so that the desired combination can be quickly obtained. Can appear in.

It should be noted that the arrangement of each of the housing bodies 300 at the lowering position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, in a fluctuation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each of the housing bodies 300 is not arranged in the descending position, and each of them is not arranged. While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotating bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the lowering position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved to the descending position and made invisible to the player, the rotation time. The generated sound may cause the player to recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have been rotated in advance.

On the other hand, by rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the time of the operation of the predetermined operating means, it is possible to mix in the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Examples of the operating means include a payout device 133, a voice output device 226, and a ball launching unit 112a (see FIGS. 3 or 4). In the state where these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated due to the payout of the ball, the output of the sound, or the firing of the ball. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

In addition to or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b You may want to perform the pre-rotation of. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, so that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation can be focused accordingly. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the advance rotation of the body 340b.

Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. 23 is a front view of the light emitting decoration unit 400. Further, FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the light emitting decoration unit 400 has a horizontally long rectangular base body 410 in front view arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 210, and the width of the base body 410. A light emitting device 420 arranged on the front surface in the center of the direction, a light shielding member 430 covering the front surface of the light emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 covering the front surface of the light emitting device 430 and made of a light transmissive material The light emitting device 420, the light-shielding member 430, and the outer peripheral decorative bodies 450 and 460 that surround the cover member 440 are mainly provided.

A plurality of (15 in this embodiment) light emitting bodies (LED 421) are arranged on the front surface side of the light emitting device 420 in a state of being dispersed over the entire surface, and are formed so as to be able to irradiate the back surface of the light shielding member 430 with light. .. Here, the light-shielding member 430 includes a main body portion 431 formed of a light-shielding material (light-impermeable material) and a partition wall 432 erected from the front surface and the back surface of the main body portion 431.

In the main body 431 of the light-shielding member 430, openings 431a having a circular front view are formed at a plurality of locations (15 locations in the present embodiment). The plurality of openings 431a are arranged at positions corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 in the front view. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 421 can reach the back surface of the cover 440 through the opening 431a of the light-shielding member 430.

The partition wall 432 is formed in a front view ring shape having a diameter smaller than that of the main body portion 431, and is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 431. As a result, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is located on the outer peripheral side of the front view circular first space surrounded by the partition wall 432 and the front view substantially crescent-shaped first space. It is divided into two spaces.

By forming the partition by the partition wall 431 in this way, the outline of the light visually recognized from the cover member 440 can be clarified. That is, when only the LED 421 in the first space is emitted, the circular shape can be visually recognized, and when only the LED 421 in the second space is emitted, the crescent shape can be visually recognized.

Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. 26A is a front view of the central rotating unit 500 in a state of being arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 26B is a front view of the central rotating unit 500 in a state of being arranged in the overhanging position. .. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the central rotation unit 500 has a rear base 510 arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210 and a front surface superimposed on the front surface of the rear base 510. A base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 whose base end side is rotatably supported by the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and a drive motor 540 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member 530. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 540 to the displacement member 530.

Shaft support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotation shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed in the front surface of the back surface base 510 and the back surface of the front base 520, respectively. Further, a support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting the crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism is provided on the front surface of the back base 510.

The displacement member 530 is a member whose front surface on the tip side is decorated, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531, a connecting gear 532, and a crank groove 533. As described above, the rotating shaft 531 is a shaft that is pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 511 and 521 of the back base 510 and the front base 520, and is projected from the front and the back of the displacement member 530 on the proximal end side.

The connecting gear 532 is a gear that is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the displacement member 530 on the base end side with the rotation shaft 531 as the center of rotation. When one of the displacement members 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531, the connecting gear 532 transmits the rotation to the other connecting gear 532 to rotate the coupling gear 532. As a result, the other displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

The crank groove 533 is a linear groove in a front view through which the connecting pin 542a of the crank gear 542 described later of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted, and is one of the pair of displacement members 530 (left side of FIG. 27, FIG. 28). It is recessed in the back surface of the displacement member 530 (on the right side). As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connecting pin 542a, so that one of the displacement members 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and is meshed with the pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and the pinion 541. It mainly includes a crank gear 542. The crank gear 542 includes a connecting pin 542a that projects at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (support shaft 512) and is inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530.

According to the central rotation unit 500 configured in this way, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541, and when the crank gear 542 is rotated, the crank gear 542 Along with the rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, so that one (left side in FIG. 27, right side in FIG. 28) is displaced. The member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531 as the center of rotation. In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also rotated synchronously via the connecting gear 532. As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the overhanging position (see FIGS. 7 and 26 (a)) protruding into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the back surface of the light emitting decoration unit 400. It is rotatable between the retracted position (see FIGS. 8 and 26 (b)).

Next, the clockwise rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 600. Note that FIG. 31 shows a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 600 is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right-handed rotating unit 600 has a base body including a rear base 610 and a front base 620, and a first displacement displaceably arranged on the front side of the front base 620 of the base body. A drive motor 650, which generates a driving force for displacementing the members 630 and the second displacement member 640, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, and is arranged on the back surface of the rear base 610, and its drive. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 650.

A part of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 651, rack member 652, and second pinion 653) is housed between the facing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is provided on the back surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 is provided to define the moving direction of the rack member 652. A pair of insertion pins 622 inserted through the 652a are provided so as to project.

Further, the front base 620 has shaft support holes 624 and 625 having a circular front view formed through the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 to be rotatably supported. The front bases 620 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the width direction (short direction).

The shaft support hole 624 that pivotally supports the first displacement member 630 is on the opening side of the game board 13 (the overhang position side of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29) with respect to the shaft support hole 625 that pivotally supports the transmission member 654. Since it is arranged on the left side), as will be described later, at the overhanging position, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure an overhanging area overhanging to the opening side of the game board 13, while the retracting position. And between the overhanging positions, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630.

A ridge 626 and a bearing portion 627 are projected from the front surface of the front base 620. The ridge 626 is a horizontally long protrusion extending along the width direction of the front base 620, and has a substantially triangular cross section. The top of the ridge 626 is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 624 in the front view. When the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced, the tops of the ridges 626 can be brought into contact with each other, and as will be described later, as compared with the case where the front surface of the front base 620 is in contact with the entire surface. Therefore, the contact area can be reduced to suppress sliding resistance, and it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging due to rubbing on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting material.

On the left side of the front base 620 when viewed from the front (the left side of FIG. 29, that is, the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a formed by chamfering the side surface and the ridge line portion of the front surface is arranged. .. Therefore, as will be described later, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642) from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced when retracting to the retracted position (see FIG. 33).

The bearing portion 627 is formed as a tubular body concentric with the shaft support hole 624, and rotatably supports the rotating shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 together with the shaft support hole 624 on the inner peripheral surface thereof. From the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, the projecting portion 628 is formed so as to project outward in the radial direction toward the lower side of the front base 620. The protrusion 628 can regulate the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range and suppress the tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward. The details will be described later (see FIG. 40).

In the present embodiment, the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the back surface of the front base 620, and the first pinion 651 is placed between the facing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620 by utilizing the bearing recess 621. Can be held rotatably. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the parts cost and the assembly cost can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the back surface of the front base 620, the protruding portion 623 protrudes from the front of the front base 620 along with the recess. In the present embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the tip end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, the front-rear direction The second displacement member 640 may interfere with the protruding portion 623, and such interference is suppressed by the ridge 626. The details will be described later (see FIG. 39).

The transmission mechanism consists of a first pinion 651 mounted on the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 having teeth. A rack member 652 formed as a rack in which the rack gear to be combined is geared on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member is provided.

The rack member 652 includes two sliding grooves 652a having a long hole shape in the front view extending along the longitudinal direction thereof, and a pair of insertion pins 622 of the front base 620 are inserted into each of the sliding grooves 652a. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a defined state. That is, the rack member 652 is held so as to be linearly movable between the facing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620.

The transmission member 654 includes a rotating shaft 654a projecting from the back surface on one end side, a drive pin 654b projecting from the front surface on the other end side opposite to the rotating shaft 654a, and the rotating shaft 654a and the drive pin. It is provided with a recessed portion 654c formed by recessing between 654b in an arc shape in the front view, and the rotating shaft 654a is inserted into the shaft support hole 625 so that the shaft can rotate to the front side of the front base 620. Be provided.

The drive pin 654b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, which will be described later. The arc shape of the recessed portion 654c in the front view is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, a shape in which the bearing portion 627 can be accepted on the inner peripheral side thereof).

Therefore, while keeping the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 close to the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630, it is suppressed from interfering with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620, and the transmission member. The rotatable range of 654 can be increased. Therefore, as will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be displaced more greatly while reducing the size of the entire clockwise rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650, the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 via the linear motion of the rack member 652. By rotating the second pinion 653, the transmission member 654 is rotated about the shaft support hole 625 of the front base 620 as the center of rotation. As will be described later, by rotating the transmission member 654 and causing the drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, the displacement according to the shape of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b can be changed. Each of the 1 displacement member 630 and the 2nd displacement member 640 can be independently performed (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

On the back surface of the first displacement member 630, a rotating shaft 631, a support shaft 632, 633, and an abutting portion 634 are projected, and a first groove 635 is recessed. As described above, the rotating shaft 631 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 624 of the front base 620, and the first displacement member 630 is connected to the front base 620 via the rotating shaft 631 and the shaft support hole 624. It is rotatably supported. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the rotary shaft 631, thereby restricting the rotary shaft 631 from coming out of the shaft support hole 624.

The support shafts 632 and 633 are axial bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connected displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 via the support shafts 632 and 633, respectively.

A pair of abutting portions 634 are arranged around the rotation shaft 631 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. Between these pair of abutting portions 634, a protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is arranged in a state where the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620. Therefore, as will be described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 is brought into contact with the side surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620. As a result, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be regulated within a predetermined range.

The first groove 635 is a concave groove into which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is formed by being bent in a dogleg shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first groove 635 has an action section 635a extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630 and a first displacement while being curved in an arc shape having a concave rotation shaft 631 side. It includes a non-interference section 635b that extends along the width direction of the member 630 (that is, is formed in a shape that is concentric with the rotation shaft 631 and is formed in a shape that divides the ring shape). As will be described later, the action section 635a is a section that receives an action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere.

The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members, a driven member 641 and a connected displacement member 642. A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 in the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connecting groove 641c are formed in the one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction, respectively. The connecting displacement member 642 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

As described above, the shaft support hole 641a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the driven member 641 is first displaced via the support shaft 632. It is rotatably supported on the back surface of the member 630. A screw having a head diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the axial end surface of the support shaft 632, thereby restricting the support shaft 632 from coming out of the shaft support hole 641a. ..

The second groove 641b is a groove-shaped opening through which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641. In a state where the driven member 641 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the first displacement member 630, the second groove 641b is overlapped with the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted into the first groove 635 via the second groove 641b. The second groove 641b is formed as an action section that is acted on by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, as will be described later.

The connecting groove 641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed so that the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643.

A shaft support hole 642a is formed through the connecting displacement member 642, and a decorative portion 642b and an overhanging portion 642c are formed so as to project outward with the shaft support hole 642a interposed therebetween. Further, the connecting displacement member 642 is provided with a connecting pin 643 that protrudes toward the front surface side thereof.

As described above, the shaft support hole 642a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the connecting displacement member 642 is first displaced via the support shaft 633. It is rotatably supported on the back surface of the member 630. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 633, whereby the rotating shaft 633 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a.

As described above, the connecting pin 643 is inserted into the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 641, whereby the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642. That is, by rotating the driven member 641 with the support shaft 632 as the center of rotation, it is possible to form a rotation with the support shaft 633 of the connected displacement member 642 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the second displacement member 640 is divided into two parts, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driving member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected to each other by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is formed by being rotatably supported by the displacement member 640, the first displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) is utilized by utilizing the amplification effect of the link mechanism, as will be described later. The amount of relative displacement with respect to the member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Here, the detailed configuration of the connected displacement member 642 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32 (a) is a front view of the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. 32 (b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member 642 in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). Is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member 642 in the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa of FIG. 32 (a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that the overhanging portion 642c is formed on the side opposite to the decorative portion 642b with the shaft support hole 642a interposed therebetween. The overhanging portion 642c can play a role as a weight for balancing when and after lifting.

In this case, the overhanging portion 642c is formed so as to protrude from the decorative portion 642b on the front side (lower side in FIG. 32B) and can be brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630, which will be described later. As described above, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), the rattling of the connected displacement member 642 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed. Further, since the overhanging portion 642c has both a role as a weight and a role as a contact portion with the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the overhanging portion 642c, four side walls from four sides of the bottom wall forming the front side (the side facing the back surface of the first displacement member 630) of the connecting displacement member 642 are erected on the back side. , The back side is formed in an open box shape. Therefore, the weight and rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape. Therefore, as will be described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which the second displacement member 640 is invisible from the front) is ensured. At the same time, the function as a weight and the function of abutting on the first displacement member 630 and suppressing rattling can be surely exhibited.

The overhanging portion 642c is formed with a ridge 642c1 that protrudes from the bottom wall and extends along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a, and the top of the ridge 642c1 is a first displacement member. It is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the 630. Therefore, the sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire surface of the bottom wall of the overhanging portion 642c comes into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630.

The connecting pin 643 is formed of a metal material (brass material in this embodiment) and has a higher hardness than the resin material, and its rear end surface (upper surface in FIG. 32 (c)) is the back surface (that is, the back surface of the connecting displacement member 642) of the connecting displacement member 642. , The surface facing the front base 620) is embedded in the connecting displacement member 642 (insert molding).

In this case, the ridge 626 of the front base 620 extends along the displacement locus of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced, so that the top of the ridge 626 of the front base 620 extends. The rear end surface of the connecting pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact with the vehicle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fogging from being formed on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting resin material due to rubbing against the ridges 626 of the front base 620. Therefore, it is possible to continuously exert the effect of transmitting light through the connecting displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. 33 and 34 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 35 and 36 show the operation between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 600 in each state at the time of carrying out. Further, FIGS. 37 and 38 are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

33 (a) is shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a), FIG. 33 (b) is shown in FIGS. 35 (b) and 37 (b), and FIG. 33 (c) is shown in FIG. 35 (c) and FIG. 37 (c) are in the same state, respectively, FIG. 34 (a) is shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 38 (a), and FIG. 34 (b) is shown in FIG. 36 (b). ) And FIG. 38 (b) and FIG. 34 (c) are in the same state as in FIGS. 36 (c) and 38 (c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 33 (c) is the same as FIG. 34 (a), FIG. 35 (c) is FIG. 36 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is FIG. 38 (a). is there.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in an upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are in front of each other. It is arranged in front of the base 620.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (a)), the first groove 635 (working section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are second. The inner wall surface of the groove 641b is pushed in the overhanging direction (right side in FIG. 37 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that the inner wall surface is shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b). As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the working section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 640 is not displaced. It is displaced integrally with the member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the same as in the above-described case. In addition, the inner wall surface of the first groove 635 (working section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is projected in the projecting direction by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 (FIG. 37 (b)). It is pushed to the right side), whereby the first displacement member 630 is rotated around the rotation shaft 631 in the overhanging direction, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630.

After the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c) (that is, FIG. 34 (a)). ), The state shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 38 (a)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 becomes an action section 635a and a non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Is reached at the connection part of.

In the state shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c) (that is, FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a)), the first displacement member 630 When one of the abutting portions 634 of the pair of abutting portions 634 is brought into contact with one side surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the projecting direction is caused. Be regulated.

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (a)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a), and 38 (a), the transmission member 654 The drive pin 654b moves with respect to the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 along the non-interference section 635b without interfering with the inner wall surface thereof. As a result, the first displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 38 (a).

On the other hand, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 38 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that FIG. 34 (b) is shown. As shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in a direction for raising the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)). The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642 via the connection of the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643, and the connecting displacement member 642 lifts the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation ( It is rotated clockwise in FIG. 38 (b). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), the same as in the above-described case. In addition, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, whereby FIG. 34 (c) ), The first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the overhanging positions, as shown in FIGS. 36 (c) and 38 (c).

Contrary to the above case, the transmission member 654 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (c)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that the first displacement member 630 is shown in FIG. 38 (c). It is maintained in the indicated state (position).

On the other hand, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 38 (c)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, whereby FIG. 34 (b), As shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in the direction in which the connecting groove 641c is lowered (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)), and the connected displacement member. The 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is swung down (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), the case described above Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is swung down.

After the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), the states shown in FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a) (that is, FIG. 33 (c). ), The state shown in FIGS. 35 (c) and 37 (c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 becomes an action section 635a and a non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Is reached at the connection part of.

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c), and 37 (c), the first displacement occurs. The inner wall surface of the first groove 635 (working section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed in the upright direction (left side in FIG. 37C) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. As shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the upright direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the working section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 640 is not displaced. It is displaced integrally with the member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the same as in the above-described case. In addition, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the upright direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the starting ends of the working section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, whereby FIG. 33 (a). , The first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged in the retracted position as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a).

In the upright position shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), the other contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is the front base. By contacting the other side surface of the protrusion 628 of the 620, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the upright direction is restricted.

As described above, in the right rotation unit 600, the first displacement member 630 is in a posture in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped (superimposed) in the thickness direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 33 and 34). And since the second displacement member 640 is arranged on the front side of the front base 620, these first grooves 635 are compared with the case of the conventional product in which the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side in the same plane. And the plane space required for the arrangement of the second groove 641b (that is, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape (planar space) in the front view.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, it is required to increase the size of the display device (third symbol display device 81). However, even in this case, there is a relatively large margin in the thickness direction (front-back direction, for example, the vertical direction of the paper surface of FIGS. 10 and 11). Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a space in the thickness direction having a relatively large margin is used, the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 is small in the front view. It is possible to increase the size of the display device, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

Further, in the case where the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped with each other, the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 is transmitted to each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 by the drive pin 654b of 1. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to individually provide drive pins (transmission members) for each of the first groove and the second groove as in the conventional product. That is, the parts can be shared, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is formed by being rotatably supported by the support shafts 632 and 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplification effect of the link mechanism can be utilized. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, the relative displacement amount of the connected displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into a driven member 641 and a connected displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft that pivotally supports the driven member 641 and the connected displacement member 642. By arranging 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), the driven position is driven. It is possible to form a posture in which the member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are overlapped with each other.

As a result, the second displacement member 640 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (making it invisible to the player). Therefore, in the retracted position, not only can the outer shape of the right-handed rotating unit 600 be miniaturized in the front view (see FIG. 33A), but also when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the standing posture to the overhanging posture. (See FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c)), after the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the overhanging posture while hiding the existence of the second displacement member 640 (decorative portion 642b) from the player. The second displacement member 640 can be projected from the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c)), and it is possible to easily perform an effect that gives an impact to the player.

As described above, the operations of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33 (a) to the overhang position shown in FIG. 34 (c) are first described from FIG. 33 (a). As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) in the overhanging direction (that is, the collapse direction, referred to as the "first direction") as they are, and FIG. After the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped as shown in 33 (c) and 34 (a), the second displacement as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). It is an operation in which the connecting displacement member 642 of the member 640 displaces (rotates) the decorative portion 642b in a lifting direction (referred to as a "second direction"). That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

As a result, the inertial force accompanying the stop of the first displacement member 630, which has been displaced in the first direction, can be canceled by the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 starts the displacement in the second direction. As a result, a series of operations from the retracted position to the overhanging position can be smoothly performed, and not only the effect of the effect can be enhanced, but also the load on the parts due to the action of the inertial force is reduced to improve the durability. Can be planned.

In this case, in the present embodiment, since the weight of the first displacement member 630 is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, the overhang position shown in FIG. 34 (c) from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33 (a). In the operation of displacementing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, the heavy first displacement member 630 can be stopped first, and the lighter weight second displacement member 640 can be stopped last. As a result, the burden on the gears (first pinion 651, rack member 652 and second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) in the drive motor 650 and the transmission mechanism can be reduced.

That is, from the above-mentioned state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced in the overhanging direction (first direction) while being integrated (see FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c)), the first displacement member and the second displacement member 640 are displaced. 1 Displacement of the displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (second direction). The transition from the displaced state (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) is that the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 shifts from the working section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interfering section 635b. Therefore, the rotation of the gears (first pinion 651, rack member 652, and second pinion 653) in the drive motor 650 and the transmission mechanism can be continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped during the transition of such a state, the load on the gear of the drive motor 650 transmission mechanism due to the stop can be avoided.

On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (the first direction). The transition from the state of being displaced in two directions (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) to the state of stopping the second displacement member 640 (see FIG. 34 (c)) is the drive motor 650. And it is necessary to stop the rotation of the gears of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 651, rack member 652 and second pinion 653), and the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 is stopped is applied to the gears. However, since the only member to be stopped in this case is the second displacement member 640, which has a light weight, the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

Here, as described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is outwardly opposite to the decorative portion 642b with the portion (shaft support hole 642a) pivotally supported by the first displacement member 630 interposed therebetween. It is provided with an overhanging portion 642c formed by overhanging (see FIG. 32), and is formed so that the overhanging portion 642c can play the role of a weight.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated to lift the decorative portion 642b upward, the overhanging portion 642c is formed on the opposite side to the decorative portion 642b. Therefore, it is possible to easily lift the decorative portion 642b upward by utilizing the weight of the overhanging portion 642c. Therefore, it is possible to quickly lift the decorative portion 642b, enhance the effect of the effect, and suppress the driving force of the drive motor 650 required for the lifting operation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhanging portion 642c are suspended. As compared to the cantilevered state in which only the decorative portion 642b is formed, the decorative portion 642b can stabilize the lifted posture and is required to maintain that posture. The driving force of the driving motor 650 can be suppressed.

In this case, as described above, the overhanging portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that its bottom wall (convex 642c1, see FIG. 32) can be brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated), the overhanging portion 642c is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630, so that the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced. The rattling of the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be suppressed. Therefore, the posture of the decorative portion 642b at the time of displacement can be stabilized, the effect of the effect can be enhanced, and wear and breakage of the shaft support portion due to rattling can be suppressed.

Further, since the overhanging portion 642c also has a role of abutting on the first displacement member 630 and suppressing rattling in addition to the role as a weight, it is necessary to separately provide parts for both of these roles. It can be made unnecessary, and the structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Further, the overhanging portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed in a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). As a result, the weight and rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape of the overhanging portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, invisible to the player in front), and the connection displacement is formed. While ensuring that the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) is displaced, the overhanging portion 642c reliably exerts a function as a weight and a function of contacting the back surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress rattling. Can be made to.

Here, in the front base 620, as described above, the shaft support hole 624 that pivotally supports the first displacement member 630 is on the opening side (third) of the game board 13 with respect to the shaft support hole 625 that pivotally supports the transmission member 654. Since it is arranged on the overhang position side of the 1 displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member are arranged at the overhang position as shown in FIGS. 33 to 38. While the overhanging area of the 640 can be secured toward the opening side of the game board 13, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 while being displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position.

In this case, as described above, the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that pivotally supports the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 is shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38. As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, it is formed so as to be in contact with the bearing portion 627, so that the second displacement member 640 is relative to the first displacement member 630. The rotation can be regulated within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654, which has the role of transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 650, can also serve as a stopper that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the bearing portion 627 is a portion for raising the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in a superposed position (FIG. 6). 29), the rigidity is relatively high, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side thereof. As shown in FIG. 38 (c), the transmission member 654 is brought into contact with the bearing portion 627. Therefore, the rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used. It can be changed.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 654 is provided with a recessed portion 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the second When the displacement member 640 is extended to the overhanging position, the bearing portion 627 is formed so as to be acceptable in the recessed portion 654c, so that the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be secured accordingly. In other words, while securing the movable range of the transmission member 654, the position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 can be brought close to the bearing portion 627, so that the outer shape of the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed and FIG. 37 And as shown in FIG. 38, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (ie, while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the overhang position. , A state in which it is invisible to the player in front) can be easily formed.

As described above, the front base 620 is formed so as to be inclined by chamfering the side surface and the front ridge line portion on the left side of the front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side of FIG. 33C). An inclined surface 620a is arranged. Therefore, the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) in the direction of lowering the decorative portion 642b from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c), and after the state shown in FIG. 34 (b), the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) is displayed. When forming, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced. Similarly, from the state shown in FIG. 33 (c), the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position integrally with the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 33 (b) shows. Even when the state shown in FIG. 33A is formed through the state shown in FIG. 33A, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with its rotation shaft 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is arranged on the first displacement member 630, and the weight is increased. The first displacement member 630 is liable to sway in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 33) (that is, sway in the direction in which the connection displacement member 642 is moved closer to the front base 620), and the connection displacement member 642 It is easy to be locked to the side surface of the front base 620. Therefore, a configuration in which the inclined surface 620a is provided on the front base 620 is particularly effective.

Further, as described above, the front base 620 includes ridges 626 that protrude from the front surface and extend along the displacement direction (rotational direction) of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 37, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, only the top of the ridge 626 is the second displacement member 640. Can be contacted with. Therefore, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the second displacement member 640. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

Here, the relationship between the ridge 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. 39 (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. 39 (b) is the front base 620 in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the connection displacement member 642.

As described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter or the display device can be transmitted to enhance the decorative effect. On the other hand, since the connecting displacement member 642 is a member arranged facing the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), shaking and rattling occur when the second displacement member 640 is displaced. As a result, it comes into contact with the front surface of the front base 620. In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the connecting displacement member 642, cloudiness is formed on the connecting displacement member 642 due to rubbing against the front surface of the front base 620, and the light transmission is impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ridge 626 is formed on the front surface of the front base 620, and only the top of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact with the connecting displacement member 642. Fogging (a portion where light transmission is impaired) due to rubbing formed on the connected displacement member 642 can be partially suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, in the second displacement member 640, a metal connecting pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is provided on the connecting displacement member 642. The ridge 626 of the front base 620 is integrated with the first displacement member 630 and follows the trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (see FIGS. 33, 35 and 37). Will be extended.

As a result, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface (the surface on the right side of FIG. 39B) of the connecting pin 642 hits the top of the ridge 626. Can be touched. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connecting displacement member 642 from the top of the ridge 626 can be applied to the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on the other parts of the connecting displacement member 642 can be weakened by that amount. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging on the other portion of the connecting displacement member 642 due to rubbing against the ridge 626, and to prevent the function of transmitting the light from being impaired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the function of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 will be described. 40 (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front base in the direction of arrow XLb of FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 40 (c) is a schematic side view of the 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 in the XLc-XLc line of FIG. 40 (a).

As shown in FIG. 40, the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that rotatably supports the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 630 is placed in front of the front base 620 by the height of the bearing portion 627. Since the bearing is supported in a raised state, a space for arranging the second displacement member 640 can be formed between the front surface of the front base 620 and the back surface of the first displacement member 630. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be superposed on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

As described above, the front base 620 includes an overhanging portion 628 formed so as to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 is projected from the back surface thereof. The contact portion 634 is provided, and the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the protrusion 628 of the front base 620, so that the relative rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 is within a predetermined range. Can be regulated within.

In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is erected from the front of the front base 620 as a large-diameter cylindrical body to increase its rigidity and form a dead space on the outer peripheral side. The first displacement is formed by projecting the projecting portion 628 from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 toward the outside in the radial direction, and abutting the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 with the projecting portion 628. The rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be ensured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 40A) portion of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size including the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 in the front view. That is, the front surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 (the front side surface of the paper surface in FIG. 40A) is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. As a result, rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced and tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40C) can be suppressed.

Further, in addition to the role of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 as a stopper that receives the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 on its side surface and regulates the relative displacement, the back surface of the first displacement member 630 is mounted on the front surface thereof. Since it is possible to combine the roles of receiving and suppressing rattling and tilting, it is not necessary to separately provide the parts for both of these roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with its rotation shaft 631 (bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum, and the first displacement member 630 has a second displacement member 630. Since the displacement member 640 is arranged and the weight is increased, the first displacement member 630 is likely to shake in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 40 (a)). The swing in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 approaches the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow X in FIG. 40 (c)) is the front base 620 (convex 626) of the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642). Although it can be regulated by contacting the top), the swing of the first displacement member 630 in the direction away from the front base 620 (in the direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40 (c)) cannot be regulated, and its own weight is as described above. Since it is bulky, it is likely to cause damage near the fulcrum. Therefore, a configuration in which the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress the forward swing (tilt) of the first displacement member 630 is particularly effective.

In this case, since the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 and is continuously provided in front of the front base 620, the rigidity of the protruding portion 628 can be increased. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 tilts forward (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40 (c)), the direction in which the tilt is supported (that is, the protruding portion 628 is the back surface of the first displacement member 630 and the front base 620. Since the rigidity in the direction of being sandwiched between the front surface and the front surface can be increased, the tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward can be effectively suppressed.

Next, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48. FIG. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. Further, FIG. 43 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the left rotation unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, the left rotation unit 700 is arranged so that the base body including the rear base 710 and the front base 720 and the base end side of the base body can be displaced on the front side of the front base 720. The first displacement member 730, the second displacement member 740 displaceably arranged on the tip side of the first displacement member 730, and the driving force for displaceting the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. A connecting member that connects the drive motor 750, which is arranged on the back surface of the rear base 710, the transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 750, and the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740. It mainly includes a connecting first member 760 and a connecting second member 770), and a cover body 780 that is laid down on the lower end side front surface of the front base 720.

A part of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 751, rack member 752, and second pinion 753) is housed between the facing surfaces of the back base 710 and the front base 720. On the back surface of the front base 720, a pair of insertion pins 722 to be inserted into the sliding groove 752a of the rack member 752 is provided so as to project in order to define the moving direction of the rack member 752.

Circular shaft support holes 723, 724, 725 are formed through the front base 720, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 and the transmission member 754 are formed in each of the shaft support holes 723, 724, 725. The rotary shaft 754a and the rotary shaft 761 of the connecting first member 760 are rotatably supported. Similarly, a front view circular shaft support hole 781 is formed through the cover body 780, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 781.

Further, a base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and a receiving recess 727 is recessed. The base-side engaging member 726 includes a base portion 726a erected from the front surface of the front base 720 and a bent portion 726b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 726a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. In the second displacement member 740, the engagement surfaces are formed so as to be engaged with each other with the displacement side engaging member 742 described later. As a result, as will be described later, the tilting of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720 in the forward direction can be suppressed (see FIG. 47).

The receiving recess 727 is a recess having a substantially rectangular shape in front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726, and is a recess of the bent portion 742b in the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740. By being formed with an opening area larger than the outer shape, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742 is formed so as to be acceptable. As a result, as will be described later, at the retracted position, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the front base 720 in the proximity direction can be allowed, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47 (c)).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 mounted on the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 are teeth. The rack member 752 is formed as a rack in which the rack gear to be combined is geared on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member.

The rack member 752 is provided with two sliding grooves 752a having a long hole shape in the front view extending along the longitudinal direction thereof, and a pair of insertion pins 722 of the front base 720 are inserted into each of the sliding grooves 752a. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a defined state. That is, the rack member 752 is held in a linear motion between the facing surfaces of the back base 710 and the front base 720.

The transmission member 754 includes a rotating shaft 754a projecting from the back surface on one end side, and a drive pin 754b projecting from the front surface on the other end side opposite to the rotating shaft 754a. By being inserted through the shaft support hole 724, the shaft is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. The drive pin 754b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a drive groove 762 described later in the first connecting member 760.

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750, the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 via the linear motion of the rack member 752. By rotating the second pinion 753, the transmission member 754 is rotated about the shaft support hole 724 of the front base 720 as the center of rotation.

When the transmission member 754 is rotated, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to drive the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770, as will be described later. .. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 via the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770. Can be displaced relative to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

The first displacement member 730 has a rotation shaft 731 projecting from one end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42) and a shaft on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 42) opposite to the rotation shaft 731. A support hole 732 is formed through the support hole 732, and an oval sliding groove 733 in front view is recessed on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, and a connecting pin 734 is projected. Further, an engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction and on the side of the shaft support hole 732.

As described above, the rotating shaft 731 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted into the shaft supporting hole 723 of the front base 720 and the shaft supporting hole 781 of the cover body 780, and the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is a shaft. By being inserted through the support holes 723 and 781, it is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. That is, the base end side of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780.

The shaft support hole 732 is a circular hole when viewed from the front, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740. The sliding groove 733 is a concave groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the end portion of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted. The connecting shaft 790 pivotally supports the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 so as to be relatively rotatable. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member 730 faces the front. It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

The connecting pin 734 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section inserted into the sliding groove 772 described later of the connecting second member 770, and is on an extension line extending the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 in the extending direction thereof. Is placed in. Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 are made to match. Can be done. That is, as will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the form of the relative displacement of the connecting second member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is defined as a linear motion (slide displacement). Can be done (see FIG. 45).

The engaged portion 735 is a portion formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 that projects to a position where it overlaps with the second displacement member 740 in the rear view. The side engaging member 742 (the engaging surface of the bent portion 742b) is formed so as to be engaged (see FIG. 48). As a result, as will be described later, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 48).

The second displacement member 740 is a flange member that is fastened and fixed to the end face of the rotary shaft 741 and the displacement side engaging portion 742 that protrude from the back surface thereof, the receiving recess 743 that is recessed in the back surface thereof, and the end face of the rotary shaft 741. 744 and.

As described above, the rotary shaft 741 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730, and the rotary shaft 741 is inserted into the shaft support hole 732 to form a first displacement member. The second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported on the distal end side of the 730 in the longitudinal direction. The flange member 744 is formed so that the base end side to be fastened and fixed to the rotary shaft 741 has a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 732, whereby the rotary shaft 741 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 732.

A connecting pin 744a is projected from the back surface of the flange member 744 at a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 741. The connecting pin 744a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a connecting groove 772 described later in the connecting second member 770. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is acted on by the connecting groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 to cause a second displacement. The member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

The displacement side engaging member 742 includes a base portion 742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. As described above, in the retracted position, the engaging surfaces are formed so as to be engaged with the displacement side engaging member 726 of the front base 720, and in the overhanging position, the first displacement member 730 is engaged. An engaging surface is formed so as to be engaged with the joint portion 735.

The receiving recess 743 is a recess having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742, and is based on the outer shape of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720. Is also formed to have a large opening area so that the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726 can be accepted. As a result, as will be described later, at the retracted position, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the front base 720 in the proximity direction can be allowed, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47 (c)).

A rotating shaft 761 is projected from the back surface of one end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42) of the first connecting member 760, and a sliding groove 762 is opened in a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, and the second connecting member 770 is formed. The connecting groove 771 and the sliding groove 772 are opened at one end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 42) and the central portion in the longitudinal direction, respectively.

The rotating shaft 761 of the connecting first member 760 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 725 of the front base 720, and the connecting groove 771 of the connecting second member 770 is connected to the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740. Pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction are pivotally supported by a connecting shaft 790 inserted into the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 so as to be relatively rotatable.

That is, one end side of the connecting first member 760 in the longitudinal direction is displaceably connected to the front base 720, and one end side of the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction is displaceably connected to the second displacement member 740. The connecting portion (connecting pin 790) between the other ends of the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730.

As a result, as will be described later, the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are first connected while enabling the relative displacement of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 and the relative displacement of the first displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720. It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 from being exposed at the overhanging position and impairing the appearance (see FIGS. 44 (c) and 45 c (c)).

As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted into the drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760, and the first displacement member 730 is inserted into the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770. Connecting pin 734 is inserted.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. 44 is a front view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIG. 45 is a front view of the left rotating unit 700 when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. Further, FIG. 46 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

Note that FIG. 44 shows a state in which the cover body 780 is omitted. In addition, FIG. 44 (a) is shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 46 (a), FIG. 44 (b) is shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (b), and FIG. 44 (c) is shown in FIG. It is in the same state as 45 (c) and FIG. 46 (c), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged in front of the front base 720. Will be set up.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (a)), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 is projected by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754. By being pushed in the direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with its rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation.

When the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to each other. When pushed in the overhanging direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)) by the 790, the first displacement member 730 has its rotation axis as shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b). It is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with 731 as the center of rotation.

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 770 in which the connecting first member 760 and the other ends are connected by the connecting shaft 790 is lowered (lower side in FIG. 46 (a)). ), And the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 771 of the connecting second member 770 pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, whereby FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730. ).

In this case, the connecting second member 770 has a connecting shaft 790 and a first displacement member 730 along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770. By sliding the connecting pins 734 of the above, linear motion (slide displacement) is performed along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (b)), and the connecting first member 760 is driven further. When rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46B) with the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 extends in the overhanging direction with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation, as in the case described above. (FIG. 46 (b) counterclockwise), and with respect to the first displacement member 730, the second displacement member 740 is in the first direction (FIG. 46 (b) clockwise) with its rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation. Relative displacement (relative rotation) to.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted and the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c). The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions, and a state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed.

Contrary to the above case, the transmission member 754 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (c)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c). When driven, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 is pushed in the retracting direction (right side in FIG. 46C) by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754, so that the connection first member 760 is moved. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46C) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation.

When the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the connecting shaft 790 that connects the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770. By pushing in the retracting direction (right side of FIG. 46 (c)), the first displacement member 730 moves the rotating shaft 731 as shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b). It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46C) as the center of rotation.

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 770 in which the connecting first member 760 and the other ends are connected by the connecting shaft 790 is moved upward (upper side in FIG. 46 (c)). It is pushed up, and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 pushes up the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, whereby FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and FIGS. As shown in 6 (b), the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730. ).

From the states shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)), and the connecting first member 760 is moved. When the rotation shaft 761 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46B) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 46 (b) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. 46 (b) clockwise), and the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with its rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation. It is displaced (relatively rotated).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the start end of the movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected and the first displacement member 730 is erected as shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a). The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and a state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized.

As described above, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 includes connecting members (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) for connecting the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the second displacement member 730 is displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the first displacement member 730 as the first displacement member 730 is displaced (rotated). ) Can be done.

In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is erected between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 is displaced in the direction in which the first displacement member 730 projects and is separated from the front base 720 (extension direction). Then, the connecting member is exposed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 and becomes visible to the player, so that the appearance is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members, a connecting first member 760 and a connecting second member 770, and one end of the connecting first member 760 in the longitudinal direction is connected to the front base 720. The other end of the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction is connected to the second displacement member 740, and the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and the connection thereof. Since the portion (connecting shaft 790) is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730, even if the first displacement member 730 is displaced from the front base 720 in the direction of being separated (overhanging direction), the connecting member (Connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

In this case, as described above, the connecting second member 770 is held by the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear motion (slide displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member The amount of displacement (rotation angle) at which the 730 is displaced (rotated) in the direction (overhanging direction) in which the 730 projects from the front base 720 and is separated from the front base 720 is large (that is, the displacement amount of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770). Even in the case of (need to be increased), it is possible to prevent the connecting second member 770 from being visually recognized by the player by maintaining the state of being hidden behind the first displacement member 730. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

Here, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 740 is provided with a light emitting body (not shown), and an electric connection line W for supplying electric power to the light emitting body is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See FIG. 45). In this case, the connecting line W is introduced from the opening formed in the back surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitting body. Therefore, the connecting line W is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. Therefore, when the connecting member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, the connecting member may interfere with each other and damage the connecting line W.

In this case, as described above, the connecting member (connecting second member 770) is arranged on the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear motion (slide displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. , It is possible to prevent the connecting second member 770 from interfering with the connecting line W. Therefore, even if a large space for wiring the connection line W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730) is not secured, interference with the connection second member 770 can be avoided. The space for arranging the line W can be reduced, and the front view shape (particularly, the dimension in the width direction) of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

Here, if the above-mentioned connecting members (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) are provided, the driving force of the drive motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730). Even in the case of providing a drive groove and connecting the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 to the drive groove), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can perform the same operation as described above. it can.

However, in the case of this configuration, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is increased in size. That is, the connecting member needs to connect the connecting portions of the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable. It is arranged between the facing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720. Therefore, when a drive groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove, the transmission member 754 and the connecting member (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) are connected. It is necessary to provide a drive groove in the first displacement member 730 at a position that does not overlap with the displacement locus of the connecting member in order to avoid the interference of the above. Therefore, it is necessary to make the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 a size (area) including both the displacement locus of the connecting member and the drive groove, and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is correspondingly large. Increase in size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive groove 762 is provided in the connection first member 760, and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to drive the drive motor 750. Is provided to the connecting first member 760, so that the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be miniaturized.

That is, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the transmission member 754 and the connecting member (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds only to the displacement locus of the connecting member. The size (area) may be set, and it is not necessary to set the size (area) including the drive groove. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

Next, the engaging action of the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 700 for explaining the engaging action of the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XLVIIa-XLVIIa of FIG. 45 (a). To do.

Note that FIG. 47 (a) shows a state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. The state in which the displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position is shown in the figure. Further, FIG. 47 (c) shows a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in a direction close to the front base 720 in FIG. 47 (b).

As described above, the base side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement side engaging member 742 is projected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and these base side engaging members 742 are projected. The engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 are arranged in a posture in which their open sides (tip side of the bent portion 726b) face each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracting direction (upper side of FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bent portions 726b of each other , 742b can be made to enter the inner surface side of the other bent portions 726b and 742b, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted positions as shown in FIG. 47 (b). And the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is erected between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement are located at a position relatively distant from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. The member 740 is connected by the connecting member. Therefore, in the retracted position, even if the first displacement member 730 tries to tilt the tip portion (that is, the second displacement member 740) opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in the direction (forward) away from the front base 720, the front surface. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the connecting member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740.

However, in the present embodiment, the longitudinal end of the connecting second member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, while the longitudinal end of the connecting first member 760 is relatively to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. It is connected to the front base 720 at a close position. Therefore, in the retracted position, the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 becomes the base end (fulcrum), and the tip portion on the opposite side of the rotating shaft 731 (that is, the second displacement member 740 side) becomes the free end. In this state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the upright posture. Therefore, the first displacement member 730 has a free end due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member 740 (the side opposite to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, that is, the second displacement member 740 side). ) Is easily tilted in the direction away from the front base 720 (front, right side in FIG. 47 (b)).

On the other hand, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged in the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the second displacement member is attached to the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720. Since the displacement side engaging member 742 of the 740 can be engaged, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) on the opposite side of the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is separated from the front base 720 (forward, It is possible to suppress tilting to the right side of FIG. 47 (b).

The displacement side engaging member 742 may be projected from the back surface of the first displacement member 730. However, in the present embodiment, the displacement side engaging member 742 is projected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Will be done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be set to a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. As a result, it is effective that the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 opposite to the rotation shaft 731 is tilted in the direction away from the front base 720 (front, right side in FIG. 47 (b)). Can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the displacement side engaging member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, the displacement side engaging member 742 is located at a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member It becomes easily affected by the shaking of the 730 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 47), and the positional relationship between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, it becomes difficult to engage the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement side engaging member 742 is second as the engaging surface on the inner surface of the bent portion 742b moves from the tip end side of the bent portion 742b toward the proximal end side (base portion 742a side). It is formed so as to be inclined in a direction close to the back surface of the displacement member 740. As a result, the distance between the engaging surface and the back surface of the second displacement member 740 can be widened on the receiving side of the displacement side engaging member 742 (the tip end side of the bent portion 742b, the upper side in FIG. 47 (a)). Even if shaking occurs when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be easily engaged with each other. ..

In this way, while facilitating the engagement between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, when these engagements are started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are retracted. As the displacement toward the base side, the second displacement member 740 is brought closer to the front base 720 side (left side in FIG. 47 (b)) as the engaging surface of the base side engaging member 742 (bent portion 742b) is tilted. be able to.

As a result, at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 separate their tip portions (second displacement member 740 side) from the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. Not only can it be suppressed from tilting in the direction (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)), but also the protrusion dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720 can be suppressed, and the front base 720 due to the tilt can be suppressed. Due to the proximity of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are accompanied by a slight elastic deformation as a whole, and the front base of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 is utilized by utilizing the elastic recovery force. It is possible to suppress rattling with respect to the 720 and stably maintain the posture in the stopped state.

On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are directed toward the front base 720 with the tip portion (second displacement member 740 side) of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum with the rotation shaft 731 as a fulcrum (forward). , It is permissible to tilt to the left side of FIG. 47 (b)). In this case, the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are plate-like bodies bent in a substantially O-shaped cross section, and when tilted, the back or front base of the second displacement member 740. When it collides with the front of the 720, it is deformed in the bending direction, so there is a high risk of breaking.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the receiving recesses 727 and 743 for receiving the bent portions 726b and 742b of the other party are recessed in the front surface of the front base 720 and the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Since the opening is formed, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted in the direction close to the front base 720 (front, left side in FIG. 47 (b)). When this is done, the bent portions 726b and 742b of the other party can be accepted by the receiving recessed portions 727 and 743. As a result, breakage due to collision between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be suppressed.

At the time of the above-mentioned tilting, the back surface of the connecting second member 770 facing parallel to the front surface of the front base 720 collides with the front surface in a surface-to-plane manner over the entire surface, thus reducing the surface pressure at the time of collision. Can be (distributed). Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

48 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa portion of FIG. 45 (c), and FIG. 48 (b) is the direction of the arrow XLVIIIb of FIG. 48 (a). It is a side view of the 1st displacement member 730 and the 2nd displacement member 740 in view.

As described above, when the left rotation unit 700 is shifted from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the first displacement member 730 is overhanging and the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730. Is relatively displaced (rotated) about its rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c)).

As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), according to the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions (FIG. 45 (c)). (See), the engaging surface of the displacement side engaging member 742 (bending portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730, whereby the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are engaged. Can be combined with. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 740 from rattling with respect to the first displacement member 730 at the overhanging position.

In particular, since the engaging surface of the displacement side engaging member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed by the inclination. It can be displaced in a direction close to each other. Therefore, at the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

Further, in addition to the role of engaging the displacement side engaging member 742 with the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 at the retracted position and coupling the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720, the second displacement member 742 is at the overhanging position. Since the second displacement member 740 can be combined with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730 to be coupled to the first displacement member 730, the parts for both of these roles can be individually provided. It is not necessary to provide it, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. 51 (a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51 (b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51 (c) is a top view of the winning device 65.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 in the line LIIa-LIia of FIG. 51, and FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are shown in FIG. 52 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic view of the winning apparatus 65 in the line LIIIa-LIIIa and the line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 52 (b).

In FIG. 51, the opening / closing plate 860 is not shown, and in FIG. 53, the guide rib 813a is not shown. Further, FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superposed on the back side of the front base 810, and a back base 830 superposed on the back side of the intermediate base 820. A seesaw member 840 and a driven member 850 arranged between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening / closing plate 860 for opening and closing the winning opening 65a are mainly provided.

The winning device 65 is formed in a box shape having an internal space by the front base 810, the front base 820, and the back base 830, and a guide passage through which the winning ball is guided from the winning opening 65a is formed in the internal space. It is formed so that the weight of the game ball acts on the seesaw member 840 when the game ball passes through the guide passage.

The seesaw member 840 forms a first state in which one end side (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered and the other end side (other end decorative portion 843) is raised in a state where the weight of the game ball is not applied (FIG. 52 (a)), when the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side, a second state is formed in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered (see FIG. 52 (b)).

That is, the winning device 65 makes the seesaw member 840 alternately appear in the first state and the second state by utilizing the weight of the game ball passing through the guide passage, and one end side (one end decoration) of the seesaw member 840. The effect of displacing the body 853) and the other end side (the other end side decorative body 843) up and down is formed operably.

Here, as will be described later, the seesaw member 840 is made larger in the length dimension of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 than the length dimension of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting one end side and the other end side thereof. To. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass continuously, the game balls are likely to stay on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is likely to be maintained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls pass continuously, the weight of the game balls prevents the seesaw member 840 from remaining in the second state, and the first state and the second state. It is configured so that the effect of alternately appearing and can be surely executed. Hereinafter, the configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such an effect will be described.

The front base 810 includes a front board 811 forming the front surface thereof, a front first side wall 812, a front second side wall 813, a front first bottom wall 814, and a front second bottom wall 815 protruding from the back surface of the front board 811. And mainly prepare.

In the front base 810, recessed portions 811a and 811b formed by recessing the lower edge side thereof are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the width direction, and the seesaw member 840 is provided through the recessed portions 811a and 811b. And a part of the driven member 850 (one end side decorative portion 853 and the other end side decorative portion 843) is visibly exposed to the player.

The front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 are portions that form the side walls of the guide passage that guides the game ball, and are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval. The front first bottom wall 814 and the front second bottom wall 815 are portions that form the bottom wall of the guide passage, and are connected to the lower end side of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, respectively.

The open portion on the upper end side of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 facing each other is designated as a winning opening 65a, and the game ball flows into the guide passage from the opening portion (winning opening 65a). In this case, the front second side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 are inclined downward toward the front second bottom wall 815 and the front first bottom. The front second bottom wall 815 is arranged at a position lower than the wall 814. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a can be guided to the front second bottom wall 815 by the downward inclination of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814.

The front second bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815a that inclines downward toward a side away from the front substrate 811 (that is, the intermediate base 830 side). Therefore, the game ball guided by the front second bottom wall 815 rolls along the descending inclination of the guide bottom surface 815a and is guided to the guide passage (reception port 821b) of the intermediate base 830.

The guide ribs 813a are erected at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the front second side wall 813. The guide rib 813a is formed in a shape in which the height of the guide rib 813a is lowered from the front second side wall 813 as it is separated from the front base 811 so that the erecting tip surface thereof is an inclined surface. As a result, for example, when the ball flows into (falls) from the winning opening 65a into the guide passage, it collides with the front first side wall 812 and is bounced off, and as a result, the game ball advances to the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed. Even in this case, the game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide passage of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the vertical tip of the guide rib 813a.

The intermediate base 820 includes an intermediate substrate 821 that faces the front substrate 811 of the front base 810 at a predetermined interval, and an intermediate first side wall 822, an intermediate second side wall 823, and an intermediate bottom wall that protrude from the back surface of the intermediate substrate 821. 824 and mainly provided.

An opening / closing plate advancing / retreating port 821a, a receiving port 821b, a feeding port 821c, and a discharging port 821d are formed in the intermediate board 821, and a support shaft 821e and a bearing 821f are formed in front of the intermediate board 821. , The stopper portions 821g and 821h are projected.

The opening / closing plate advancing / retreating port 821a of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for allowing the opening / closing plate 860 to advance / retreat. When the opening 65a is closed and the opening / closing plate 860 is retracted (retracted) to the opening / closing opening 821a, the winning opening 65a is opened.

The receiving port 821b of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and the bottom surface of the opening. (Receiving bottom surface 821b1) is formed so as to be connected to the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815.

The delivery port 821c of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for sending the game ball from the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is the guide bottom surface 824a described later of the intermediate bottom wall 824. Is formed by. That is, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and is sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

The discharge port 821d of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825. The game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received in the discharge port 821d rolls on the discharge bottom wall 825 to a discharge passage (not shown) connected to the back side of the back base 830. Be sent out.

The support shaft 821e of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft-shaped body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840, and is inserted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The bearing 821f of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotating shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted through the bearing 821f.

The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate substrate 821 are portions for abutting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to regulate the rotation of the seesaw member 840, and the stopper portions 821g are on the other end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. The stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface (the surface opposite to the discharge surface 846), and the stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (the surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. Will be done.

The first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by restricting the rotation of the seesaw member 840 by the stopper portion 821h (see FIG. 52A), and the second state is that the rotation of the seesaw member 840 is a stopper. It is formed by being regulated by part 821g (see FIG. 52 (b)).

Here, as described above, the stopper portion 821g is formed at a position where it can come into contact with the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 opposite to the discharge surface 846, so that the discharge of the game ball can be stabilized. That is, when the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by the weight thereof, the stopper portion 821g supports the lower surface opposite to the discharge surface 846. Therefore, for example, the stopper portion 821h As compared with the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position close to the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface opposite to the inclined surface 845), the seesaw member 840 can suppress the shaking of the seesaw member 840 on the discharge surface 846 side. As a result, the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 can be stabilized.

The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 are portions that form the side walls of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side (the passage that guides the game ball received from the reception entrance 821b to the delivery port 821c), and are provided at predetermined intervals. They are arranged so as to face each other while being separated from each other. That is, the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 receive the game balls sent out from the guide passage on the front base 810 side along the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. The received game ball is guided toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 along a substantially vertical direction (FIG. 52 (a) vertical direction).

The intermediate bottom wall 824 is a portion forming the bottom wall of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and is connected to the lower end side of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, respectively. The intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a that inclines downward toward the outlet 821c side (that is, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). The game ball guided through the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and passes through the delivery port 821c in a substantially horizontal direction to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (FIG. It is sent out along 52 (a) left-right direction).

In this way, an intermediate bottom wall 824 (guide bottom surface 824a) is provided in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and the game ball that has rolled the guide bottom surface 824a is laterally laterally oriented to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. Since the game is guided from the side, the game balls can be guided one by one to the receiving surface 844, and a plurality of games can be played on the receiving surface 844 as in the case of dropping the game ball from above the receiving surface 844. It is possible to avoid stacking balls. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840.

Here, the extended length of the guide passage that guides the game ball along the substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side is twice the diameter of the game ball. It is preferably set as follows. In the present embodiment, the horizontal distance dimension L (see FIG. 52 (a)) from the extended tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the back wall 831 described later of the back base 830 is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Will be done. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

Further, the facing distance between the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 is set to the same size as the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the position of the game ball can be defined between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, the seesaw member 840 always rolls the guide bottom surface 824a and sends out the game ball from the delivery port 821c. It can be received by the receiving surface 844 (guided to the same position on the receiving surface 844).

In this case, the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed so that the height position of the descending inclined end end is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state (in the first state). See FIG. 53 (a)). As a result, as will be described later, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be performed promptly.

On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the descending inclination end is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53 (b)). As a result, as will be described later, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered by utilizing the step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the first state is formed. Can be made easier.

The back base 830 mainly includes a back wall 831, a discharge side wall 832, and a discharge ceiling wall 833. The back wall 831 is in contact with the rear end faces of the intermediate first side wall 822, the intermediate second side wall 823, and the intermediate bottom wall 824 of the intermediate base body 820 (that is, it is covered with the open portion on the back side). It is a part and forms a wall (back wall) on the back side of the guide passage.

The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 are portions that form the side wall and ceiling wall of the guide passage for guiding the game ball from the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown), and the discharge port 821d. It is extended along the outer edge of the. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the intermediate base 820, the discharge side wall 832 of the back base 830, and the discharge ceiling wall 833 is substantially the same as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. To. As a result, the width of the guide passage can be secured, so that a plurality of game balls can be smoothly guided. Further, even when the later game ball collides with the earlier game ball on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and is flipped up, the later game ball can be smoothly guided. Details will be described later.

The seesaw member 840 has a bearing 841 formed in a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connecting pin 842 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction, a other end decorative portion 843 formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction, and an upper surface thereof. It mainly includes a receiving surface 844, an inclined surface 845 and a discharge surface 846 to be formed, and a claw portion 847 erected on the discharge surface 846.

As described above, the bearing 841 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 821e projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted, and is a seesaw member via the support shaft 821e and the bearing 841. The 840 is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

The connecting pin 842 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connecting groove 852 described later of the driven member 850. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to the driven member 850. That is, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated with the support shaft 821e as the center of rotation, the connecting pin 842 acts on the connecting groove 852 to form a rotation centered on the rotation shaft 851 of the driven member 850. ..

The other end decorative portion 843 is a portion on which a design or the like is decorated on the front surface, and is visibly exposed to the player through the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810 as described above.

The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface-like portion in the guide passage of the intermediate base 820 that rolls the guide bottom surface 824a and receives the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c, and the inclined surface 845 has the receiving surface 844. It is a flat surface-like portion for rolling the received game ball to the discharge surface 846.

The receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 are in a no-load state (that is, the first state, see FIG. 52 (a)) in which the game ball is not placed on the seesaw member 840 regardless of the rotation position of the seesaw member 840. ), It is formed in a shape having a downward inclination toward the discharge surface 846. Therefore, in either the first state or the second state, the game ball received by the receiving surface 644 can be rolled from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 toward the discharge surface 646.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the receiving surface 844 is located on one end side (left side in FIG. 52 (a)) of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction with respect to the axial center of the bearing 841, the second state (the other end side is lowered). In a state where one end side is raised at the same time (see FIG. 52 (b)), when the receiving surface 844 receives the game ball, the weight of the received game ball causes the one end side (receiving surface 844 side) in the longitudinal direction to be raised. Can be lowered. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface portion for sending (discharging) the game ball from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820, and is from the front base 810 side to the intermediate base 820 side (FIG. 52 (b)). It is formed with a downward slope from the front side to the back side of the paper. Therefore, when the game ball is rolled to the discharge surface 846, the game ball can be rolled toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 due to the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846.

When the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, the claw portion 847 switches the rolling direction of the game ball toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. The guide surface 847a is provided as an inclined surface for guiding the contacted game ball toward the discharge port 821d. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 to quickly flow into the discharge port 821d. Therefore, as will be described later, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened to obtain the first state and the second state. Can be smoothly switched.

In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and is unevenly arranged on the side close to the front base 810 (opposite side to the discharge port 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840. Will be set up. As a result, as will be described later, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exposed surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, , The time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant, and as a result, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

The driven member 850 has a rotating shaft 851 projecting from the back surface of the driven member 850 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction, and a rotating shaft 851 that is juxtaposed below the rotating shaft 851 and has a long hole shape in front view on the back surface of the driven member 850. Mainly a connecting groove 852 that is recessed as a groove of the above, and a one-sided decorative portion 853 that is formed on the front surface of the driven member 850 and is visibly exposed to the player through the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810. Prepare for.

As described above, the rotating shaft 851 is a shaft-like body rotatably inserted into the bearing 821f projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820, and is a driven member 850 via the rotating shaft 851 and the bearing 821f. Is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

As described above, the connecting groove 852 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted, and the connecting pin 842 is slid along the extending direction of the connecting groove 852. , The driven member 850 is rotated with the rotation of the seesaw member 840.

When the seesaw member 840 is transitioned from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed up by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 is centered on the rotation shaft 851 in FIG. 52. (A) By rotating clockwise, the continuous acting member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is raised (see FIG. 52 (b)). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 transitions from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed down by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 is centered on the rotation shaft 851 in FIG. 52. (A) By rotating clockwise, the continuous acting member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered (see FIG. 52 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the link mechanism for connecting the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 to the connecting groove 852 of the driven member 850 and rotating the driven member 850 with the rotation of the seesaw member 840 is configured. The link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 with respect to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840. As a result, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) can be expanded, and the effect of the effect due to the displacement can be enhanced.

Here, since the seesaw member 840 can be rotated by utilizing the weight of the game ball, the transition from the first state to the second state can be easily performed at high speed and can be performed in a relatively short time. On the other hand, in the transition from the second state to the first state, the seesaw member 840 needs to be rotated only by its own weight, so that the operation is slow and the time is long. Transition from the second state to the first state in order to reliably switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840 when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage. It is necessary to promptly carry out.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the driven member 850 is connected to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, an external force that lowers the weight of the driven member 850 on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. (That is, it can be used as an auxiliary force for transitioning from the second state to the first state). As a result, the time required for the transition from the second state to the first state can be shortened, and as a result, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the seesaw member 840th. It is possible to facilitate alternating switching between the first state and the second state.

Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be described. When the game ball flows into the guide passage on the front base 810 side from the winning opening 65a, the game ball is collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and rolls on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. By doing so, the guide is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (to the right in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)), and flows from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side.

The game ball that has flowed into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side is in a substantially vertical direction between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 (downward in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)). Guided to reach the intermediate bottom wall 824. The guide direction of the game ball that has reached the intermediate bottom wall 824 is switched. That is, the game ball is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (to the left in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)) by rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and the intermediate base 820 is fed. It is sent out from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives the game ball on its receiving surface 844, the game ball rolls the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the discharge surface 846. The seesaw member 840 is moved by the weight of the game ball, and the seesaw member 840 is rotated clockwise with the rotation shaft 841 as the center of rotation (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is lowered). As shown in 52 (b), a second state is formed. However, in FIG. 52B, the illustration of the game ball is omitted.

When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 and a no-load state is formed in which the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotation shaft 841 due to its own weight. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the first state is formed by being rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52 (b) as the center (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised). The seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

In this case, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is lowered in the second state (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side)) due to the weight of the game balls. There is a risk that the first state and the second state cannot be switched alternately.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the seesaw member 840 has its receiving surface 844 located on one end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 52 (b)) with respect to the rotation shaft 841. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives the game ball on its receiving surface 844, the weight of the game ball supported by the receiving surface 844 can lower one end side in the longitudinal direction. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52 (b) with the rotation shaft 841 as the center of rotation (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised), and is shown in FIG. 52 (b). A second state can be formed (easily formed). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the guide passages for guiding the game balls are formed in the internal spaces of the front base 810, the intermediate base 820, and the back base 830, a plurality of game balls can be generated from the winning opening 65a. Even in the case of continuous inflow, a plurality of game balls can be stored by using the guide passage, and the plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. it can.

However, even when a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are sequentially guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in this way, the game balls are the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. In the form of being guided by falling from above the seesaw member 840, these plurality of game balls are likely to be stacked on the receiving surface 844, and the rolling of the game balls from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 is hindered. It is not possible to switch between the first state and the second state of the above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) having a guide bottom surface 824a extending in a substantially horizontal direction and rolling a game ball on the terminal side (outlet 821b side) of the guide passage. ) Is formed, and the game ball that has rolled the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the substantially horizontal direction (FIG. 53 (a) and FIG. 5 (b) left-right direction). Can be done. As a result, the game balls can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the receiving surface 844 can receive the game balls one by one from the horizontal passage). It is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being stacked vertically on the receiving surface 844. Therefore, the seesaw member 840 can be easily switched between the first state and the second state.

In this case, as described above, the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side runs the game ball along the substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52A) between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. A horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected to the downstream side of the passage (upstream passage), and the length of the horizontal passage is shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

That is, the extending length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (in the present embodiment, the extending tip to the back surface of the guide bottom surface 824a). The horizontal distance dimension L to the back wall 831 described later of the base 830 is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball), and only one game ball can be present in such a horizontal passage. , Since the extension direction of the horizontal passage and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different, when a ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. The time required for inflow to the horizontal passage can be increased by the amount of the change of direction.

Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball (next game ball) after the upstream passage changes direction. It takes time to flow into the horizontal passage, and after that, the game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. That is, the later game ball is separated from the earlier game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (b) and 53 (b), the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is above the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) in the second state. Since it is located, a step in the height direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53B) can be formed between the receiving surface 844 and the guide bottom surface 824a. As a result, in the second state, when the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is rolled to guide the game ball to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball is made to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collision with the step). The seesaw member 840's receiving surface 844 can be easily lowered (moved downward in FIG. 53 (b)) by utilizing this riding operation (collision). That is, one end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction can be easily lowered, and the first state can be easily formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the first state can be easily formed. It is possible to easily switch between the state and the second state alternately.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a)), the seesaw member 840 is in a no-load state, and the guide bottom surface of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is in a no-load state. The game ball guided from the 824a and received on the receiving surface 844 is quickly rolled toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846, and the weight of the game ball is applied to act on the other end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. It is required to lower (form a second state).

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a), the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is in the first state from the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). Is also located below, so it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collision with the step) as in the case of the second state described above, and it is possible to avoid a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly rolled from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 side to facilitate the formation of the second state.

In this first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed so as to be at the same height position (equal surface position) as the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). It is preferable to do so. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located below the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, the game ball is dropped from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844, so that the game ball bounces and the amount of the game ball bounces. This is because a time lag occurs and the load on the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 increases due to the impact of dropping, but these can be eliminated if they are at the same height position.

Next, the claw portion 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 52 (b).

As shown in FIG. 54, a claw portion 847 is erected on the seesaw member 840 from its discharge surface 846. The claw portion 847 includes a guide surface 847a formed so as to be inclined so as to approach the discharge port 821d from the inclined surface 825 side toward the other end decorative portion 843 side. As a result, when the game ball rolls along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (left-right direction in FIG. 54) on the discharge surface 846 toward the other end decorative portion 843 side (right side in FIG. 54), the game ball is rolled. Can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847, and the rolling direction thereof can be switched to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 (upper part of FIG. 54). The time on which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, the first state and the second state can be switched alternately. It can be done smoothly.

In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the other end decorative portion 843 side, the right side in FIG. 54) on the discharge surface 846, and the width direction of the seesaw member 840 ( In the vertical direction of FIG. 54), the arrangement is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side of FIG. 54). As a result, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exposed surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the second state is set). The formed time) can be easily made constant, and as a result, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

That is, in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 54), the game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54) is the discharge port. The distance to the discharge port 821d is long, and the game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821d, the upper side in FIG. 54) has a short distance to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, by arranging the claw portion 847 unevenly in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54), the claw portion 847 is close to the front base 810. The former game ball, which rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side (lower side in FIG. 54), collides with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 at an early stage and discharges from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, while the intermediate base. For the latter game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the 820 (upper side in FIG. 54), the collision of the claw portion 847 with the guide surface 847a can be delayed or prevented from colliding. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the total time during which the game ball is rolling on the discharge surface 846 can be brought close to the same. As a result, even when the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the game ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily kept constant.

Next, the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a schematic rear view of the winning device 65, where FIG. 55 (a) is the first state shown in FIG. 52 (a) and FIG. 55 (b) is the second state shown in FIG. 52 (b). Corresponds to each.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the width dimension of the discharge port 821d (the left-right dimension of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) is larger than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is set to a large size (approximately 2.5 times in this embodiment). As a result, with the previous game ball present on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) of the seesaw member 840, the next game ball is further moved to the other end side in the longitudinal direction. Even when the ball is rolled toward, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

For example, the rear game ball collides with the destination game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846, and the rear game ball is bounced back to the side opposite to the rolling direction (that is, the distance between the two game balls (FIG. 55). (A) and the left-right distance in FIG. 55 (b) are expanded in the width direction of the discharge port 821d), and even when each of these game balls is discharged to the discharge port 821d, the width dimension of the discharge port 821 is sufficient. By being secured in, each can flow smoothly.

Further, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d (vertical dimension of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) is a height dimension on the inclined surface 845 side rather than a height dimension on the discharge surface 846 side of the seesaw member 840. Is set to a larger dimension. As a result, the next game ball is further on the other end side in the longitudinal direction while the previous game ball is present on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) of the seesaw member 840. Even when the ball is rolled toward, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

That is, the rear game ball collides with the destination game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846, and the rear game ball is bounced upward or is bounced back to the side opposite to the rolling direction and is an inclined surface. Even when the ball is flipped upward by the 845, the rear game ball can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821 by utilizing the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the inclined surface 845 side. On the other hand, even if the earlier game ball collides with the later game ball, it is difficult to be flipped up. Therefore, by keeping the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the discharge surface 846 side low, the space required for the discharge port 821d It is possible to secure a space for arranging other members by that amount.

Next, the gaming area will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13 in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the center frame 86 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the game board 13, nails, windmills, inner rails 61, outer rails 62, various winning openings (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86, and the like are assembled to a wooden base plate 60. As described above, the area on the front surface of the game board 13 defined by the inner rail 12 is defined as the game area (the area where nails, winning openings, etc. are arranged and the fired ball flows down). Rail.

An opening is formed in the center of the game board 13, so that the third symbol display device 81, which is a display device, can be visually recognized. In this case, conventionally, the opening of the game board 13 is made larger than the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81, and the effect device is displaceably arranged on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) by that amount. A visible area is secured. However, since it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the game board 13.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center frame 86 to be built in the opening of the game board 13 (opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed from a light-transmitting material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter referred to as “center frame 86”) is formed. A "region forming portion R") forms a part of the gaming region. As a result, the effect device (in the present embodiment, the left rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized through the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 (through the watermark). Therefore, it is possible to increase the visible area of the left rotation unit 700 while securing the area for the ball to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, the illustration of the left rotation unit 700 which is visually recognized through the region forming portion R is omitted.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed so that the inner edge thereof reaches the outer edge of the game area (that is, the inner rail 61). The area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized can be secured as much as possible through the area forming portion R of 86.

On the other hand, since the width dimension of the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 is set to a size that allows the passage of only one game ball, the region forming portion R is formed through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, the region is formed). The area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized can be secured as much as possible without going through the portion R).

Hereinafter, the detailed configuration of the region forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the region forming portion R. Further, FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R in the LX-LX line of FIG. 59. In FIG. 60, the left rotation unit 700 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 58, the center frame 86 is erected from the back surface of the frame plate base portion 910 formed in the shape of a front view frame and the frame plate base portion 910, and is fitted inside the opening 60a of the base plate 60. It mainly includes a fitting wall portion 920 and an inner edge defining wall portion 930 that is erected from the front surface of the frame base portion 910 that is opposite to the inner fitting wall portion 920 and defines the inner edge of the game area.

The frame plate base portion 910 is a portion superimposed on the front surface of the base plate 60, and the front surface side thereof is a region on which the game ball flows down. The frame plate base 910 is provided with insertion holes 911 at a plurality of locations for inserting tapping screws for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60. Further, the outer edge of the frame plate base portion 910 is formed so as to be inclined downward so as to be smoothly connected to the front surface of the base plate 60. Due to this inclination, the rolling of the game ball can be made smooth.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, a columnar portion 940, a side wall portion 950, and a downstream wall portion 960 are erected from the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 in the region forming portion R of the center frame 86.

The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially rhombic cross section, and is arranged at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). As a result, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, the first path M1 is partitioned between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and the second path M1 is partitioned between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is partitioned.

The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion juxtaposed with the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940, and partitions the third path M3 between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. In this case, the portion of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 facing the side wall portion 950 is closer to the inner rail 61 side than the portion facing the columnar body 940.

As a result, the downstream side of the second path M2 is formed by bending toward the inner rail 61 side (side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first path M1 and the third path M3 are paths formed along the inner rail 61, they are connected to each other in a substantially linear shape. Further, the first path M1 and the third path M3 are formed as linear paths that allow the sphere to flow down in an inclined direction in the front view.

A concave groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910. The concave groove 971 is a portion for suppressing the flow velocity of the game ball, is formed as a concave portion having an inverted triangular cross section, and is repeatedly bent left and right like a saw blade in the front view, and the first path M1 and the first path M1 and the first. It extends along the path direction of the three paths M3.

Protrusions 972 are projected from the side surface portions 950 and the inner edge defining wall portions 930 so as to face each other. The protrusion 972 is a portion for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball, is formed in a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the erection direction of both wall portions 930 and 950. Each of these protrusions 972 is arranged at a position shifted in phase from the bent portion of the concave groove 971 along the path direction of the third path M3.

The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream end portion of the side wall portion 950, and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. Specifically, it is formed as a wall portion substantially orthogonal to the flow direction of the third path M3. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 has a portion corresponding to the downstream wall portion 940 formed along the downstream wall portion 960, whereby a fourth portion is formed between the inner edge defining wall portion 930 and the downstream wall portion 940. Route M4 is partitioned.

The width dimension of the first path M1 (opposite distance between the inner rail 61 and the columnar body 640), the width dimension of the second path M2 (opposite distance between the columnar body 640 and the inner edge defined wall portion 930), the width of the third path M3. Only a game ball having a dimension (opposite distance between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge regulation wall portion 930) and a width dimension of the fourth path M4 (opposite distance between the downstream wall portion 960 and the inner edge regulation wall portion 930) can pass through. Each is set to the width dimension. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball.

Next, the action of the region forming portion R thus formed on the flowing game ball will be described. The game ball guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flowing down from the upper area of the game area is bounced off by a nail or rolled along the inner edge regulation wall portion 930, and then the first path M1 or the first path M1 or the first. It flows into the region forming portion R from any of the two paths M2. The game ball that passes through the first path M1 or the second path M2 and flows down the third path M3 is collided with the downstream wall portion 960 and flows down to the lower region of the game area via the fourth path M4.

Here, since the region forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is formed of a resin material, nails cannot be planted. Therefore, the flow speed of the flowing game ball cannot be reduced, and it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the flowing game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected on the downstream side of the third path M3 (the confluence portion between the third path M3 and the fourth path M4) in the region forming portion R. The collision with the downstream wall portion 960 can reduce the flow speed of the game ball so that the player can easily see the flow ball.

In this case, since the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, is integrally formed with the center frame 86, it can be easily molded by resin molding with a mold, and the downstream wall portion 960 can be formed. It is not necessary to perform complicated work such as forming the above as a separate component and fastening and fixing it to the frame plate substrate 910. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, the third path M3 is formed in a straight line, and the flow speed of the game ball becomes relatively high. When the portion where the game ball repeatedly collides is borne by the downstream wall portion 960 formed of the resin material. , There is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall portion 960 is connected to the downstream side of the side wall portion 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased, and damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

In this case, an inclined surface 961 inclined toward the fourth path M4 is formed at the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960. As a result, the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 can be formed into a triangular shape in front view as shown in FIG. 59, so that the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased accordingly.

Further, when the game ball flowing down the third path M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960 after colliding with the inclined surface 961, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing in the direction of backflow through the third path M3. , The flow can be made to flow toward the outlet of the third path M3 while reducing the flow speed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced. Therefore, from this point as well, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

The side wall portion 950 is also a portion integrally formed with the center frame 86 and can be easily molded by resin molding with a mold. Therefore, as in the case of the downstream wall portion 960, the side wall portion 950 is formed as a separate part. It is not necessary to perform complicated work such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, since the side wall portion 950 having the role of partitioning the third path M3 can also serve to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be done.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the mode in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the inner rail 61 is that the gaming ball collides with the nail and then bounces, so that the speed is relatively slow and this collision occurs. It was unlikely that the inner rail 61 would be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) is directly visible through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, without the region forming portion R). In order to secure the maximum, the width of the region forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in the present embodiment, the width dimension that allows the passage of only the game ball in which the third path M3 is 1). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming portion R. Therefore, on the upstream side of the region forming portion R, it is necessary to significantly change the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed down the game region (in the present embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In such a form, a part of the game ball (the game ball flowing down the second path M2) collides with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage to the inner rail 61 (bending due to the collision). ..

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is arranged in parallel with the inner rail 61, the game ball flowing down the second path M2 is received by the side wall portion 950 and collides with the inner rail 61. It can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inner rail 61 from being damaged (bending due to collision).

That is, it is conceivable that the side wall portion 750 is not formed and the inner rail 61 also serves to partition the third path M3, but in this case, it is necessary to avoid the collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, on the upstream side of the region forming portion R, the width cannot be narrowed, and the opening (inner edge defining wall portion 930) of the center frame 86 must be arranged in a direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be directly viewed is reduced by that amount. Therefore, the present embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61 results in maximizing the area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be directly viewed.

As described above, since the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light transmitting material, the side wall portion 750 is formed from the light emitting body on the back side of the center frame 86 (side wall portion 950, recessed groove 971 and the like). It can function as a light guide body that guides the emitted light P to the game area. For example, the light P emitted from the back surface side and introduced into the side wall portion 950 is guided to the standing end surface (upper surface of FIG. 60) of the side wall portion 950 and irradiated from the standing end surface. Not only can the effect of the illuminated light P be exhibited, but the light P guided to the side surface of the side wall portion 950 (the surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930) is irradiated from the side surface of the side wall portion 950. can do. As a result, the light P is guided to the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 (upper side surface of FIG. 60) and the side surface of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (the surface facing the side wall portion 950), and the game is performed together with the light P emitted from the upper surface or the side surface. It is possible to exert the effect of the light P that illuminates the area where the ball rolls (the game ball when the game ball rolls).

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the back surface side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is emitted from the inner rail 61 side (inner edge regulation wall). Leakage from the side surface of the portion 930 (opposite side to the portion 930) to the outside can be reduced by the inner rail 61. That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the upright end face or the side surface (the side surface on the side facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, the amount of light that can be emitted from the standing end surface or the side surface of the side wall portion 950 can be increased, and as a result, the effect of the guided light P can be enhanced.

The light emitting body is arranged in the left rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the left rotation unit 700 is the back surface of the region forming portion R. Therefore, in the state where the left rotation unit 700 is arranged in the retracted position, the light P emitted from the light emitting body is guided through the side wall portion 950 while making the left rotation unit 700 visible through the region forming portion R. After making it visible to the player. That is, the shape of the left rotation unit 700 visually recognized via the region forming portion R can be associated with the light P emitted from the standing end surface of the side wall portion 950, and the player can visually recognize the light P. The effect of light P can be enhanced.

Here, as described above, protrusions 972 are projected from the facing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930, respectively. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be made to collide with the protrusion 972 to prevent the flow down. As a result, in the region forming portion R where the nail cannot be planted, the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball.

In this case, the protrusion 972 protruding from the side wall portion 950 and the protrusion 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are arranged so as to be out of phase with each other along the path direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a staggered pattern on the left and right facing surfaces. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be alternately collided with the left and right protrusions 972 to meander the game ball to the left and right. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down, and a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction (path direction of the third path M3) is given to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. Can be done.

Further, as described above, a concave groove 971 formed in a front view saw blade shape is recessed on the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be guided along the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meander to the left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easier to slow down the flow speed of the game ball, and also imparts a displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the flow direction (path direction of the third path M3) to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. Can be given.

Further, when the light emitted from the back surface side of the region forming portion R is guided toward the front surface of the game region, the light is diffused or collected in the concave groove 971 recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910. Since it can be used as a lens to illuminate, it is possible to enhance the effect of the guided light.

In this case, the bent portion of the concave groove 971 has a phase with respect to the protrusion 972 protruding from the side wall portion 950 and the protrusion 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 along the path direction of the third path M3. Are arranged in a staggered manner. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball that is guided by the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meanders to the left and right can be easily collided with the left and right protrusions 972 alternately. A synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of 971 and the action of protrusion 972. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be made slower, and the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

Since the protrusions 972 and the concave groove 971 slow down the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the third path M3, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed and the game from the third path M3 to the fourth path M4 can be suppressed. Contributes to smooth guidance of the ball.

Further, the terminal side of the concave groove 971 (the portion juxtaposed with the inclined surface 961) overlaps the downstream wall portion 960 in the extension direction and directs the exit of the third path M3. As a result, the game ball guided to the terminal side of the concave groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing in the direction of backflow of the third path M3, and it is possible to make the game ball flow down toward the outlet of the third path M3 while reducing its flow velocity. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 2013 in the second embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to substantially the uppermost part of the game area with respect to the game board 13 in the first embodiment. As a result, the directing device (in this embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) is directly connected through the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, not through the region forming portion R). The visible area can be further expanded as compared with the case of the first embodiment.

In the region forming member R, the formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is extended along the outer rail 62. As a result, the fifth path M5 and the sixth path M6 are partitioned between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 in the region above the return ball prevention member 68.

The facing distance between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is set to a dimension larger than twice and smaller than three times the diameter of the game ball. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the center frame 2086 is formed with passages (fifth path M5 and sixth path M6) through which the game balls can pass each other without colliding with each other between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930. The above-mentioned area where the effect device can be directly visually recognized through the opening can be secured to the maximum.

Further, the rotation shaft of the wind turbine WM is arranged substantially at the center between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 facing each other. As a result, the game ball can pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotating shaft of the wind turbine WM, and between the rotating shaft of the wind turbine WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930.

According to the region forming portion R formed in this way, the game ball launched from the ball launching unit and guided to the upper region of the game region by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is guided along the outer rail 62. As a result, after passing through the wind turbine WM, the vehicle is moved on the fifth route M5. In this case, by setting the firing intensity to a value larger than the reference value, the game ball can flow down to the right region beyond the upper top of the gaming area, while the firing intensity is set to a value smaller than the reference value. By doing so, the game ball can flow down (move the sixth path M6) along the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 without crossing the upper top of the game area. The game ball that has moved on the sixth path M6 passes through the wind turbine WM and then flows down to the third path M3.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. In the right-handed rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, a case where two members, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement member 642), can be displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 654 will be described. However, the clockwise rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment has three members, the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642), and the third displacement member 3660, as the transmission member 654 is displaced. Is displaceable. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 3600. In addition, in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, a state in which a part (rear base 610 and front base 620) of the right rotation unit 3600 is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right-handed rotating unit 3600 in the third embodiment has a third displacement member 3660 displaced so as to be slidable in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 62) of the first displacement member 3630. Be prepared. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3461) is the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. The driven member 3641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the third displacement member 3660 can be displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 (slide displacement). ..

The through groove 3636 is a groove-shaped opening formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the support shaft 632, and the groove width is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461. Will be done. Therefore, by displace the connecting pin 3461d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the driven member 3641 is allowed to rotate around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630.

The connecting pin 3461d is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the through groove 3636, and the projecting height thereof is set to a dimension that allows the first displacement member 3630 to project from the front surface. That is, in the assembled state, the tip end side of the connecting pin 3461d can be inserted into the sliding groove 3661 described later of the third displacement member 3660 via the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630.

A sliding groove 3661 is recessed on the back surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3662 is arranged above the sliding groove 3661. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a concave groove into which the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width, and the groove width is formed into a linear groove. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461.

The slide rail 3662 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660, and the back side rail fixed to the first displacement member 3630 and the back side thereof. It consists of a front rail that is connected so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible on the front side of the rail. By expanding and contracting the slide rail 3662 due to the relative displacement of the back rail and the front rail in the longitudinal direction, the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630.

When the third displacement member 3660 is arranged on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a part of the sliding groove 3661 is overlapped with the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (with the sliding groove 3661). (Crossed with through groove 3636). Therefore, the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630, and the connecting pin 3461d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636 to displace the connecting pin 3641d of the third displacement member. The third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 of the 3660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 by the connecting pin 3461d).

Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. 64 and 65 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 3600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 66 and 67 show the operation between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 3600 in each state at the time of carrying out.

It should be noted that FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c) are shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), and FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) are shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (FIG. 67). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 64 (c) is the same as FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 66 (c) is the same as FIG. 67 (a).

Here, in the third embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, whereby the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 3630 are slid. Where each of the 3660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), at the retracted position, the slide rail 3662 of the third displacement member 3660 is in a shortened state, and the connecting pin of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640. The 3461d is located on one end side of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (the end on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, on the right side in FIG. 66 (a)). In this case, the length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip end of the third displacement member 3660 is the dimension h1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 66 (a)), the states shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 66 (b) are passed, and then FIGS. 64 (c) and FIG. As shown in 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 3630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 3660. Therefore, since the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide in the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 3630. Be displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c) and 66 (a) to 66 (c), the length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip end of the third displacement member 3660. Is maintained at dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), the first displacement member 3630 is moved to FIG. 67 (a). While being maintained in the state (position) shown, the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, and the states shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b) are displayed. After that, it is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 65 (c) and 67 (c).

In this case, where the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3461 causes the connecting pin 3461d to be on the other end side (support shaft) of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660. The rotation is in the direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) of sliding toward 632 and the end portion on the side close to the shaft support hole 641a (left side in FIG. 67 (a)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. The slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed up in the extending direction. As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) and FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c), the third displacement member is the third. The length from the base end of the 1 displacement member 3630 to the tip end of the 3rd displacement member 3660 is changed (increased) from the dimension h1 to the dimension h3 via the dimension h2 (h1 <h2 <h3).

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 65 (c) and 67 (c), the first displacement occurs. While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 67 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 in the opposite direction, and FIG. After passing through the states shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b), they are arranged in the states shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 3461d to be connected to one end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a). The rotation is in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (c)) of sliding the unit toward the right side in FIG. 67 (c).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the lower side in FIG. Since the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed down in the shortening direction, the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the third displacement member 3660 is displaced from the base end of the first displacement member 3630. The length to the tip is shortened to the dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 moves the rotation shaft 631. It is rotated in the upright direction as a rotation axis and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3461 is the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660. The second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are integrally displaced together with the first displacement member 3630.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 3660 are not displaced. A form in which the third displacement member 3660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 and the first displacement member 3630 are maintained in a stopped state while the first displacement member 3630 is maintained in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the third displacement member 3660 is individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 65 and 67).

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described, but the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment is the first. The third displacement member 4660 is rotatable with respect to the first displacement member 4630. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 4600. In addition, in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, a state in which a part (rear base 610 and front base 620) of the right rotation unit 4600 is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably supported on one end side (upper side of FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. .. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3461d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. The driven member 3461 is relatively rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630, so that the third displacement member 4660 can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

A sliding groove 4661 is recessed on the back surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotating shaft 4662 is projected above the sliding groove 4661. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove into which the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width, and the groove width is formed into a linear groove. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461.

The rotating shaft 4662 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted into a shaft support hole 4637 formed on one end side (upper side of FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630, and is inserted through the rotating shaft 4662 and the shaft support hole 4637. The third displacement member 4660 is rotatably supported by the first displacement member 4630. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the rotating shaft 4662, whereby the rotating shaft 4662 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 4637.

In a state where the third displacement member 4660 is arranged (axially supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a part of the sliding groove 4661 is overlapped with the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding). The moving groove 4661 and the through groove 3636 intersect). Therefore, the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630, and the connecting pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636 to displace the connecting pin 3641d as the third displacement member. The third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the 4660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 by the connecting pin 3461d).

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. 70 and 71 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 72 and 73 operate between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 4600 in each state at the time of carrying out.

It should be noted that FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (c) are shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c), and FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) are shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (FIG. 73). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 70 (c) is the same as FIG. 71 (a), and FIG. 72 (c) is the same as FIG. 73 (a).

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, whereby the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 4630 are slid. Where each of the 4660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a), at the retracted position, the virtual line L1 passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotary shaft 4662) and is along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630. The angle formed by the virtual line L2 that passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotary shaft 4662) and along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is defined as the intersection angle θ1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 72 (a)), the states shown in FIGS. 70 (b) and 72 (b) are passed through the states shown in FIGS. 70 (b) and 72 (b). As shown in 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 4660, and the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3461 in the second displacement member 3640 is the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. The third displacement member 4660 is also displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 because it does not slide. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (c) and 72 (a) to 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line) The angle formed with L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 73 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 73 (a), the first displacement member 4630 moves to FIG. 73 (a). While being maintained in the state (position) shown, the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the states shown in FIGS. 71 (b) and 73 (b) are displayed. After that, it is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 73 (c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3461 is the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (on the traveling direction side of the connecting pin 3461d). The inner wall surface (upper side in FIG. 73A) is in the direction of being pushed up by the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461.

As a result, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) and 73 (a) to 73 (c). , The angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is changed (decreased) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3 < θ2 <θ1).

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 73 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 73 (c), the first displacement occurs. While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 73 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630 in the opposite direction, and FIG. After passing through the states shown in FIGS. 71 (b) and 73 (b), they are arranged in the states shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 73 (a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3461 around the support shaft 632 is the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (inner wall surface on the traveling direction side of the connecting pin 3461d, lower side in FIG. 73 (c)). ) Is in the direction of being pushed down by the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angles formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) intersect. It is increased to the angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 moves the rotation shaft 631. It is rotated in the upright direction as a rotation axis and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3461 is the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. The second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced. A form in which the third displacement member 4660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the third displacement member 4660 is individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 71 and 73).

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described, but the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment is the first. The third displacement member 5660 can appear and disappear in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 5600. In addition, in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, a state in which a part (rear base 610 and front base 620) of the right rotation unit 5600 is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the clockwise rotation unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment, the third displacement member 5660 is located in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 74) of the first displacement member 5630 in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. 76 (for example, FIG. 76). a) Arranged so that it can appear and disappear in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d of the second displacement member 5640 (driven member 5461) is the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. The third displacement member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 (in the front-rear direction) by being in contact with the back surface of the 5663 and rotating the driven member 5641 relative to the first displacement member 5630. Can be infested).

A pair of sliding holes 5638 are formed in the first displacement member 5630. The sliding hole 5638 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the sliding guide rod 5664 described later of the third displacement member 5660 is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sliding guide rod 5664. To. That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is slidably supported along the drilling direction of the sliding hole 5638, whereby the third displacement member 5660 is supported so as to be able to appear and disappear in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. Will be done.

The connecting pin 5641d is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the through groove 3636, and the tip is set to a protrusion height located in the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is brought into contact with the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 in the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630.

A sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are projected from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660. As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-shaped portion on which the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5461 is slid, and the back surface on which the connecting pin 5641d is slid is from one end (right side in FIG. 75). It is formed as an inclined surface that inclines upward toward the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the protruding height of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d slides on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from one end toward the other end (or in the opposite direction) with the rotation of the driven member 5641, the driven member is driven. The distance between the 5641 and the third displacement member 5660 is increased (reduced).

Here, the plate thickness of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is set to a dimension slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636, and the rear view shape is formed into a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the protruding tip side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 in a state where it can slide in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 appears and disappears in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630, not only the sliding guide rod 5664 but also the sliding inclined portion 5663 slides the third displacement member 5660. Since the motion can be supported (that is, supported at three places), it is possible to suppress the third displacement member 5660 from tilting forward and stabilize its infestation motion.

As described above, the sliding guide rod 5664 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is slidably supported by the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding hole 5638 is provided on the end surface in the axial direction. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the sliding guide rod C is fastened and fixed, thereby restricting the sliding guide rod 5664 from coming out of the sliding hole 5638.

In this case, the urging member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in a state of being elastically compressed (a state in which the total length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the force member S acts in the direction of separating the holding body C from the back surface of the first displacement member 5630. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is urged in a direction close to the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636.

Therefore, the driven member 5641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630, and the connecting pin 5641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, so that the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is displaced. 3 Act on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the displacement member 5660 (slide the connecting pin 5641d along the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663), and move the third displacement member 5660 back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630. It can be infested in the direction.

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. 76 and 77 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 78 and 79 are operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state at the time of carrying out. 80 and 81 are top views of the right-handed rotating unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

It should be noted that FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c) are shown in FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), 80 (a) to 80 (c), and 77 (a) to 77 (c). ) Are in the same state as FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (c) and 81 (a) to 81 (c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 76 (c) is the same as FIG. 77 (a), FIG. 78 (c) is FIG. 79 (a), and FIG. 80 (c) is FIG. 81 (a). is there.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, so that the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member Where each of the 5660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a) and 80 (a), in the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is set to be in a state of being close to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640. The connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 in FIG. 78 (a) is one end side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the end portion on the side where the protrusion height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is low). ) And the right side of FIG. 80 (a)). In this case, the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is defined as the dimension J1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 78 (a)), the states shown in FIGS. 76 (b), 78 (b) and 80 (b) are passed through the states shown in FIG. As shown in 76 (c), 78 (c) and 80 (c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 5630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 5660. Therefore, since the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5461 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660, the third displacement member 5660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 5630. Is displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), and FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), the third displacement member 5660 is the third displacement member. 1 It is maintained in a state closest to the displacement member 5630 (a state in which the protrusion amount is dimension J1).

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a) and 81 (a), the first displacement member 5630 is moved. While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (a), the second displacement member 5640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77 (b) and 79 (B) After passing through the states shown in FIGS. 77 (b) and 81 (b), they are arranged at the overhang positions shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c).

In this case, when the driven member 5641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5641 causes the tip of the connecting pin 5641d to be moved to the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660. The direction of sliding toward the end side (the end on the side where the protrusion height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is high, the upper left side in FIG. 79 (a), and the left side in FIG. 81 (a)) (FIG. 79 (a). ) Counterclockwise) rotation.

Therefore, the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (upper side in FIG. 81 (a)) by the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is projected forward with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c), 79 (a) to 79 (c) and 81 (a). In the section shown in FIG. 81 (c), the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is changed (increased) from the dimension J1 to the dimension J3 via the dimension J2 (J1). <J2 <J3).

Contrary to the above case, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 79 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (c), the second displacement member 5640 (connecting displacement member 642) is relative to the first displacement member 5630 in the opposite direction. After being displaced and undergoing the states shown in FIGS. 77 (b), 79 (b) and 81 (b), they are placed in the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a) and 81 (a). Displacement.

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 5641 about the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 5641d to protrude from the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660). The rotation is in the direction of sliding (clockwise in FIG. 79 (c)) at the end on the lower side, the lower right side in FIG. 79 (c), and the right side in FIG. 81 (c).

Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d is moved to one end side of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is retracted (immersed) to the rear (rear side) by that amount. Is allowed, the elastic recovery force of the urging member S causes the third displacement member 5660 to be brought closer to the first displacement member 5630, from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660. The amount of protrusion is shortened to the dimension J1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 76 (c), 78 (c) and 80 (c), the first displacement member The 5630 is rotated in the upright direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and is arranged at the retracted positions shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a), and 80 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, so that the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5461 is a sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660. Since the back surface of the 5663 is not slid, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are integrally displaced together with the first displacement member 5630.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member 5660 are not displaced. A form in which the third displacement member 5660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 76, 78 and 81) and a second displacement with respect to the first displacement member 5630 while maintaining the first displacement member 5630 in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 77, 79 and 81). In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid interference with the displacement in other adjacent units, and the movable range in such other units can be increased. Can be secured. Further, by projecting the third displacement member 5660 forward, the third displacement member 5660 can be brought closer to the player, and a powerful effect can be performed.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the period in which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced and the period in which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced coincide with each other has been described. In the clockwise rotation unit 6600, the period in which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced and the period in which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced are different. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 6600. In addition, in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, a state in which a part (rear base 610 and front base 620) of the right rotation unit 6600 is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the right-handed rotating unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment has a third displacement member in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 82) of the first displacement member 4630, as in the case of the fourth embodiment. The 4660 is rotatably supported, and the driven member 6641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the second displacement member 6640 (connecting displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are first displaced. It is displaced (rotated) relative to the member 4630.

In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed in a straight line, whereas the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 in the sixth embodiment is the working section 6641c1 as described later. It is formed by bending from the non-interfering section 6641c2 in a shape of abbreviated front view.

As a result, while the connecting pin 643 passes through the working section 6641c1, both the second displacement member 6640 (connecting displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630, while the connecting pin. During the period when 643 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is stopped.

The connecting groove 6641c is a groove-shaped opening through which the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted, and has an action section 6641c1 extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 6641. It is curved in an arc shape with the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) side concave and extends along the width direction of the driven member 6641 (that is, a shape that divides the annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631). It is provided with a non-interference section 6641c2 (formed in).

As will be described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that acts on the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642, and the non-interference section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. 84 and 85 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 86 and 87 show the operation between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 6600 in each state at the time of carrying out.

It should be noted that FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) are shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c), and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) are shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (Fig. 87). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 84 (c) is the same as FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 86 (c) is the same as FIG. 87 (a).

Here, the right-handed rotating unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment has substantially no other configuration except that the shape of the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is different from that of the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment. Since they are formed to be the same, the description of the same part will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 86 (a)) from the retracted positions shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 86 (a), the above is described. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the working section 635a of the first groove 635, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (driven member 6641) with respect to the first displacement member 4630 is not formed. , The second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630.

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) and 86 (a) to 86 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line) is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above. The angle formed by L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

In the state shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 87 (a), the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is the starting end of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 (the working section 6641c and the non-interfering section 6641c2. It is located at the end opposite to the connection portion (on the right side in FIG. 87 (a)). In this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is located at the connecting portion of the working section 635a and the non-interfering section 635b of the first groove 635.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 87 (a), the first displacement member 4630 is moved to FIG. 87 (a). While being maintained in the indicated state (position), the driven member 6641 whose inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 87 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 presses the support shaft 632. It is rotated in the direction of raising the connecting groove 6641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (b)) as the center.

Due to the rotation of the driven member 6641, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1 while sliding on the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b (clockwise in FIG. 87 (a)). As a result, the connecting pin 643 reaches the connecting portion of the working section 6641c1 and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b) (decorative portion 642b is lifted to the uppermost position). State) is formed.

In this case, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the same side (left side of FIG. 87 (b)) as the decorative portion 642b (that is, the position of the center of gravity of the connecting displacement member 642) with respect to the shaft support hole 642a. The connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed so that the inner wall surface of the non-interfering section 6641c2 can support the connecting pin 643 from below. That is, the non-interference section 6641c2 is formed as a surface whose inner wall surface intersects with the moving direction of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 rotates around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight at a predetermined angle. Will be done.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), the inner wall surface of the non-interfering section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 from below (regulates the movement of the connecting pin 643), thereby restricting the movement of the connecting displacement member. It is possible to regulate that 642 rotates about the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. That is, the connected displacement member 642 can be maintained in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

In the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), in the third displacement member 4660, as described above, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641. As a result, it is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes to the intersection angle θ2 ( Is reduced) (θ2 <θ1).

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), the inside of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 The wall surface is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line) The angle formed with L2) is changed (decreased) to the intersection angle θ3 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1).

In this case, since the non-interference section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c is curved in an arc shape centered on the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a), the driven member 6641 holds the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a). Even when rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (b) as the center, the inner wall surface of the non-interfering section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 from below, and the connecting displacement member 642 provides the shaft support hole 642a. Although the rotation is restricted by its own weight as the center, the connecting pin 643 is not pushed upward, and therefore the connecting displacement member 642 is not rotated in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation. That is, the connected displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the rotation of the third displacement member 4660 can be continued.

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the connected displacement member While the connecting pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interfering section 6641c2, the connecting displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c) (FIG. 85 (b)). And FIG. 87 (b)), while the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 passes through the working section 6641c1, the connecting pin 643 is pushed down by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1 to lower the decorative portion 642b. The connecting displacement member 642 is rotated in the direction around the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation.

The operation mode of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment formed in this way will be described with reference to FIG. 88 in comparison with the operation mode of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment.

88 (a) to 88 (c) are schematic front views of the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88 (d) to 88 (g) are right-handed rotating units in the sixth embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of 6600, and each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position is shown.

In the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630 and the first displacement member 4630 are not displaced. 2 Displacement member 3640 and third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (a form between FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b)), and the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (a form between FIGS. 88 (b) and 88 (c)). it can. In this case, in the latter form, the displacement period (start and end) of the second displacement member 3640 is substantially the same as the displacement period (start and end) of the third displacement member 4660.

On the other hand, in the right-handed rotating unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640, and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (FIGS. 88 (d) and 88 (e)). A form in which the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in a stopped state (FIG. 88). The form between (e) and FIG. 88 (f)) and the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640. Therefore, a form in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced (a form between FIG. 88 (f) and FIG. 88 (g)) can be formed.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement period (start and end) of the second displacement member 6640 and the displacement period (start and end) of the third displacement member 4660 can be made different. More specifically, while the displacements of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are started at the same time, the timing at which the displacements of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are stopped is shifted (second displacement member 6640). The displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped).

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. In the third embodiment, the case where the connecting displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaceably arranged in the first displacement member 3630 to form the right-handed rotation unit 3600 has been described, but in the seventh embodiment, the case has been described. In the clockwise rotation unit 7600, the third displacement member 7660 is displaceably arranged on the first displacement member 7630, and the connected displacement member 642 is displaceably arranged on the third displacement member 7660. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 7600. In addition, in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, a state in which a part (rear base 610 and front base 620) of the right rotation unit 7600 is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the right-handed rotating unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment, the third displacement member 7660 is rotatably supported in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 89) of the first displacement member 7630. , The connected displacement member 642 is rotatably supported by the third displacement member 7660. As will be described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated. Along with this, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of the center of rotation in a curved locus.

In the first displacement member 7630, a notch 7369 is formed at the edge on one end side (upper side of FIG. 90), and the space created by the notch 7369 is the support shaft 7665 of the third displacement member 7660, which will be described later. It is considered as the arrangement space of. A connecting groove 7641c is formed in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640. The connecting groove 7641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted.

The groove width of the connecting groove 7641c is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 643. Further, the total length (groove length) of the connecting groove 7641c is longer than that of the connecting groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. As a result, the relative displacement amount (relative rotation angle) of the connected displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be secured.

A support shaft 7665 is projected from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642, and the connection displacement member 642 is the third displacement member 7660 via the support shaft 7665 and the shaft support hole 642a. It is rotatably supported on the back of the.

A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 7665, thereby restricting the indicator shaft 7665 from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a. Further, the support shaft 7665 has a large diameter portion formed on the base side and a small diameter portion having a diameter smaller than that of the large diameter portion on the tip side, and the small diameter portion is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large diameter portion is a portion for raising the connecting displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660, and the raising of the large diameter portion causes the connecting displacement member 642 to be raised in the front-rear direction (for example, for example) with respect to the driven member 7641. , FIG. 91 (a) in the vertical direction of the paper surface) is set to be the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment.

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 7600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. 91 and 92 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 93 and 94 show the operation between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state at the time of carrying out.

It should be noted that FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) are shown in FIGS. 93 (a) to 93 (c), and FIGS. 92 (a) to 92 (c) are shown in FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (c). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 91 (c) is the same as FIG. 92 (a), and FIG. 93 (c) is the same as FIG. 94 (a).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, whereby the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640, and the third displacement member 7630 are slid. Where each of the 7660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 93 (a)) from the retracted positions shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 93 (a), the above is described. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the working section 635a of the first groove 635, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 7640 (driven member 7641) with respect to the first displacement member 7630 is not formed. , The second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 7630.

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) and 93 (a) to 93 (c), the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line) is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above. The angle formed by L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 94 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 94 (a), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is moved to the first groove 635. By passing through the non-interference section 635b of the above, the driven member 7641 rotates around the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a) while the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 94 (a). It is rotated in the direction of lifting the connecting groove 7641c and the connecting pin 3641d (counterclockwise in FIG. 94A).

As a result, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is formed by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed by the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 7641c of the driven member 7641. , Each is pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94 (a)).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, and the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual). The angle formed by the line L2) is changed (decreased) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 via the crossing angle θ2 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1), and the connecting displacement member 642 is attached to the support shaft 7665 (shaft support hole 642a). ) Is rotated in the clockwise direction in FIG. 94 (a), and the decorative portion 642b is lifted upward.

In this case, since the third displacement member 7660 is rotated in the direction of lifting the support shaft 7665 upward with the rotation shaft 4662 as the center of rotation, the rotation of the third displacement member 7660 is used to rotate the third displacement member 7660. The connecting displacement member 642 itself, which is pivotally supported by the support shaft 7665 of the above, can be lifted upward.

That is, according to the seventh embodiment, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 with the support shaft 7665 as the center of rotation, and the first displacement member 7630 has an arcuate locus. It can be displaced (lifted) upwards. As a result, the displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be linked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660 to form a more complicated embodiment, and the amount of protrusion of the decorative portion 642b upward (first). Crossing angle θ4, which is an angle formed by the virtual line L3 that passes through the axial center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and is along the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 64 with respect to the displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1)). Can be enlarged to give it a more upwardly protruding posture.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. In the first embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the outward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the overhang position to the retracted position. Although the case where the left rotation unit 700 is formed is described as described above, in the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the outward path and the return path. Is different. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotating unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotating unit 8700. Further, FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide unit 8773. In addition, in FIGS. 95 and 96, a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 8700 (rear base 710 and front base 720) is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the left rotation unit 8700 according to the eighth embodiment, a guide portion 8737 is recessed in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 95) in the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 8770. As will be described later, the guide portion 8737 is formed as a circumferential path, and the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8733, so that the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be different between the outward path and the return path.

The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that protrudes from the back surface of the flange member 8744 and is arranged eccentrically from the axial center of the rotating shaft 741, and its diameter is slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. By setting it to a small size, it can be moved along the guide portion 8773. An elastic body (not shown) made of a coil spring is housed in the connecting second member 8770 in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body connects the connecting pin 8744a to the connecting second member 8770. It acts in the direction of protruding from the back of the. Therefore, when the connecting pin 8744a moves along the guide portion 8773, the state in which the tip of the connecting pin 8744a is in contact with the bottom surface of the guide portion 8737 is maintained.

The guide portion 8737 is a concave groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section for guiding the connecting pin 8744a, is formed as a circumferential path, and has a plurality of steps (first to third steps 8737h to 8737j) in the path. Is formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

Specifically, the guide portion 8773 extends in a substantially straight line in front view along the width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 97) of the connecting second member 8770 starting from the position P1. A first groove 8737a and a second member connected to the end of the first groove 8737a and extending in a substantially straight line in front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction of FIG. 97) of the connecting second member 8770 starting from the position P2. It is connected to the end of the two grooves 8737b and the second groove 8737b, and is extended while being curved in an arc shape (in this embodiment, an arc shape that is convex in the direction away from the position P2) starting from the position P3. The end is formed from a third groove 8737c whose end is connected to the start end of the first groove 8737a.

A first step 8737h is formed at the connecting portion between the first groove 8737a and the second groove 8737b. The first step 8737h has a bottom surface on the start end side (position P2) of the second groove 8737b lower than the bottom surface on the end side of the first groove 8737a (located on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 97). It is a vertical plane that connects them. As a result, the movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8737a to the start end of the second groove 8737b is allowed, while the movement of the connection pin 8744a from the start end of the second groove 8737b to the end of the first groove 8737a is the second. It can be regulated by one step of 8773h.

Similarly, a second step 8737i and a third step 8737j are formed at the connecting portion between the second groove 8737b and the third groove 8737c and the connecting portion between the third groove 8737c and the first groove 8737a, respectively. The bottom surface of the second step 8737i on the start end side (position P3) of the third groove 8737c is made lower than the bottom surface of the end side of the second groove 8737b, so that the third step 8737j is on the start end side of the first groove 8737a. The bottom surface of (position P1) is formed lower than the bottom surface of the third groove 8737c on the terminal side.

As a result, the connection pin 8744a is allowed to move from the end of the second groove 8737b (third groove 8737c) to the start end of the third groove 8737c (first groove 8737a), while the third groove 8737c (first groove 8737a) is allowed to move. The movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the start end to the end of the second groove 8737b (third groove 8737c) can be regulated by the second step 8737i (third step 8737j).

That is, the connecting pin 8744a is only allowed to orbitally move the guide portion 8733 in the order of the first groove 8737a, the second groove 8737b, and the third groove 8737c along the directions of the arrows L1, the arrow L2, and the arrow L3. ..

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides (presses the inner wall surface) the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to form the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. Where the 8770 and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced, respectively, the mode of displacement of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 8770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101.

98 and 99 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position, and FIGS. 100 and 101 are from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the outbound route.

As shown in FIGS. 98A and 100A, at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged in front of the front base 720.

In this case, it passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741), the virtual line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741). The angle formed by the virtual line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle α1. Further, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is located at the position P1 (starting end of the first groove 8737a) of the guide portion 8737 (see FIG. 97), and the connecting second member 8770 is at the uppermost position (upper side of FIG. 100 (a)). ) Is pushed up.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is rotated around the rotation shaft 761 in the extension direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (a)). By being rotated in the (rotational) direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 8770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 101 (a)), and the guide portion 8737 (first) of the connecting second member 8770 is pulled downward. The inner wall surface of the groove 8737a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P1 guides the guide portion 8737 along the first groove 8737a. Guided in the direction of arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 100 (a)). Relative displacement (relative rotation) to (rotation), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α1 to the intersection angle α2. (Α1 <α2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), the connecting first member is similarly driven as described above. When the 760 is rotated in the extension direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the extension direction (FIG. 100 (b)) with the rotation axis 731 as the center of rotation. ) It is rotated counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 8770 is further pulled downward (lower right side in FIG. 101 (b)), and the guide portion 8737 of the connecting second member 8770 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8737a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a guides the guide portion 8737 along the first groove 8737a in the direction of arrow L1. Further guidance (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 100 (b)). Further relative displacement (relative rotation) to (rotation), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α2 to the intersection angle α3. ) (Α1 <α2 <α3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement is as shown in FIGS. 99 (b) and 101 (b). A state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the member 730 is formed. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided by the guide portion 8737 in the direction of the arrow L1 along the first groove 8737a, passes through the first step 8737h (jumps off), and then abuts on the inner wall surface of the second groove 8737b. , Positioned at position P2 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1 <α2 <α3). <Α4).

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the evacuation position will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105.

102 and 103 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhang position to the evacuation position, and FIGS. 104 and 105 are from the overhang position to the evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the return path. Note that FIG. 98 (a) is the same as FIG. 103 (b), and FIG. 99 (b) is the same as FIG. 102 (a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b). ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 104 (a), at the overhanging position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is located at the position P2 of the guide portion 8737 (the starting end of the second groove 8737b) ( (See FIG. 97), the connecting second member 8770 is in a state of being pulled to the lowermost position (lower right side in FIG. 104 (a)).

Contrary to the above case (outward route shown in FIGS. 98 to 101), the transmission member 754 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 104 (a). When it is rotationally driven to rotate), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 rotates the rotation shaft 731. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (upright) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104 (a)), and the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P2 is moved to the guide portion. 8737 is guided along the second groove 8737b in the direction of arrow L2 (see FIG. 97). In this case, as described above, the second groove 8737b is extended along the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 8770, and the relative displacement of the connecting second member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the longitudinal length of each other. It is a linear motion (slide displacement) in the direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8737b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member 730. Relative displacement (relative rotation) centered on the rotation shaft 741 of 740 is not formed. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), the first connection is performed as in the above case. The member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (b)) with the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (clock 104 (b)) with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation. It is rotated in a clockwise direction, and is further rotated (standing) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104 (b)), so that the connecting pin 8744a secondly pushes the guide portion 8737. It is further guided in the direction of arrow L2 along the groove 8737b, passes through (jumps off) the second step 8737i, and then abuts on the inner wall surface of the third groove 8737c to be positioned at position P3 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8737b, a relative displacement (relative rotation) around the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. Will be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is maximally erected and the first displacement is as shown in FIGS. 103 (b) and 105 (b). A state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the connecting second member 8770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, so that the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the third groove 8737c in the direction of arrow L3 and passes through the third step 8737j (). After (jumping down), it is positioned (returned) to the position P1 by hitting the inner wall surface of the first groove 8737a (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the outward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. ) Can be the same, while the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be different.

Specifically, on the outward path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is the displacement of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. While gradually increasing in proportion to the amount (rotation amount), on the return path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. While doing so, it is possible to form an embodiment in which the displacement is made toward the retracted position and the intersection angle α4 is reduced to the intersecting angle α1 in a short time immediately before being placed at the retracted position.

Further, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the grooves 8737a to 8737c of the guide portion 8773, even when the transmission member 754 (first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, the transmission member 754a is rotationally driven (displaced). The rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path in which the concave groove having a U-shaped cross section is continuous in an endless manner has been described. However, in the guide portion 9773 in the ninth embodiment, the connecting pin 744a is used. It is formed as an opening to be loosely fitted. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 106 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotating unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotating unit 9700. Note that FIGS. 106 and 107 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 9700 (rear base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, in the left rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment, a guide portion 9773 is formed with an opening on one end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side of FIG. 106) of the connecting second member 9770. As will be described later, the form of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is changed between the outward path and the return path by displacement of the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 in the guide portion 9773. can do.

The guide portion 9733 is connected to the first inner wall 9737a extending substantially linearly in the front view along the width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) of the connecting second member 9770 and the end of the first inner wall 9737a. A second inner wall 9737b extending in a substantially straight line in front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction of FIG. 106) of the connecting second member 9770, and being connected to the end of the second inner wall 9737b and having an arc shape. (In the present embodiment, an arc shape that is convex in the direction away from the connecting portion of the first inner wall 9737a and the second inner wall 9973b) is extended while being curved, and the end thereof is connected to the start end of the first inner wall 9973a. The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening to be the inner wall surface.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides (presses the inner wall surface) the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to form the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. Where the 9770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are displaced, respectively, the mode of displacement between the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 9770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described.

108 and 109 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 110 and 111 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the outbound route.

As shown in FIGS. 108 (a) and 110 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged in front of the front base 720.

In this case, it passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741), the virtual line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741). The angle formed by the virtual line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle β1. Further, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is located at the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9737a) of the first inner wall 9737a and the third inner wall 9737c of the guide portion 9733, and the connecting second member 9770 is at the uppermost position (FIG. It is in a state of being pushed up to 110 (a) upper side).

Further, the center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of action of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is the axial view of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the figure). In the state of 110 (a)), the side opposite to the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 110 (a)) passing through the center of gravity of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) and sandwiching the vertical line Z parallel to the direction of gravity. ) Is located.

Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lifting the connecting pin 744a upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110A) with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation. As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744a comes into contact with (presses) the first inner wall 9737a of the guide portion 9737.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is rotated around the rotation shaft 761 in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)). By being rotated in the (rotational) direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 9770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 110 (a)), and the inner wall surface of the guide portion 9737 of the connecting second member 9770 is pulled downward. (1st inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a directs the guide portion 9773 toward the second inner wall 9737b along the first inner wall 9737a. You will be guided in the direction.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 110 (a)). Relative displacement (relative rotation) to (rotation), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β1 to the intersection angle β2. (Β1 <β2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), the connecting first member is similarly driven as described above. When the 760 is rotated in the overhang direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (b)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhang direction (FIG. 110 (b)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. ) It is rotated counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 9770 is further pulled downward (lower right side in FIG. 110 (b)), and the guide portion 9737 of the connecting second member 9770 is further drawn. The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a guides the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9737a to the second inner wall 9737b. You will be further guided in the direction of.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 110 (b)). Further relative displacement (relative rotation) to (rotation), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β2 to the intersection angle β3. ) (Β1 <β2 <β3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement is as shown in FIGS. 109 (b) and 111 (b). A state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the member 730 is formed. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided by the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9737b, so that the connecting portion (second inner wall) of the first inner wall 9973a and the second inner wall 9973b is abutted. It is located at the beginning of 9737b). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle β3 to the intersection angle β4 (β1 <β2 <β3). <Β4).

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the evacuation position will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115.

112 and 113 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhang position to the evacuation position, and FIGS. 114 and 115 are from the overhang position to the evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the return path. Note that FIG. 112 (a) is the same as FIG. 109 (b), and FIG. 113 (b) is the same as FIG. 108 (a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b). ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 114 (a), at the overhanging position, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is a connecting portion (the first) of the first inner wall 9737a and the second inner wall 9737b of the guide portion 9733. 2 Located at the starting end of the inner wall 9737b), the connecting second member 9770 is in a state of being pulled to the lowermost position (lower right side in FIG. 114 (a)).

Further, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is connected to the connecting pin 744a with respect to the vertical line Z in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state shown in FIG. 114 (a)). It is located on the same side (right side in FIG. 114 (a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of pushing down the connecting pin 744a (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation. As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744a comes into contact with (presses) the second inner wall 9737b of the guide portion 9737.

From this state, contrary to the case described above (outward route shown in FIGS. 108 to 111), the transmission member 754 is in the opposite direction (FIG. 114 (Fig. 114)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 114 (a). a) When it is rotationally driven (counterclockwise), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 is moved. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (upright) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 9770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 114A). As described above, the connecting pin 744a is in a state of being abutted (pressed) against the second inner wall 9737b of the guide portion 9733 as the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight. It is guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9973c along the second inner wall 9973b.

In this case, as described above, the second inner wall 9737b is extended along the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 9770, and the relative displacement of the connecting second member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the longitudinal length of each other. It is a linear motion (slide displacement) in the direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730. Relative displacement (relative rotation) around the center of rotation is not formed. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), the first connection is obtained as in the above case. The member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114 (b)) with the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (clocked in FIG. 114 (b)) with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation. It is rotated in a clockwise direction, and is further rotated (standing) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 114 (b)), so that the connecting pin 744a secondly pushes the guide portion 9773. Further guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9973c along the inner wall 9973b and abutting against the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9737c, the connection portion between the second inner wall 9973b and the third inner wall 9973c (the starting end of the third inner wall 9973c) is reached. Be located.

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, a relative displacement (relative rotation) around the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4. Will be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is maximally erected and the first displacement is as shown in FIGS. 113 (b) and 115 (b). A state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the connecting second member 9770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, so that the connecting pin 744a is guided along the third inner wall 9737c toward the first inner wall 9737a, and the connecting pin 744a is guided toward the first inner wall 9737a. By abutting against the inner wall surface of the above, it is positioned (returned) to the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9737a) of the first inner wall 9973a and the third inner wall 9973c. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

In the present embodiment, when the state shown in FIG. 115 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 115 (b), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z, so that the second displacement member 740 is used. , Can be rotated prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770.

Specifically, in a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the same side as the connecting pin 744a (on the right side in FIG. 115 (a)) with respect to the vertical line Z, the second displacement member 740 is Since the connecting pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9737c by rotation due to its own weight, it gradually rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 115 (a) as the connecting second member 9770 is pushed upward (synchronically). On the other hand, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the opposite side of the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 115 (a)) beyond the vertical line Z due to this rotation, the second displacement member 740 Is rotated in the direction of lifting the connecting pin 744a upward by its own weight. That is, it is rotated prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the outward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. While the modes can be the same, not only can the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 be different, but on the return path, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement can be different. The angle formed by the member 740 (virtual line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the intersection angle β4, and immediately before being placed at the retracted position, the intersection angle β4 is changed to the intersection angle β1 at high speed (short time). A mode of reduction can be formed.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment is different from the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment only in that it includes a cage 10746, and has the same configuration other than that, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic rear view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment, and shows a state in which the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the vertical line Z. As shown in FIG. 116, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment, a cage 10746 is arranged on the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Here, the cage 10746 will be described with reference to FIG. 117.

117 (a) is a front view of the cage 10746, FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage 10746 in the CXVIIb-CXVIIb line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 117 (c) is a sectional view of the cage 10746. It is sectional drawing of the cage 10746 in the CXVIIc-CXVIIc line of FIG. 117 (a).

As shown in FIG. 117, the cage 10746 is formed in a tubular shape having an internal space having a circular cross section, and a predetermined heavy object is displaceably stored in the internal space. In the present embodiment, a predetermined heavy object is a liquid LQ, and about 1/3 of the volume of the internal space is filled with the liquid LQ. Therefore, the liquid LQ can be displaced to one end side or the other end side (right side or left side in FIG. 117C) of the cage 10746 in the longitudinal direction according to the inclination of the cage 10746 (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

It will be described back to FIG. 116. The cage 10746 has a posture (horizontal posture) in which the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z in the axial direction (that is, the state of FIG. 116) of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732). It is arranged on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740.

Therefore, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation, the cage 10746 in the horizontal posture is in an inclined posture in which the one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction is positioned downward. , The stored heavy object (liquid LQ) is displaced to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction (that is, the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

As a result, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated about the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation, the second displacement member 740 and the cage 10746 are integrated as a member as compared with the case where the cage 10746 is not arranged. It is possible to increase the amount of change in the position of the center of mass (center of gravity G') when it is regarded as.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. 118 and 119 are schematic rear views of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 120 and 121 are from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating a return path toward.

As shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member thereof is rotated. When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the 730, the cage 10746 is tilted according to the rotation position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space thereof is applied. The cage 10746 can be displaced to one end or the other end in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, the position of the center of gravity G'of the second displacement member 740 and the cage 10746 can be arranged at a position farther from the vertical line Z as compared with the case where the cage 10746 is not arranged.

Therefore, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9737c of the guide portion 9733, the rotation of the second displacement member 740 using the center of gravity G'is ensured by its own weight, and the connecting pin 744a is Can be easily maintained in a state of being in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9737c. As a result, the rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed, and the relative displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in the section where the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770, the center of gravity G'can be used to ensure the advance of the second displacement member 740. As a result, the rotation from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (shorter time) immediately before being placed in the retracted position.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. In the first embodiment, a case where a relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in both the outward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the overhang position to the retracted position will be described. However, in the counterclockwise rotating unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only in the outward path, not in the return path. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 shows a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 11700 (rear base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the second displacement member 740 and the connecting second member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism including a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774. In this case, as will be described later, since the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch, the linear motion of the connecting second member 11770 is converted into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740 on the outward path, while the connecting second member is converted on the return path. By restricting the conversion of the linear motion of the member 11770 into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be formed only on the outward path.

The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch in which a roller and a spring are interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring. The rotating shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 is fastened and fixed to the inner ring, and the rack gear 11774 is attached to the outer circumference of the outer ring. A gear to be meshed with is engraved. In this case, the pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of the second displacement member 740, while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

The rack gear 11774 is a gear engraved on the side surface of the second connecting member 11770, and is meshed with the pinion gear 11747. The engraving range of the rack gear 11774 is a range in which the meshing with the pinion gear 11747 is released when the connecting second member 11770 is pulled to the maximum downward (see FIGS. 126 (b) and 129). ).

An urging spring SP formed as a metal torsional spring is interposed between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. In the urging spring SP, the arm extending from one end of the coil portion is locked to the first displacement member 730 in a state where the coil portion is fitted onto the rotating shaft 741 and elastically twisted and deformed. An arm extending from the other end of the coil portion is locked to the second displacement member 740, and its elastic recovery force is applied to the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). It acts in the direction of maintaining the angle formed by the crossing angle γ1.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130.

Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides (presses the inner wall surface) the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to form the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. Where the 11770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are displaced, respectively, the mode of displacement between the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 11770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126.

123 and 124 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are directed from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the outbound route.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 125 (a), at the retracted position, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is an intersection angle. It is set to γ1. In this case, the connecting second member 11770 is in a state of being pushed up to the uppermost position (upper side in FIG. 125 (a)).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 125 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is rotated around the rotation shaft 761 in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 125 (a)). By being rotated in the (rotational) direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a) through the states shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 11770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 125 (a)), so that the rack gear 11774 of the connecting second member 11770 is a pinion gear. 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125 (a). The rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is defined as the rotation in the direction of transmitting the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, after going through the states shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b), as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a), the second displacement member 740 is the urging spring SP (see FIG. 122). ) Is elastically deformed in the twisting direction and is rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased. It is changed (increased) from the crossing angle γ1 to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1 <γ2 <γ3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is projected to the maximum as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), and the first displacement member The 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhang position.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), when the connecting second member 11770 is pulled to the lowermost position, the meshing of the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 is released. As a result, the second displacement member 740 receives the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP (see FIG. 122) and returns to the initial position. That is, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the evacuation position will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130.

127 and 128 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhang position to the evacuation position, and FIGS. 129 and 130 are from the overhang position to the evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the return path. Note that FIG. 127 (a) is the same as FIG. 124 (b), and FIG. 128 (b) is the same as FIG. 123 (a).

Here, the rotation position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b) is the same as the rotation position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b). ..

Contrary to the above case (outward route shown in FIGS. 123 to 126), the transmission member 754 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 127 (a) and 129 (a). When it is rotationally driven to rotate), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 rotates the rotation shaft 731. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 goes through the states shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 128 (a) and 129 (b) and 130 (a), and then goes through the states shown in FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b). ), It is placed (standing) in the retracted position.

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 129 (a)), so that FIG. 127 (b) and FIG. 129 (b) show. As shown, the rack gear 11774 is meshed with the pinion gear 11747, and the connecting second member 11770 is pushed further upward, so that the rack gear 11774 rotates the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129 (b). The rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is defined as the rotation in the direction of cutting the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, the displacement position shown in FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b) is changed from the state shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a). In the section until the second displacement member 740 is arranged in, the second displacement member 740 is not rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, and the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) The angle formed by is maintained at the intersection angle γ1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the outward path, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (tilted) in the projecting direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member 730 is tilted with respect to the first displacement member 730. 2 The displacement members 740 are gradually displaced relative to each other, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3. At the overhang position, a displacement mode that changes to the intersection angle γ1 is formed, but on the return path, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed (that is, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line). (While maintaining the angle formed by the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) at the intersection angle γ1), the first displacement member 730 rotates (stands up) in the retracting direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. It is possible to form a displacement mode.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of being projected from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engaging member 12726 in the twelfth embodiment is the front base 12720. It is arranged so that it can appear and disappear in front of. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 131 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 12700 according to the twelfth embodiment. 132 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 12720 in line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, in the left rotation unit 12700 according to the twelfth embodiment, the base side engaging member 12726 and the transmission member 12728 are housed in the internal space of the front base 12720, and the second displacement member is accommodated. An insertion member 12745 is arranged on the back surface of the 12740.

The base-side engaging member 12726 is a slide portion that is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 132 (a) vertical direction on the paper surface, FIG. 132 (b) vertical direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. A base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 12726c (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 132 (a) and the lower surface in FIG. 132 (b)).

In the base side engaging member 12726, the slide portion 12726c is slid and displaced toward the front along a guide groove (not shown), so that the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b are displaced from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (paper surface in FIG. 132 (a)). The slide portion 12726c slides toward the back side (the back side of the paper surface and the upper side of FIG. 132 (b)) along a guide groove (not shown) while projecting to the front side and the lower side of FIG. 132c (b). By being displaced, the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b can be immersed in the receiving recess 727.

In this case, an urging spring SP1 made of a coil spring is arranged between the front surface of the slide portion 12726c and the back surface of the front base 12720 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed, and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP1 is performed. The force keeps the base-side engaging member 12726 in an immersive state (the state shown in FIG. 132B). In this immersive state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 12720 are arranged flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the base side engaging member 12726.

The side surface of the slide portion 12726c (left side in FIG. 132 (b)) is formed as an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the transmission member 12728 toward the back side, and the inclined surface of the transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. Be abutted.

The transmission member 12728 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction (FIG. 132 (a) left-right direction, FIG. 132 (b) left-right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720, and is arranged on one end side (FIG. 132 (FIG. 132). b) The right side) is exposed from the insertion port 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720. Further, on the other end side (left side of FIG. 132B) of the transmission member 12728, an inclined surface is formed which is inclined in a direction away from the base side engaging member 12726 toward the front side, and the inclined surface is formed. , The inclined surface of the base side engaging member 12726 is brought into contact with the base side engaging member 12.726.

Therefore, by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 12726 and the transmission member 12728, the transmission member 12728 is slidably displaced in the direction closer to the base side engaging member 12726, whereby the base side engaging member 12726 is moved to the front side. The base side engaging member 12726 can be slid to the back side (inside the receiving recess 727) by sliding displacement (protruding) to the base side engaging member 12728 in a direction away from the base side engaging member 12726. It can be displaced (immersed).

An urging spring SP2 made of a coil spring is arranged between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the transmission member is generated by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP2. The 12728 is maintained at a position separated from the base-side engaging member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132 (b), that is, the position where the base-side engaging member 12726 is immersed).

The pressing member 12745 includes a base portion 12745a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 12740 and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the height of the base portion 12745a is set higher than the height of the base portion of the displacement side engaging member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745b can be inserted into the insertion port 12720a of the front base 12720. At the same time, the extending direction of the insertion portion 12745b is set to be the same direction (parallel) as the extending direction of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engaging action of the base side engaging member 12726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

FIG. 133 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 12700 for explaining the engaging action of the base side engaging member 12726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at that time is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 133 (c), and the second displacement member 12740 is in the state shown in FIG. 133 (d). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)) with respect to the front base 12720, first, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 The tip is brought into contact with one end side of the transmission member 12728 via the insertion port 12720a of the front base 12720.

When the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)) with respect to the front base 12720 from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a), the insertion portion 12745 b of the pressing member 12745 is displaced. By being inserted into the front base 12720 from the insertion port 12720a against the urging force of the urging springs SP1 and SP2, the transmission member 12728 is pushed in a direction close to the base side engaging member 12726 (slide displacement). Will be).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133 (b) and 133 (c), the base-side engaging member 12726 gradually protrudes to the front of the front base 12720 and is displaced toward the base-side engaging member 12726. The side engaging members 742 are brought close to each other, and the bent portions 726b and 742b of each other enter the inner surface side of the bent portions 726b and 742b of the other. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133 (d), when the second displacement member 12740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 12720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are projected to the overhanging positions, the elastic recovery force of the urging springs SP1 and SP2 causes the base-side engaging member 12726 to receive the receiving recess 727. You can immerse yourself inside. That is, in the immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 12726 can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface of the front base 12720. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 12720 is exposed, it is possible to improve the appearance by making it difficult for the player to see the base side engaging member 12726.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 projecting from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the thirteenth embodiment has been described. The displacement side engaging member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in the embodiment is engaged with the front wall surface of the front base 13720. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 13700 according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 135 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 13720 in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line in FIG. 135 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the counterclockwise rotating unit 13700 according to the thirteenth embodiment is attached to the front base 13720 on the front side (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 135 (a), lower side in FIG. 135 (b)) and the side surface side thereof. An opening 13720a connected to (the right side of FIGS. 135A and 135B) is formed, and the rotating member 13726 is rotatably arranged in the space formed by the opening 13720a.

The rotating member 13726 is formed in a cross-sectional view from the side surface portion 13726a that closes the side surface side of the front base 13720 and the front surface portion 13726b that closes the front side of the front base 13720 in the opening 13720a, and is formed in a cross-sectional view of the side surface portion 13726a. One side (opposite side of the front portion 13726b) is rotatably supported.

That is, the rotating member 13726 is arranged at the initial position (position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) that closes the opening 13720a by being rotated to one side about the shaft support portion of the side surface portion 13726a. By being rotated to the other side around the shaft support portion of the side surface portion 13726a, it is immersed in the front base 13720.

In this case, an urging spring SP3 made of a torsion spring is arranged between the front base 13720 and the rotating member 13726 in a state of being elastically twisted and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP3 causes the urging spring SP3 to be elastically deformed. The rotating member 13726 is maintained in its initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the front surface portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a and the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720 are arranged flush with each other, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the rotating member 13726.

The displacement side engaging member 13742 includes a base portion 13742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 13742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 13742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can come into contact with the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726. As a result, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b can rotate the rotating member 13726 in the immersion direction (see FIG. 136).

Next, the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engaging member 13742 will be described with reference to FIG. 136.

FIG. 136 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 13700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engaging member 13742, and when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state of is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 136 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 136 (b), and the second displacement member 13740 is in the state shown in FIG. 136 (c). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 136 (a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 The tip of the is abutted against the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726.

When the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720 from the state shown in FIG. 136 (a), the bent portion of the displacement side engaging member 13742 The 742b pushes (rotates) the rotating member 13726 in the immersion direction against the urging force of the urging spring SP3.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), the bent portion 742 b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 gradually enters the internal space of the front base 13720 through the opening 13720a, and is shown in FIG. 136 (c). As described above, when the second displacement member 13740 is arranged in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 can be engagedly faced with the back surface of the front base 13720. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 13720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are projected to the overhanging position, the rotating member 13726 is arranged (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP3. Can be made to. That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the front surface portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720, respectively. As a result, even when the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotating member 13726 can be made difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of being projected from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engaging member 14726 in the 14th embodiment is the front base 14720. It is arranged so that it can appear and disappear in front of. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 137 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the left rotation unit 14700 according to the 14th embodiment. 138 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 138 (b) is a line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 138 (a). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 14700 in the above. Further, FIG. 139 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the overhang position, and FIG. 139 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700, and FIG. 139 (b) is a CXXXIXb of FIG. 139 (a). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 in the-CXXXIXb line.

As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, in the left rotation unit 14700 according to the 14th embodiment, the base side engaging member 14726 is housed in the internal space of the front base 14720, and the rack member 14752 is located on one end side in the longitudinal direction ( A transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front surface of FIG. 137 (upper side).

The base-side engaging member 14726 includes a slide portion 14726c that is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 138 (b) and FIG. 139 (b) left-right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. , A base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 14726c (the surface on the left side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)).

The base side engaging member 14726 slides and displaces the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b toward the front along a guide groove (not shown) so that the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b can be moved from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (left side in FIG. 138 (b)). ) (See FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slidably displaced toward the back side (right side in FIG. 139 (b)) along a guide groove (not shown) to accept the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b. It can be immersed in the recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

In this case, an urging spring SP4 made of a coil spring is arranged between the back surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the back surface base 710 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP4. The force keeps the base-side engaging member 14726 in an immersive state (the state shown in FIG. 139 (b)). In this immersive state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 14720 are arranged flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the base side engaging member 14726.

The back surface of the slide portion 14726c (right side of FIG. 138 (b) and FIG. 139 (b)) is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 toward the upper side (upper side of FIG. 138 (b) and FIG. 139 (b)). It is formed as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front surface) of the transmission portion 14752b of the rack member 14752 is brought into contact with the inclined surface.

On the front surface of the transmission portion 14752b (left side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)), the base side engaging member 14726 (slide portion) is directed downward (lower side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)). An inclined surface inclined in a direction away from 14726c) is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c is brought into contact with the inclined surface.

Therefore, as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 14726 and the transmission portion 14752b, the base side engaging member 14726 slides toward the front side (direction protruding from the receiving recess 727). In addition to being able to be displaced, the base-side engaging member 14726 can be slid-displaced toward the back surface (direction of immersion in the receiving recess 727) as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced downward and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b are displaced from each other. It can be engaged, and it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting in a direction away from the front base 14720.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the uppermost position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the overhanging position, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP4 causes the base side to engage. The member 14726 can be immersed in the receiving recess 727. That is, in the immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 14726 can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface of the front base 14720. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 14726 is less likely to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of being projected from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engaging member 15726 in the fifteenth embodiment is the front base 15720. It is arranged so that it can be slidably displaced in front of the. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 140 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the left rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment. 141 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 15720 on the CXLIb-CXLIb line in FIG. 141 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the counterclockwise rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment is attached to the front base 15720 on the front side (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 141 (a), lower side in FIG. 141 (b)) and the side surface side thereof. An opening 15720a connected to (the right side of FIGS. 141 (a) and 141 (b)) is formed, and the front side (lower side of FIG. 141 (b)) of the front base 15720 in the space formed by the opening 15720a. A base-side engaging member 15726 is arranged in the portion so as to be slidable.

The base-side engaging member 15726 is formed in a flat plate shape having substantially the same shape as the front side of the front base 15720 in the opening 15720a (that is, a shape that closes the opening 15720a in the front view), and is formed on the front base 15720. 1 guide groove 15720b1 and 2nd guide groove 15720b2 are arranged so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (FIG. 141 (a) and FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction).

The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed so as to have a first inclination angle with respect to the left-right direction (left-right direction of FIG. 141 (b)) of the front base 15720 in the top view shown in FIG. 141 (b). The guide groove 15720b2 is formed so as to have an inclination angle (second inclination angle) smaller than the inclination angle of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction (FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction) of the front base 15720. To. In the present embodiment, the second inclination angle is set to 0 °. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed parallel to the left-right direction of the front base 15720.

Therefore, the base side engaging member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. 141 (b), so that the back side (FIG. 141 (b)) diagonally rearward of the front base 15720. It is slid and displaced toward the upper left side), and then, by being guided along the second guide groove 15720b2, it is slid and displaced toward the side of the front base 15720 (left side in FIG. 141 (b)), and the front surface. Immerse yourself in the interior of the base 15720.

In this case, an urging spring (not shown) made of a coil spring is arranged between the front base 15720 and the base side engaging member 15726 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the urging spring The elastic recovery force keeps the base-side engaging member 15726 in its initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the base side engaging member 15726 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 141 (a) and the lower surface in FIG. 141 (b)) and the front surface of the front base 15720 are arranged flush with each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the side engaging member 15726.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engaging action of the base side engaging member 15726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

FIG. 142 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 15700 for explaining the engaging action of the base side engaging member 15726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at that time is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 142 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), and the second displacement member 740 is in the state shown in FIG. 142 (d). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced with respect to the front base 15720 in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142 (a)), the displacement side engages. The tip of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted through the opening 15720a into the inside of the front base 15720, and the base portion 742a of the displacement side engaging member 742 is brought into contact with the side surface of the base side engaging member 15726.

When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142 (b)) with respect to the front base 15720 from the state shown in FIG. 142 (b), as shown in FIG. 142 (c). , The base portion 742a of the displacement side engaging member 742 pushes the base side engaging member 15726 along the first guide groove 15720b1 in the immersion direction (slide displacement) against the urging force of the urging spring. When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction from the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), the base-side engaging member 15726 is pushed in the immersion direction along the second guide groove 15720b2 (slide displacement). Will be).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), when the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742 is placed on the back surface of the base side engaging member 15726. , Can be engaged and face-to-face. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 15720 (lower side in FIG. 142C).

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the overhanging position, the base side engaging member 15726 is arranged (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring. ) Can be done. That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface of the front base 15720. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base-side engaging member 15726 are less likely to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 projecting from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement side engaging member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in the embodiment is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 143 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the left rotation unit 16700 according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 144 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 16720 at the CXLIVb-CXLIVb line in FIG. 144 (a).

Further, FIG. 145 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 16700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engaging member 16742, and the second displacement member 16740 is moved to the retracted position. The transition state when displaced toward is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 145 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 145 (b), and the second displacement member 16740 is in the state shown in FIG. 145 (c). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, in the left rotation unit 16700 according to the 16th embodiment, an opening 16720a is formed on the side surface (the surface on the right side of FIGS. 135A and 135B) of the front base 16720. ..

The displacement side engaging member 16742 includes a base portion 16742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 16742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. The height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720.

As a result, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is displaced through the opening 16720a as the front base. When the second displacement member 16740 is gradually entered into the internal space of 16720 and the second displacement member 16740 is arranged in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. It can be face-to-face as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 16720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the opening 16720a may be opened in the front base 16720, and it is not necessary to provide the base-side engaging member, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since the opening 16720a is arranged on the side surface of the front base 16720, the opening 16720a is visually recognized by the player when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the overhanging direction and the front surface of the front base 16720 is exposed. It can be made difficult and the appearance can be improved.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 projecting from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement side engaging member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in the embodiment is engaged with the back surface of the back surface base 710. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 146 is a partially decomposed perspective view of the left rotation unit 17700 according to the 17th embodiment. Further, FIG. 147 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit 17700 for explaining the engaging action of the rear base 710 and the displacement side engaging member 17742, and the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at the time is schematically illustrated.

The second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 147 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 147 (b), and the second displacement member 17740 is in the state shown in FIG. 147 (c). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the left rotation unit 17700 according to the 17th embodiment, the entire front surface and side surface of the front base 17720 on one end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side of FIG. 146) are formed as decorative surfaces. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base-side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted from the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

The displacement side engaging member 17742 includes a base portion 17742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 17742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. The height of the base portion 17742a is set so that the inner surface of the bent portion 742b can face the back surface of the back surface base 710 at a predetermined interval.

As a result, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 17742 is gradually moved toward the back surface side of the back surface base 710 with the displacement. When the second displacement member 17740 is arranged in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 17742 can be engagedly faced with the back surface of the back surface base 710. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 17720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to provide the base-side engaging member on the front base 17720, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, since it is not necessary to form an opening on the side surface of the front base 17720, it is possible to improve the appearance of the front base 17720 by avoiding that the functional part unrelated to the decoration is visually recognized by the player. Can be done. In other words, since it is not necessary for the player to obscure the side surface of the front base 17720 by the second displacement member 17740 arranged at the overhang position, the overhang amount of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the effect. be able to.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. In the right-handed rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the operation of displacementing (standing) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the overhanging direction toward the retracted position (standing operation of the first displacement member 630) is performed by the drive motor 650. Although the case where it is performed only by the rotational driving force has been described, the standing operation of the first displacement member 630 in the right-handed rotating unit 18600 of the 18th embodiment utilizes the action of the inertial force in addition to the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Is done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the right-handed rotating unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a front view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position, and FIG. 150 is a front view of the clockwise rotating unit 18600 when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section of.

In addition, in FIG. 149 (a) and FIG. 150 (a), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are arranged at the overhanging positions (that is, FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c)). Corresponds to. Further, FIGS. 149 (b) and 150 (b) correspond to FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b), and FIGS. 149 (c) and 150 (c) are shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 36 (b). Corresponds to 36 (a).

Further, FIG. 151 is a schematic rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 151 (a), 151 (b) and FIGS. 151 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 150 (a), 150 (b) and 150 (c), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the right-handed rotating unit 18600 in the eighteenth embodiment, the contacted portion 18629 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape from the front surface of the front base 18620 has a decorative portion 642b in the connecting displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. A substantially columnar contact portion 18644 is projected from the back surface. The contact portion 18644 is arranged at an end portion opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) in the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 18642.

As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the contacted portion 18629 and the contacted portion 18644 are in the middle of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 18644 is formed so as to be able to contact the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629 (the upper surface of FIG. 148).

Specifically, from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 149 (a), 150 (a) and 151 (a), as shown in FIGS. 149 (b), 150 (b) and 151 (b), The connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) in a direction retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 630, and FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c) and 151 (c). ), When the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated to the maximum with the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation, the contact portion 18644 comes into contact with the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629.

From the states shown in FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c), and 151 (c), rotation (standing) of the first displacement member 630 toward the retracted position centered on the rotation axis 631 is started. (See FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b)), the contact portion 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629, and the contacted portions 18629 and the contacted portion 18644 are separated from each other. The contact is released.

In this case, in the section until the contact portion 18644 comes into contact with the contacted portion 18629 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 149, 150 and 151), the drive motor 650 uses only the second displacement member 18640. It may be driven by rotation, and the drive load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. It is considered to be the load of. Further, since the displacement direction of the connected displacement member 18642 is the direction of descending downward in the direction of gravity, the load of the drive motor 650 is also reduced from that point.

On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, from such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from such a state, since the first displacement member 630 is operated to stand up against gravity, the load of the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased from this point as well.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connection displacement member 18642, and the connection displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633. When rotated as a center, the contact portion 18644 is brought into contact with the contacted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151 (c)).

That is, the rotation of the connection displacement member 18642 around the support shaft 633 can be restricted by the contact between the contacted portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 18642 can be stopped suddenly. , The inertial force of the connecting displacement member 18642 generated by the sudden stop is the force in the direction of displacement (that is, standing up) the first displacement member 630 in the retracting direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the center of rotation (arrow in FIG. 151 (c)). As F), it can act on the first displacement member 630.

As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630. Also, when added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650, the above-mentioned inertial force can be exerted as a force for assisting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (large) in the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 630 and 18640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the sex.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. In the clockwise rotation unit 18600 of the 18th embodiment, the case where the contact portion 18644 of the connection displacement member 18642 is brought into contact with the contacted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 has been described, but the connection displacement member 19642 in the 19th embodiment has been described. The contact portion 19644 of the above is in contact with the contacted portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 152 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotating unit 19600 in the 19th embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotating unit 19600.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in the clockwise rotation unit 19600 in the 19th embodiment, the driven member 19641 of the second displacement member 19640 and the connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the connecting displacement member 19642 are the first. It is set at a position different from that in the case of one embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

Specifically, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (the side opposite to the second groove 641b across the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side of FIGS. 152 and 153) is extended while being curved in an arc shape, and the curved portion thereof. A connecting groove 641c is arranged on the extending tip side of the. By this curved portion, the interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642a of the connecting displacement member 1964 is avoided. The connecting displacement member 1964 is formed by projecting a plate-shaped overhanging portion 19642c outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and a connecting pin 643 is projected on the front side of the overhanging portion 19642c.

In this case, in the above-described first embodiment, the axis of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 is centered, and the shaft of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642. The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is located inside (center side) of the virtual circle passing through the center.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a virtual center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641 passes through the center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 1964. The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is located on the outside of the circle.

Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the connected displacement member 1964 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is opposite to that in the case of the first embodiment. Here, the relative rotation in the opposite direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157.

154 and 155 are front views of the right-handed rotating unit 19600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and FIGS. 156 and 157 show the operation between the retracted position and the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state at the time of carrying out.

Note that FIGS. 154 (a), 154 (b) and 154 (c) are in the same state as FIGS. 156 (a), 156 (b) and 156 (c), respectively, and are in the same state as in FIG. 155 (a). ), FIG. 155 (b) and FIG. 155 (c) are in the same state as in FIGS. 157 (a), 157 (b) and 157 (c), respectively. Further, FIG. 154 (c) is the same as FIG. 155 (a), and FIG. 156 (c) is the same as FIG. 157 (a).

Here, the clockwise rotation unit 19600 in the 19th embodiment rotates relative to the first displacement member 19630 of the connection displacement member 19642 due to the difference in the positions of the connection portions (connection groove 641c and connection pin 643) described above. Since the other operation modes are formed substantially the same except that the direction of the above is opposite to that of the first embodiment, the description of the same portion will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 156, at the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 156 (a)), and the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is moved to the first groove 635 (action). By pushing down the inner wall surface of the section 635a) and the second groove 641b in the overhanging direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the overhanging direction in a state of being integrated with the second displacement member 19640.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 157 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 155 (a) and 157 (a), the drive pin 654b is moved to the first displacement member 19630. While passing through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 157 (a)).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), the driven member 19641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in the direction of raising the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 157 (b)). The rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 19642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 19642 lowers the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation. It is rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 108 (b)).

That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, the connected displacement portion 19642 is displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 19630 in the direction opposite to that in the case of the first embodiment. After that, as shown in FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is the non-interference section 635b and the second displacement member 19640 in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. By reaching the end of the two grooves 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

It will be described back to FIG. 152 and FIG. 153. In the present embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 19639 is projected from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, and a substantially cylindrical contact portion 19644 is projected from the front surface of the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642. .. The contacted portion 19639 is arranged between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630.

The contacted portion 19369 and the contacted portion 19644 are formed in a predetermined section in the middle of the displacement of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 1964 is formed so as to be in contact with the side surface (the surface on the right side of FIG. 153). Here, the action of the contact between the contacted portion 19639 and the contacted portion 19644 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 160.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position, and FIG. 159 is a front view of the clockwise rotating unit 19600 when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section of.

In addition, FIG. 158 (a) and FIG. 159 (a) show a state in which the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhanging positions (that is, FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c)). Corresponds to. Further, FIGS. 158 (b) and 159 (b) correspond to FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), and FIGS. 158 (c) and 159 (c) correspond to FIGS. 155 (a) and 157 (b). Corresponds to 157 (a).

Further, FIG. 160 is a schematic rear view of the right-handed rotating unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhanging position to the retracting position, and FIGS. 160 (a), 160 (b) and FIGS. 160 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 159 (a), 159 (b) and 159 (c), respectively.

From the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 158 (a), 159 (a) and 160 (a), as shown in FIGS. 158 (b), 159 (b) and 160 (b), the connecting displacement member 19642. Is rotated around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) in a direction retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, as shown in FIGS. 158 (c), 159 (c) and 160 (c). When the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated to the maximum with the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation, the contact portion 19644 comes into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639.

In this case, in the section until the contact portion 19644 comes into contact with the contacted portion 19639 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 158, 159 and 160), the drive motor 650 uses only the second displacement member 19640. It may be driven by rotation, and the drive load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. It is considered to be the load of.

On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contacted portion 19369, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. Therefore, from such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from such a state, since the operation is such that the first displacement member 19630 stands up against gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the abutting portion 19644 is provided on the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 1964, the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated around the support shaft 633, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642. The contact portion 19644 lifted upward in accordance with the above is brought into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160 (c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 1964 around the support shaft 633 can be restricted by the contact between the contacted portion 19638 and the contacting portion 19644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 1964 can be stopped suddenly. , The inertial force of the connecting displacement member 19642 generated by the sudden stop is displaced (that is, upright) in the retracting direction with the first displacement member 19630 as the rotation center with the rotation shaft 631 as the center of rotation (arrow in FIG. 160 (c)). As F), it can act on the first displacement member 19630.

As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630. Also, when added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650, the above-mentioned inertial force can be exerted as a force for assisting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 650 from being suddenly changed (largely), stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 19630 and 19640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and make the drive motor 650 durable. It is possible to improve the sex.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 840 (receiving surface 844) is performed regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (that is, either the first state or the second state). However, in the winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 20840 (reception surface 844) is restricted by the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment. Further, FIG. 162 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 20065 in a state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the first state, and FIG. 162 (b) shows a winning in a state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state. It is sectional drawing of the apparatus 20065. Note that FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 161 in the winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment, the seesaw member 20840 is formed with a regulating portion 20748. The restricting portion 20848 is formed as a substantially triangular portion in front view that is erected upward (upper side in FIG. 161) from the edge portion of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845.

As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 is in the first state, the regulating portion 20748 is located outside the opening region of the delivery port 821c, whereby the opening width of the delivery port 821c is widened. (FIG. 162 (a) left-right dimension) is maintained at a dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is permitted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 is in the second state, the regulating unit 20848 is brought closer to the delivery port 821c side as the seesaw member 20840 rotates, and the regulating unit 20848 A part is located inside the opening area of the outlet 821c (that is, a part of the restricting part 20848 overlaps the opening area of the outlet 821c). As a result, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is reduced to the dimension W2, which is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (W2 <W1). Therefore, the sending of the game ball from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is restricted (prohibited).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the guide passage (delivery port 821c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (allowable) according to the state of the seesaw member 20840. Or regulation).

That is, in the first state, the game ball is sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, and the game ball is rolled from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to rotate the seesaw member 20840. , The second state can be formed quickly.

Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 started to rotate toward the second state, when the game balls were further continuously sent out from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844, they were sent out first (received by the receiving surface 844). ) A state in which the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is formed, and the seesaw member 20840 is likely to be maintained in the second state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 is started to rotate toward the second state, the regulating unit 20848 narrows the opening width of the sending port 821c to the dimension W2, so that the receiving surface from the sending port 821c It is possible to regulate (prohibit) the delivery of the game ball to the 844 and secure the time for discharging the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d.

That is, until the discharge of the game ball from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d is completed and the game ball on the seesaw member 20840 is exhausted, the game ball is waited to be sent from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Can be made to. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

The dimension W2 may be larger than the diameter of the game ball as long as it is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, since the opening width of the sending port 821c is narrowed by the regulating unit 20848, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to pass through, and the time required for sending the game ball from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is increased accordingly. It can be made to (delay the passage of the game ball). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the case where the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d by rolling along the downward slope of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 has been described. The winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 for pushing out the game ball and discharging it to the discharge port 821d. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

163 (a) and 163 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 21065 according to the 21st embodiment, and correspond to FIG. 54.

As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. The rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 and comes into contact with the game ball on the seesaw member 840 regardless of whether the seesaw member 840 forms the first state or the second state. Placed at a possible height position.

The rotating member 21870 has a shaft support 21871 that is rotatably supported on the back surface of the front base 810 through which a shaft support pin (not shown) is inserted, and a shaft support 21871 that projects unilaterally from the shaft support 21871 and a delivery port 821c. The plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 facing the plate, and the plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and the extrusion plate facing the discharge port 821d while projecting from the shaft support 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872. It is equipped with 21873.

The shaft support portion 21871 is arranged in a posture in which the axial direction thereof is along the direction of gravity (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)) (that is, orthogonal to the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21872 and the extruded plate 21873 are connected with a predetermined intersection angle with the shaft support portion 21871 as the intersection center. Therefore, the rotating member 21870 is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of the shaft support portion 21871 (gravity).

In this case, in the rotating member 21870, when the extrusion plate 21873 is rotated along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 163 (a)), the receiving plate 21872 is the seesaw member 840 as shown in FIG. 163 (a). At the rotational position of the receiving plate 21872 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the posture is such that the receiving plate 844 is projected upward (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)). The extruded plate 21873 is in a posture of projecting upward from the inclined surface 845 and / or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

That is, in the rotating member 21870, at the rotational position where the extrusion plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (lower side in FIG. 163 (a)), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), at the rotational position where the receiving plate 21872 is retracted to the side opposite to the delivery port 821c (lower side in FIG. 163 (b)) in the posture of being advanced toward the side close to 821c. The extruded plate 21873 is in a posture of being advanced toward the side close to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 from the delivery port 821c. When the game ball is sent out to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 receives the extruded plate 21873. Is rotated in a direction that projects above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be pushed out by the extrusion plate 21873 and discharged to the discharge port 821d.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened so that the first state and the second state can be set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

The game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 is in a posture in which the extruded plate 21873 is projected above the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 (that is, the posture). , The game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 163 (b)) is retracted from the extruded plate 21873 even if it is arranged in the posture shown in FIG. 163 (b). Since it is rolled along the discharge surface 846, the rotating member 21870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving plate 21872 is projected upward from the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163 (a)).

In this way, the rotating member 21870 utilizes the rolling of the game ball to be in an initial position (a position where the game ball can be received by the receiving plate 21872 of the game ball and pushed out by the extrusion plate 21873, that is, FIG. 163. It is possible to return to the position shown in (a)). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for driving by the driving means and detection by the sensor device, and it is possible to reduce the product cost accordingly.

Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

164 (a) and 164 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065 according to the 22nd embodiment, and correspond to FIG. 54. Further, FIGS. 165 (a) and 165 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065, which correspond to FIG. 52.

Here, the winning device 22065 in the 22nd embodiment has an opening 22489 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projecting piece 22874 projecting from the rotating member 22870 with respect to the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment. Further, only the points to be provided are different, and the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the rotating member 22870 is provided with a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting pieces 22874 protruding from the side surface of the lower side (seesaw member 22840 side, lower side of FIG. 165) of the extrusion plate 21873. Will be set up. On the other hand, a plurality of openings 22489 for receiving the projecting pieces 22874 are formed (at three locations in the present embodiment) in the plate-shaped portion where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 are formed.

The projecting piece 22874 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 in the front view (direction view of the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 22840, that is, the state shown in FIG. 165). To. On the other hand, the opening 22489 is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 in the front view (direction view of the rotation axis (shaft support portion 21871) of the rotation member 22870, that is, the state shown in FIG. 164). It is formed.

Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 is rotated between the first state and the second state with the support shaft 821e (bearing 841) as the center of rotation, and the rotating member 22870 is rotated about its movable range with the shaft support portion 21871 as the center of rotation. In any case, it is possible to prevent the projecting piece 22874 from being interfered with the inner edge of the opening 22489. As a result, the seesaw member 22840 and the rotating member 22870 can be made independent of each other and can be smoothly rotated.

Here, as in the case of the 21st embodiment described above, when the extruded plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 does not have a protrusion, the seesaw member 840 forms the second state (or a state close to it). When the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the extrusion plate 21873, the distance between the extrusion plate 21873 and the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846. Therefore, the lower portion of the extrusion plate 21873 is brought into contact with the upper portion of the game ball (the portion on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)). Therefore, it takes a long time for the extruded plate 21873 to come into contact with the upper portion of the game ball, and it becomes difficult to quickly discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d by that amount. Further, it becomes difficult to sufficiently apply the rotational energy of the rotating member 21870 formed by receiving the game ball by the receiving plate 21872 to the game ball via the extrusion plate 21873.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the projecting piece 22874 is projected downward (seesaw member 22840) from the extruded plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 165 (b). In the state where the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the projecting piece 22874.

Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion (lower portion of FIG. 164 (a)) of the game ball. Therefore, the time until the projecting piece 22874 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d by that amount. Further, the rotational energy of the rotating member 22870 formed by receiving the game ball by the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently given to the game ball via the projecting piece 22874.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened so that the first state and the second state can be set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

Next, the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. In the 21st embodiment, the case where the rotating member 21870 is arranged (rotatably supported by the shaft) on the front base 810 has been described, but the rotating member 23870 of the 23rd embodiment is arranged (rotatably) on the seesaw member 840. (Axial support). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 166 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 23065 according to the 23rd embodiment. 167 (a) and 167 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 23065, which correspond to FIG. 54. Further, FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 23065, which correspond to FIG. 52.

Here, the winning device 23065 in the 23rd embodiment is different from the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is arranged and the presence / absence of the stopper portion 23875, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, the rotating member 23870 according to the 23rd embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a shaft support pin 23876 inserted through the shaft support portion 21871. In this case, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the axial direction of the shaft support portion 21871 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840, and is below the extrusion plate 21873. The side surfaces face substantially parallel to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the first state or the first state as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b). Regardless of which of the two states is formed, the extrusion plate 21873 can be made to face the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

Therefore, unlike the case of the 21st embodiment described above (that is, the lower portion of the extrusion plate 21873 is brought into contact with the upper portion of the game ball (the portion on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a))), the extrusion plate 21873 Can be brought into contact with the side portion (lower portion of FIG. 167 (a)) of the game ball. Therefore, the time until the extrusion plate 21873 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (extruded) to the discharge port 821d by that amount. Further, the rotational energy of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball by the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently given to the game ball via the extrusion plate 21873.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened so that the first state and the second state can be set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

Here, in the rotating member 23870 of the present embodiment, the stopper portion 23875 is projected from the back surface of the extrusion plate 21873 (the surface opposite to the side where the game ball is pushed out), and the stopper portion 23875 hits the back surface of the front base 810. It is possible to contact. In the state where the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the back surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167 (a)), the extruded plate 21873 of the rotating member 23870 is in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (FIG. 167 (a) left-right direction). It is placed at the rotation position along it.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the stopper portion 23875 is omitted and the extrusion plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810, the extrusion plate is closer to the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846. It is possible to make the 21873 stand by and shorten the time until the extruded plate 21873 comes into contact with the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d.

Here, as described above, even if the rotating member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the extruded plate 21873 is projected above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (b)). The game ball (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 167 (b)) received by the receiving plate 21872 is rolled along the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 while retracting the extruded plate 21873, thereby causing the receiving plate 21872. The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving surface 844 is projected upward (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (a)).

In this case, in the present embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840, a predetermined gap is formed between the extrusion plate 21873 and the front base 810. Therefore, when the extruded plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810, the game ball may roll in a direction away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling locus of the game ball increases. Therefore, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

On the other hand, by projecting the stopper portion 23875 from the back surface of the extruded plate 21873, the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 167 (b)) is placed on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. It is possible to prevent the extrusion plate 21873 from being pushed back too far toward the back side of the front base 810 when rolled along the same line (see FIG. 167 (a)). That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from unnecessarily rolling in the direction away from the discharge port 821d, so that the game ball can be quickly discharged to the discharge port 821d.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the stopper portion is not formed on the back surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810 (FIG. 167 (b). )reference). That is, when the receiving plate 21872 receives the game ball and the rotating member 23870 is rotated by utilizing the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 formed because the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840. The rotation angle of the rotating member 23870 (the rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (b)) can be increased.

As a result, the time during which the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21872 can be lengthened (that is, the impulse received by the rotating member 23870 from the game ball can be increased). Therefore, the rotational energy of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball on the receiving plate 21872 can be increased, and even when a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, they can be increased. By extruding the extrusion plate 21873, a plurality of game balls can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened so that the first state and the second state can be set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

Next, the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in the horizontal posture has been described, but in the seesaw member 840 in the 24th embodiment, the posture of the rotation shaft is tilted with the rotation. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 according to the 24th embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, in the winning device 24065 according to the 24th embodiment, bearing portions 24816 and 24286 are projected from the back surface of the front base 24810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. The bearing portion 24816, 24862 is a portion that rotatably supports both ends of the rotating shaft 24877 on its inner peripheral surface, and has a substantially U-shaped protrusion in front view with the upper side (upper side of FIGS. 169 and 170) open. Formed as a part.

In the present embodiment, the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 has a larger radius of the inner peripheral surface with respect to the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 24820. As a result, as will be described later, rotation of one end in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the end on the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed) is allowed.

The rotating shaft 24877 is a shaft-shaped body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the intermediate base 24820. Here, the rotation shaft 24877 will be described with reference to FIG. 171.

171 (a) is a front view of the rotating shaft 24877, and FIG. 171 (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft 24877 in the direction of the arrow CLXXIb of FIG. 171 (a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the rotating shaft 24877 includes a main body portion 24877a formed as a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and a cam portion 24877b formed at an axial end portion of the main body portion 24877a. The cam portion 24877b is formed so as to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 24877a (that is, the distance from the axial center of the main body portion 24877a to the outer peripheral surface of the cam portion 24877b is changed according to the rotation angle. ) Formed as a so-called disc cam.

It will be described back to FIG. 170 and FIG. 171. The rotary shaft 24877 is set so that the axial length of the main body portion 24877a is larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotating shaft 24877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and the main body portion 24877a protruding from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are the bearing portion 24816 and the intermediate base of the front base 24810. It is pivotally supported by the bearing portion 24826 of 24820 (see FIG. 173). The rotating shaft 24877 is fixed to the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 after being positioned in a predetermined phase (rotational position).

Next, the action of the cam portion 24877b on the rotating shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 172 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 172 (b) shows a winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. It is a cross-sectional view of. 173 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 on the CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa line in FIG. 172 (a), and FIG. 173 (b) is a sectional view of the winning device 24065 on the CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb line in FIG. 172 (b). It is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a), in the first state, the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 173 (a)) of the rotating shaft 24877. Both ends in the axial direction are axially supported by the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 and the bearing portion 24823 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward at the first tilt angle toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a) toward the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one end in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 as the rotation angle increases. However, by gradually acting on the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810, the height position on one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the forming side of the cam portion 24877b) is gradually raised.

As shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and 173 (b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position on one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the forming side of the cam portion 24877b) becomes the maximum. The axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is tilted downward from the front base 24810 to the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the inclination angle of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 is increased to a second inclination angle larger than the first inclination angle described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle). (Case), if the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is strong (large), the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 earlier, and the second state cannot be surely formed, while the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is high. If is loose (small), the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 will be delayed, and the residence time thereof will be long, so that the alternating switching between the first state and the second state will not be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively gentle (small) in the initial stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being discharged from the discharge surface 846 from being accelerated (that is, to keep the game ball on the discharge surface 846) so that the second state can be reliably formed. it can.

On the other hand, at the final stage, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is made relatively strong (large) so that the game ball can be quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, so that the game can be played on the discharge surface 846. The time on which the sphere is placed (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened so that the first state and the second state can be switched smoothly.

Next, the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in the horizontal posture has been described, but in the seesaw member 840 in the 25th embodiment, the posture of the rotation shaft is tilted with the rotation. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 according to the 25th embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065.

As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, in the winning device 25065 in the 25th embodiment, bearing portions 25816 and 24286 are projected from the back surface of the front base 25810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816, 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and are formed in the same shape as each other.

The rotating shaft 25877 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 25810 and the intermediate base 24820, and the axial length thereof is the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The dimension is set to be larger than the axial length. Therefore, the rotating shaft 25877 is fitted inside the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions of the bearing 841 protruding from both ends in the axial direction are pivotally supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 25820, respectively. (See FIG. 177).

Further, on the back surface of the front base 25810, a push-up portion 25817 is projected from the side of the bearing portion 25816. The push-up portion 25817 is located on the movement locus of the discharge surface 846 forming portion when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is discharged when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It comes into contact with the lower surface of the surface 846 forming portion. By this contact, as will be described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the push-up portion 25817, and the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

Next, the action of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 176 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in the state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 176 (b) shows the winning device 25065 in the state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. It is a cross-sectional view of.

Further, FIG. 177 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176 (a), and FIG. 177 (b) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 in the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in the CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc line in FIG. 176 (b), and FIG. 177 (d) is a CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId line in FIG. 176 (b). It is sectional drawing of the winning apparatus 25065 in. Note that FIGS. 176 (a) and 176 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a), and 177 (b), in the first state, the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817 are separated from each other, so that the rotation shaft 25877. In a posture in which the axial center of the rotary shaft is parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. To. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward at the first tilt angle toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a) and 177 (b) toward the second state, and the discharge surface 846 forming portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. The lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion is brought into contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

From this state, when the seesaw member 840 is further rotated toward the second state, the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion is in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817, so that the seesaw member 840 has a rotation shaft 25877. Is rotated while lifting one end side in the axial direction (left front side in FIG. 174, left side in FIG. 177 (a)), and the discharge surface 846 forming portion is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (right back side in FIG. 174). , FIG. 177 (b) right side) is lowered.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 (b), 27 (c) and 177 (d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 25877 is the inner circumference of the bearing portion 25816. It is lifted from the bottom surface, and the axis of the rotating shaft 25877 is tilted downward from the front base 25810 toward the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the inclination angle of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 is increased to a second inclination angle larger than the first inclination angle described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, until the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion comes into contact with the push-up portion 25817. In the section), while maintaining the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 at the first inclination angle (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is not changed), the final stage (the discharge surface 846 forming portion). In the section after the lower surface of the seesaw is brought into contact with the push-up portion 25817), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be sharply increased to the second inclination angle.

As a result, in the initial stage, it is possible to easily suppress the early discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, the game ball can be easily retained on the discharge surface 846), so that the second state can be formed more reliably. .. On the other hand, in the final stage, the game ball can be quickly and easily discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, so that the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 (that is, the second state is formed). It is possible to shorten the time) so that the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed more smoothly.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the concave groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 in the third path M3 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the groove is projected from the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910. In addition to being provided, a convex strip extending in a substantially saw blade shape in front view may be provided. In this case, as in the case of the concave groove 971, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the ridge and meander to the left and right. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down, and the movement of the game ball can be changed. A ridge can also be used as a lens that diffuses or condenses light.

In each of the above embodiments, in the second state, the case where the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located above the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. In the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 coincides with the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 in the height direction or is located below the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a. It may be formed so as to do so.

In the third embodiment, the case where the third displacement member 3660 is relatively slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by utilizing the expansion / contraction operation of the slide rail 3662 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a groove is provided in one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and a pin that slides along the groove is provided in the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and a pin for the groove is provided. The third displacement member 3660 may be slidably displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 by utilizing the sliding of the above.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the own weight (action of gravity) of the second displacement member 740 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane is used to move the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in either one direction or the other direction. You may be urged to. Thereby, the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the liquid LQ is used as a predetermined heavy object has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other heavy objects may be any one that can displace (for example, roll or slide) the internal space of the cage 10746 along the longitudinal direction as the posture of the cage 10746 changes, and for example, iron or lead. Examples include a sphere and a columnar body made of iron. In that case, the internal space of the cage 10746 does not need to be sealed.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where a predetermined heavy object is held in the internal space of the cage 10746 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined heavy object is held at the center of gravity via a string or a link. It may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing through G to the second displacement member 740. Also by this, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation, a predetermined heavy object can be displaced to the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the cage 10746 is arranged at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. However, it is preferable to position the center of the cage 10746 in the longitudinal direction on the vertical line Z passing through the center of gravity G.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the second displacement member 740 returns to the intersection angle γ1 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP, but this is not necessarily the case. The urging spring SP may be omitted and the second displacement member 740 may be subjected to its own weight (action of gravity).

In the 24th and 25th embodiments, the case where the rotating shaft 24877 is pivotally supported in a posture parallel to the horizontal direction (FIG. 173 (a) left-right direction) in the first state has been described. In the first state, the height position of one end in the axial direction (the forming side of the cam portion 24877b) of the rotating shaft 24877 is higher (or lower) than the other end side in the axial direction. It may be set to the position. That is, the above-mentioned first inclination angle (inclination angle at which the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is downwardly inclined toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) is the above-mentioned second inclination angle (second inclination angle). It suffices if the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the two states is formed so as to be able to be increased to an inclination angle larger than the inclination angle (inclination angle downwardly inclined toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820).

In the 21st and 22nd embodiments, the case where a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotating members 21870 and 22870 and the front base 810 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the extruded plate 21873 and the front base 810. In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. As a result, the same effect as in the case of the 23rd embodiment can be obtained.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the clockwise rotation unit 600 as an example>
A base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable with respect to the base member, a transmission member for transmitting a driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a transmission member thereof. In a game machine including a driving means for applying a driving force to the vehicle, the transmission member includes a driving pin, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member include a first groove and a second groove, respectively. The first groove includes an action section that is acted on by the drive pin and a non-interference section that the drive pin does not interfere with, and the second groove includes at least an action section that is acted on by the drive pin. The groove and the second groove are overlapped, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the drive pin is inserted into the first groove and the second groove. Displacement machine A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force is applied to a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A directing member having a transmitting member to be transmitted and a driving means for applying a driving force to the transmitting member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement are provided through the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994).

According to this gaming machine, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmitting member, the effecting member is driven from the transmitting member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member via the first groove and the second groove. Is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced with respect to the base member.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for arranging the first groove and the second groove is increased, and the front view of the effect member is increased accordingly. There was a problem that the outer shape of the machine became large. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, and it is not preferable to increase the size of the outer shape of the effect member in front view because it hinders the increase in size of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the first groove and the second groove are overlapped (superimposed). Compared with the case of the conventional product in which the groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for the arrangement of the first groove and the second groove can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape in the front view. In this case, even when the size of the liquid crystal display device is required to be increased, the space in the thickness direction (front-back direction) is relatively large, and the first groove and the second groove are formed like the gaming machine A1. In the configuration of superimposing the above, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape in the front view by using a relatively large space in the thickness direction, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device.

Further, according to the gaming machine A1, since the drive pin is inserted into the overlapped first groove and the second groove, the drive force from the transmission member is transferred by the drive pin 1 to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. It is not necessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, the parts can be shared, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The member is displaced with respect to the base member. In this case, in the state where the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are affected by the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, while only the action section of the second groove is from the transmission member. In the state of being acted (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is displaceably arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member, and is connected to a driven member on which the second groove is formed and a driven portion thereof. The gaming machine A2 is provided with a connecting displacement member displaceably arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member and having a decorative portion.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is displaceably arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member, and the driven member on which the second groove is formed and the driven member thereof. Since a connected displacement member that is connected to the driven portion and is displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member is provided, a link structure can be formed by the driven member and the connected displacement member. As a result, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the connected displacement member can be largely relative-displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member is capable of forming a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped with each other.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped with each other. It is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape of the displacement member in the front view.

In the gaming machine A3, the first displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the second displacement member has a posture in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are overlapped with each other. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable on the back surface of the first displacement member at the retracted position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the second displacement member can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member in the retracted position in a posture in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are overlapped. Since it is formed, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape of the first displacement member and the second displacement member arranged at the retracted position in the front view by the amount of the overlap.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member includes an overhanging portion formed by projecting to the opposite side of the decorative portion with a portion displaceable to the first displacement member. A game machine A5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member projects to the opposite side of the decorative portion with a portion displaceable to the first displacement member. Since the overhanging portion to be formed is provided, the overhanging portion can play the role of a weight.

For example, when driving the driven portion and lifting the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member upward, the overhanging portion is formed on the opposite side of the decorative portion, so that the weight of the overhanging portion is used. , The decorative part can be easily lifted upward. Therefore, the overhanging portion can be lifted quickly and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. Further, after the decorative portion is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion and the weight of the overhanging portion can be suspended, so that the decorative portion can be compared with the case where only the decorative portion is formed in the cantilever state. The lifted posture can be stabilized and the driving force required to maintain the posture can be suppressed.

A6 of the gaming machine A5, wherein the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that the driven portion is driven and connected. When the displacement member is displaced, the overhanging portion is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that rattling of the connected displacement member (decorative portion) can be suppressed. In addition, since the overhanging portion that serves as a weight can also serve to suppress rattling by contacting the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape in the gaming machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, so that it is possible to secure the weight and rigidity while reducing the outer shape. it can. Therefore, while the overhanging portion is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, in a state where it cannot be seen from the front), the connected displacement member can be displaced while functioning as a weight and the back surface of the first displacement member. It is possible to surely exert the function of suppressing rattling by contacting with.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member and a protruding portion projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion. The 1-displacement member includes an abutting portion formed so as to be in contact with the protruding portion, and the bearing portion pivotally supports the first displacement member in a raised state from the base member, and the protruding portion has the above-mentioned. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is restricted within a predetermined range by abutting the contact portion.

According to the game machine A8, in the game machine according to any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing portion provides the first displacement member. Since the bearing is supported in a raised state from the base member, it is possible to form a space for arranging the second displacement member between the base member and the first displacement member by such raising. Therefore, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be arranged in a superposed posture.

In this case, according to the gaming machine A8, the base member further includes a protruding portion formed so as to project from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the first displacement member is a contact portion formed so as to come into contact with the protruding portion. The contact portion is brought into contact with the protruding portion, so that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be regulated within a predetermined range. That is, in order to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superposed position, the bearing portion that raises the first displacement member from the base member has relatively high rigidity and is located on the outer peripheral side thereof. When a dead space is formed, a protruding portion is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the contact portion is brought into contact with the protruding portion so that the first displacement member can rotate relative to the base member. The rigidity of the regulated part can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

A9 of the gaming machine A8, wherein the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that when the first displacement member is displaced, By contacting the protruding portion of the base member with the back surface of the first displacement member, rattling of the first displacement member can be suppressed. Further, since the protruding portion having the role of regulating the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can also have the role of contacting the first displacement member and suppressing rattling, the structure can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

In particular, in the gaming machine A9 subordinate to the gaming machine A2, since the second displacement member (driven member and connected displacement member) is arranged on the first displacement member, the first displacement member is the weight of the second displacement member. It is necessary to rotate with respect to the base member while supporting the machine, which tends to cause rattling. Therefore, a configuration in which the protruding portion of the base member is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member to suppress rattling of the first displacement member is effective.

In the gaming machine A9, the one end side of the first displacement member in the longitudinal direction is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protruding portion of the base member is at the edge portion of the first displacement member on one end side in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protruding portion of the base member is one end in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the side edge portion, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, the protruding portion can be arranged at a position where the tilt can be suppressed. As a result, the rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

In the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is continuously provided on the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is continuously provided on the front surface of the base member, so that the rigidity of the protruding portion is increased. Can be done. In particular, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, the rigidity in the direction supporting the tilt (that is, the direction in which the protruding portion is pressed against the front surface of the base member) can be increased, so that the first displacement member rattles. Sticking can be effectively suppressed.

A12 of the gaming machines A12, wherein the base member includes an inclined surface formed by chamfering a ridge line portion on a side surface and a front surface thereof.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the side surface and the ridge line portion of the front surface. 2 It is possible to prevent the displacement member from being locked to the side surface of the base member so that it cannot be displaced. In this case, in the present invention, since the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is displaceably arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member in a cantilevered state, the first displacement member or (and) the second displacement member is When the second displacement member is displaced, the connected displacement member of the second displacement member tends to swing in the direction of being close to and separated from the base member, and the connected displacement member is likely to be locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, a configuration in which the base member is provided with an inclined surface is particularly effective.

In the gaming machine A12, in the second displacement member, the connecting displacement member is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the base member is projected from the front surface thereof and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A game machine A13 characterized by having ridges.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A12, the base member includes a ridge protruding from the front surface thereof and extending along the displacement direction of the second displacement member, so that the tip of the ridge is provided. Can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the second displacement member.

Here, in the second displacement member, since the connecting displacement member is formed of a light-transmitting material, when the connecting displacement member is displaced and visually recognized by the player, the irradiated light is transmitted to produce an effect. Can be enhanced. In this case, when the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the front surface of the base member when the second displacement member is displaced, the connecting displacement member becomes cloudy due to rubbing against the front surface of the base member. The effect of transmitting light from the connected displacement member is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A12, a ridge is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the ridge can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member. Cloudiness due to can be partially. As a result, it is possible to exert the effect of transmitting light through the connected displacement portion.

In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member is provided with a connecting pin that connects the driven member and the connecting displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the ridges of the base member are formed by the second displacement member. The gaming machine A14 characterized in that it is extended along the locus of the connecting pin when it is displaced.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connecting pin that connects the driven member and the connecting displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and has a protrusion of the base member. Is extended along the trajectory of the connecting pin when the second displacement member is displaced, so that the connecting pin can be brought into contact with the protruding tip of the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness due to rubbing against the ridges on the portion of the connecting displacement member made of the light-transmitting material, and to exert the effect of transmitting light through the connecting displacement member. Can be done.

The gaming machine A13 or A14 includes a gear interposed between the driving means and the transmission member, and the base member includes a gear receiving portion for axially supporting the gear in its internal space, and the base member thereof. The gaming machine A15, wherein the gear receiving portion is projected from the front surface of the base member, and the ridge is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13 or A14, the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion protruding from the front surface of the base member, so that the second displacement member is the base. It is possible to prevent the gear receiving portion protruding from the side surface of the member from being locked and unable to be displaced or being hindered from being displaced. In other words, by providing a ridge on the front surface of the base member and extending the ridge to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion, it is possible to project the gear receiving portion from the front surface of the base member. Can be done. As a result, the gears can be stored in the internal space of the base member in a rotatable state while reducing the thickness dimension of the base member. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (that is, the gear is held by the gear receiving portion of the base member, so that the drive shaft of the drive means only needs to be inserted into the gear. ) Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member is a retracted position located in front of the base member. It is formed so as to be displaceable with an overhang position that projects in a direction away from the base member, and the rotation axis of the first displacement member is arranged on the overhang position side of the rotation axis of the transmission member. A game machine A16 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation axis of the first displacement member is the transmission member. Since it is arranged on the overhanging position side of the rotation axis of the above, the area of the first displacement member overhanging to the overhanging position can be made larger, while the first displacement member can be located between the retracted position and the overhanging position. Even in the case of, a transmission member can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it easily invisible to the player.

In the gaming machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is said when the second displacement member is projected to an overhanging position. A game machine A17 characterized in that it is formed so as to be in contact with a bearing portion.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effect of the game machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member has the second displacement member overhanging to the overhanging position. When this is done, the bearing portion of the base member is formed so as to be in contact with the bearing portion, so that the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, since the transmission member having the role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means can also serve as a stopper for restricting the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range, the structure can be changed. It can be simplified and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the bearing portion is a portion for raising the first displacement member from the base member and arranging the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superposed position, and the rigidity is relatively high. When a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side thereof, the transmission member is brought into contact with the bearing portion to ensure the rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member. Therefore, the durability can be improved, the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine A17, when the transmission member is recessed with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion and the second displacement member is projected to the overhanging position, the bearing portion receives the recess. A gaming machine A18 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and when the second displacement member is projected to the overhanging position, the bearing Since the portion is formed receptively in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be secured. In other words, since the position of the rotation axis of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing portion while securing the movable range of the transmission member, the first displacement member retracts while suppressing the outer shape of the first displacement member. During the displacement between the position and the overhanging position, it is possible to easily form a state in which the transmission member is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, a state in which the transmission member cannot be seen from the front).

In any of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted on by the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member and the second. After each of the displacement members is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove is affected by the transmission member, and the non-interference section causes the transmission member to be non-interfering with the first groove. The gaming machine A19 characterized in that the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions. ..

According to the game machine A19, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are each displaced in the first direction, and then the first displacement member is displaced. The 1 displacement member is stopped and the 2nd displacement member is displaced in the second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A18, the inertia associated with the stop of the first displacement member displaced in the first direction. The forces can be canceled by the inertial force when the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. As a result, the load on the parts due to the action of the inertial force can be reduced, and the durability can be improved.

The gaming machine A19 includes one or a plurality of gears that are interposed between the driving means and the transmitting member to transmit a driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A game machine A20 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. Therefore, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the weight is increased. The heavy first displacement member can be stopped first, and the lighter second displacement member can be stopped last. Thereby, the load on the gear can be reduced.

That is, from a state in which the transmission member is driven in the forward direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is second. Since the transition to the state of being displaced in the direction is performed by shifting the transmission member from the transmission section of the first groove to the non-interference section, the rotation of the driving means and the gear is continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, the load on the gear does not occur. On the other hand, the transition from the state in which the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state in which the second displacement member is also stopped is the rotation of the driving means and the gear. However, since the member to be stopped in this case is only the second displacement member having a light weight, the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A20, a third displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the first displacement member is provided, and the third displacement member is displaced by the action of the second displacement member. The gaming machine A21 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine A21, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A20, a third displacement member displaceable is provided on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is the second displacement member. Since it is displaced by the action of the member, the third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a third groove, and the third groove is provided. The gaming machine A22 includes an action section that is acted on by the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere with each other.

According to the game machine A22, in addition to the effect of the game machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member has a third groove. Since the third groove includes an action section that is acted on by the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere, both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. It is possible to form a mode in which only one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

A23 of the gaming machine A21, wherein the second displacement member is displaceably arranged on the third displacement member.

According to the game machine A23, since the second displacement member is displaceably arranged in the third displacement member, when the third displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member, the third displacement member is displaced. By causing the second displacement member to be relatively displaced, the relative displacement of the third displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be superimposed on the relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the third displacement member, and as a result, the first displacement member can be superposed. The amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member can be increased.

<Concept of the invention using the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 as an example>
The base member, the first displacement member displaceable on the base member, the second displacement member displaceable on the first displacement member, and the first and second displacement members thereof. A driving means for generating a driving force for displacement and a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member are provided, and the second displacement member moves with the displacement of the first displacement member. In a gaming machine that is displaced relative to a first displacement member, the connecting member is connected to a connecting first member whose one end is connected to the base member and the other end to the other end of the connecting first member. Along with this, a connecting second member whose one end is connected to the second displacement member is provided, and a connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. A game machine B1 characterized by this.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the first displacement member. There is a gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for displacementing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). -17886 (No. -17886).

According to this gaming machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connecting member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, so that the first displacement member is displaced. , The second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the base member, the connecting member connecting the base member and the second displacement member is exposed, so that the game is played. There is a problem that it becomes visible to a person and the appearance is spoiled.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the connecting member is connected to the first connecting member whose one end is connected to the base member and the other end to the other end of the connecting first member and to the second displacement member. A first displacement member is used as a base because it is provided with a second connecting member to which one end is connected, and the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. Even when the member is displaced in a direction away from the member, the connecting member (connecting first member and connecting second member) can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

In the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member, and the second connecting member of the connecting member is slidably displaced on the first displacement member. The gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member, and the connecting second member of the connecting member can be slidably displaced on the first displacement member. Since it is arranged, when the first displacement member is rotated with respect to the base member, the amount of rotation is large (that is, it is necessary to increase the amount of displacement of the connecting first member and the connecting second member). Even so, it is possible to maintain the state in which the connecting second member of the connecting member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and avoid being visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second connecting member of the connecting member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

Further, even when an electrical connecting wire is wired to the first displacement member, the connecting second member of the connecting member is arranged so as to be slidable on the first displacement member, so that the connecting wire and the connecting second member can be slidably displaced. It is possible to easily suppress the interference with. Therefore, in order to avoid interference, it is not necessary to secure a large space for wiring the connecting wire, and the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a driving body driven by the driving means, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is transferred from the driving body to the connecting first member. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted to the member.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, a driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is generated. Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted from the driving body to the connecting first member, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member.

That is, the connecting member is located between the first displacement member and the base member because the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. When connecting the drive body to the first displacement member, the drive body and the connecting member may interfere with each other. Therefore, it is necessary to connect the drive body to the first displacement member at a position that does not overlap with the displacement locus of the connecting member. There is. Therefore, it is necessary to make the front view shape of the first displacement member a size including the displacement locus of the connecting member and the connecting portion to which the drive body is connected, and the front view shape of the first displacement member is increased by that amount. To do. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member may be set to a size corresponding only to the displacement locus of the connecting member. Since it is not necessary to include the connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member and is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the base member is a base-side engaging member. The displacement side engaging member formed so as to be engaged with the base side engaging member in a state where the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position is the first displacement member or the second displacement member. A game machine B4 characterized in that one is provided.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the connecting member is connected between the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. The base member and the second displacement member are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to incline the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the gaming machine B4, in the connecting member, since the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member, the first displacement member is in the retracted position. With the rotating shaft as the base end, the portion opposite to the rotating shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) becomes the free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation axis (second displacement member side) tends to tilt in the direction away from the base member.

In this case, according to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B3, the base member includes the base side engaging member, and one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member engages on the displacement side. When the member is provided and the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are formed so as to be engageable. It is possible to prevent the portion (second displacement member side) from tilting in the direction away from the base member.

In the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, since the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member, the engagement position between the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member is set to the first. The position can be set relatively away from the rotation axis of the displacement member. Therefore, by utilizing the engagement of the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation axis (second displacement member side) is tilted in the direction away from the base member. It can be effectively suppressed.

In the game machine B5, the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member and the tip of the base portion. Each of the bent portions has an inner surface as an engaging surface, and the first displacement member is displaced from the overhanging position to the retracted position so that the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other. , The engaging surface of the bent portion of the base side engaging member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side, or (and) the engagement of the bent portion of the displacement side engaging member. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engagement tip side thereof.

Here, when the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member as in the game machine B5, the engagement position between the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member is from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since the positions are relatively distant, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member due to the shaking of the first displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the engaging surface of the bent portion of the base-side engaging member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side, or (and) the displacement-side engaging. The engaging surface of the bent portion of the member is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side, that is, the engaging surface of the bent portion and the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member. Since the distance between the two members is wider toward the engagement tip side, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, even if the first displacement member is shaken, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member Can be easily engaged.

Further, according to the gaming machine B6, the engaging surface of the bent portion of at least one of the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member is inclined as described above, so that the first displacement member is directed to the retracted position. When displaced, the second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member as the engaging surface of the bent portion is tilted. As a result, at the retracted position, the protrusion dimension of the second displacement member from the base member can be suppressed, and the rattling of the second displacement member can be absorbed to maintain the posture.

In the game machine B5 or B6, the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member and the tip of the base portion. Each of the bent portions having an inner surface formed as an engaging surface is provided, and the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other by displacement of the first displacement member from the overhanging position to the retracted position. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a bent portion of the other party is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5 or B6, a receiving portion for receiving the bent portion of the opponent is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member. In the state where the displacement member is arranged in the retracted position (the state in which the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are engaged), the bent portion is accepted by the receiving portion and approaches the base member of the second displacement member. Displacement in the direction can be tolerated. Therefore, the vertical dimensions of the base portion of the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are increased to facilitate the engagement between the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, and at the retracted position, the second Displacement of the displacement member in a direction close to the base member can be allowed to prevent damage due to collision.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, when the first displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, the displacement side engaging member is engaged with the first displacement member. The gaming machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B3 to the game machine B7, when the first displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, the displacement side engaging member becomes the first displacement member. It is engaged, that is, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be coupled via the displacement side engaging member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member from rattling with respect to the first displacement member at the overhanging position. Further, the displacement side engaging member, which engages with the base side engaging member at the retracted position to connect the second displacement member to the base member, engages with the first displacement member at the overhanging position to perform the second displacement. Since the member can be combined with the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, an interposing means provided between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is provided, and the interposing means is provided with respect to the base member. The mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member differs depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction. The gaming machine B9 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, an interposing means provided between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is provided, and the interposing means is provided. Is the action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member in the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member. Since the modes are different, the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be determined depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction with respect to the base member. Can be different.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposing means includes a guided portion disposed at one end of the first displacement member or the connecting second member, and one end of the first displacement member or the connecting second member. It is provided on the other side with a guide portion for guiding the guided portion, and the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the second displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that by guiding the guide portion by different paths of the guide portion, the mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is different.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, the interposing means depends on the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member. By guiding the guide portion by different paths of the guided portion, the mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is different. The mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be easily changed. That is, the degree of freedom in the design can be increased.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposing means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is released. The gaming machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, the interposing means causes an action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is released, so that the first displacement with respect to the base member is released. It is possible to make it easy to make the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member significantly different depending on the case where the member is displaced in the first direction and the case where the member is displaced in the second direction.

<Concept of the invention using the center frame 86 as an example>
Displaceable between a gaming board having a gaming area on the front surface and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the gaming board, and an overhanging position visible through the opening. In a gaming machine provided with a displacement member, a center frame formed of a light-transmitting material and incorporated in an opening of the gaming board is provided, and the center frame forms a part of the gaming area. A gaming machine C1 comprising a region forming portion.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area on the front surface and an opening formed in the center, and a tension that can be visually recognized through a retracted position and an opening on the back side of the game board. There is a gaming machine provided with a displacement member that is formed so as to be displaceable between positions (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

According to this gaming machine, the opening of the gaming board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device to secure a visible area for the displacement member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down in the gaming area, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the gaming board, and a region where the displacement member can be visually recognized is provided. There was a problem that it could not be secured sufficiently.

On the other hand, the gaming machine C1 includes a center frame formed of a light-transmitting material and built in the opening of the gaming board, and the center frame includes a region forming portion forming a part of the gaming region. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the region forming portion. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient area where the displacement member can be visually recognized while securing an area for the ball to flow down in the game area.

In the gaming machine C1, the region forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous region from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming region as a part of the gaming region. C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the area forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous region from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming area as a part of the gaming area. Therefore, the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized can be secured as much as possible.

In the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows the passage of only one gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows the passage of only one gaming ball, so that the area forming portion is set to a width that allows the passage of only one gaming ball. That is, it is possible to secure the maximum visible region of the displacement member (without passing through the center frame).

In the gaming machines C2 or C3, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a downstream wall portion that is erected on the downstream side of the region and is integrally formed with the center frame.

Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and nails cannot be planted, the flow speed of the game ball becomes high, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, since the region forming portion of the center frame includes a downstream wall portion erected on the downstream side of the region, the gaming ball flowing down the region forming portion hits the downstream wall portion. Can be touched. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the flow speed of the gaming ball can be reduced to make it easier for the player to see. Further, since the downstream wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and it is not necessary to fasten and fix another part, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. ..

In the gaming machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a side wall portion that is erected in the region to partition a passage through which the game ball flows and is integrally formed with the center frame, and the side wall portion is downstream. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is connected to a wall portion.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a side wall portion that is erected in the region and divides the passage through which the gaming ball flows, and the side wall portion thereof is downstream. Since it is connected to the wall portion, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion that receives the flowing game ball can be increased. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the downstream wall portion. Further, since the connecting wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and it is not necessary to fasten and fix another part, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. .. Furthermore, since the side wall portion of the role of partitioning the passage through which the game ball flows can also serve as the role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. be able to.

The gaming machine C5 includes an inner rail that guides a game ball that is erected and launched from the front surface of the gaming board to the gaming area, and the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail. Machine C6.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the mode in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the inner rail is that the ball collides with the nail and then collides with the inner rail, which is relatively slow and damages the inner rail. There was no problem such as inviting. On the other hand, in the present invention, in order to secure the maximum visible region of the displacement member, the width of the region forming portion forming a part of the gaming region is narrow (for example, only one gaming ball is allowed to pass). Width to be set). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed down at the area forming portion. Therefore, on the upstream side of the region forming portion, it becomes necessary to guide the game ball flowing down the game region toward the region forming portion, and as a result of the guidance, a part of the game ball is on the inner rail at a relatively high speed. There is a risk that the inner rail will bend.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged side by side on the inner rail, the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area is guided toward the region forming portion, and as a result, the gaming ball is directed toward the inner rail. Even if it flows down, it is possible to catch the game ball at the side wall portion and avoid colliding with the inner rail. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, it is possible to suppress bending of the inner rail.

The gaming machine C5 or C6 includes a light emitting means that is arranged on the back side of the region forming portion of the center frame and is formed so as to be able to emit light, and the side wall portion emits light emitted from the light emitting means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to function as a light guide body that guides the gaming region to the front side.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is formed so as to be able to function as a light guide body that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the gaming region. It is possible to exert the effect of the effect. In particular, in the gaming machine C7, which is subordinate to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged side by side with the inner rail, the leakage of light can be reduced by the inner rail, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. .. As a result, the effect of light can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the back surface of the region forming portion of the center frame.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is set to the back surface of the region forming portion of the center frame. Is placed in the retracted position, the displacement member is visible through the region forming portion of the center frame, and the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacement member is guided through the side wall portion. It can be visually recognized. As a result, the effect of producing light can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the region forming portion of the center frame is erected in the region to partition a passage through which the game ball flows down, and a pair of side wall portions integrally formed with the center frame. The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that one or a plurality of protrusions are projected on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and nails cannot be planted in the region forming portion, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions becomes high, and the game ball flowing down is played. It becomes difficult for a person to see.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, one or a plurality of protrusions are projected on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, so that the game ball flows down the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions. In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the protrusion to prevent its flow. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball.

In the gaming machine C9, the gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the protrusions on one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the protrusions on the other facing surface are arranged in a staggered manner.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the protrusions on one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the protrusions on the other facing surface are arranged in a staggered pattern, so that the protrusions are divided into the pair of side wall portions. When a game ball flows down the passage, the game ball can be made to collide with the left and right protrusions alternately to meander the flowing game ball. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball, and the flowing game ball can be made to be orthogonal to the flowing direction. It can be displaced to change the movement of the game ball.

In the game machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a concave groove that is recessed in the front surface thereof and extends in a substantially saw blade shape.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C10, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a concave groove recessed in the front surface thereof and extended in a substantially saw blade shape, so that the region forming portion can be played. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the inner surface of the concave groove to meander. As a result, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. Further, according to the gaming machine C11 which is subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the concave groove can be used as a lens to guide the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front surface of the gaming area, and the effect of the light is exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C11, the concave groove is arranged so that its bent portion is displaced with respect to the protrusion in the flow direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect of the game machine C11, the concave groove is arranged so that the bent portion thereof is displaced from the protrusion in the flow direction of the game ball, so that the game ball flows down the region forming portion. In this case, the game balls that meander by being guided by the inner surface of the concave groove can easily collide with the protrusions alternately. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the concave groove and the action of the protrusion. As a result, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. In addition, the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

In the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge that protrudes from the front surface of the gaming machine C10 and extends in a substantially saw blade shape.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C10, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge protruding from the front surface thereof and extending in a substantially saw blade shape, so that the region forming portion can be played. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the outer surface of the ridge to meander. As a result, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. Further, according to the gaming machine C13 which is subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front surface of the game area by using the convex stripe as a lens, and the effect of the light is exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C13, the convex strip is arranged so that the bent portion thereof coincides with the flow direction of the game ball with respect to the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C13, the ridges are arranged so that the bent portion thereof coincides with the flow direction of the gaming ball with respect to the protrusions, so that the gaming ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the game balls that meander by being guided by the outer surface of the protrusions can easily collide with the protrusions alternately. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the ridges and the action of the protrusions. As a result, the flow speed of the flowing game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. In addition, the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

In any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal side of the concave groove or the ridge is oriented so that its extension direction overlaps with the downstream wall portion and directs the exit of the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions. Characteristic gaming machine C15.

According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal side of the concave groove or the ridge is partitioned by a pair of side wall portions while its extension direction overlaps the downstream wall portion. Since the exit of the passage is directed, the gaming ball guided to the terminal side of the concave groove or the ridge can be made to collide with the downstream wall portion from an oblique direction, thereby suppressing the bouncing of the gaming ball and its addition. While reducing the flow speed, the game ball can flow down toward the exit of the passage. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged from the exit of the passage.

<Concept of the invention using the winning device 65 as an example>
A first seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. The seesaw member in a gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing the game ball on the other end side of the rotation axis. The seesaw member is provided with a guiding means for guiding the game ball to, and the seesaw member is provided with a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means, and the receiving surface is located on one end side of the rotation axis. Game machine D1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered. In addition to forming the first state in which the other end side is raised, the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered in the second state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a gaming ball is dropped on a seesaw member in the first state and the gaming ball is placed between the rotation shaft and the other end side, the weight of the gaming ball causes the gaming ball to be placed. The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form a second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is discharged, the other end side is raised and one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately make the first state and the second state appear, and the effect of the action of displacement one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member up and down is produced. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously dropped, the other end side is lowered and one end side is maintained in the raised second state, and the first state and the second state are obtained. There was a problem that it was not possible to switch between.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, in the seesaw member, since the receiving surface for receiving the gaming ball guided by the guiding means is located on one end side of the rotation axis, the other end side is lowered and one end side is raised. Even in the second state, one end side can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving surface. That is, it is possible to form a first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so that when the gaming ball guided by the guiding means is received in the first state, the gaming ball can be sent to the other end side. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so that when the gaming ball guided by the guiding means is received in the first state, the gaming ball can be sent to the other end side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably switch from the first state to the second state.

The form in which the game ball is formed so as to be able to be sent to the other end side is, for example, a form in which the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end side to the other end side even in the first state, and a protrusion is formed on the receiving surface. An example is a form in which the protrusion is formed in a shape in which the game ball guided by the guiding means is repelled to the other end side.

In the gaming machines D1 or D2, a decorative member that is rotatably supported by an axis is provided, one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member is rotated around a rotation axis of the seesaw member. The gaming machine D3, characterized in that is displaced.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, a decorative member rotatably supported is provided, one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the rotation axis of the seesaw member is centered. Since a link mechanism is formed in which the decorative member is displaced with the rotation, the movable range of the decorative member can be expanded and the effect of the effect can be enhanced by the link ratio.

Here, in order to reliably switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member, the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised when the load is not applied. It is preferable that the seesaw member can be returned at an early stage. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since the decorative member is connected to one end side of the seesaw member, the weight of the decorative member is applied to one end side of the seesaw member to lower the one end side. be able to. Therefore, when the no-load state is reached, the seesaw member can be easily returned to the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and as a result, the seesaw member is in the first state and the second state. It is possible to easily switch between states.

The weight of the decorative member hinders raising one end side of the seesaw member (forming a second state), but since the weight of the game ball is sufficiently heavy, the game ball is from the rotation axis of the seesaw member. By placing the seesaw on the other end side, it is possible to form a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guiding means is provided with a passage through which the gaming ball passes, and a rolling motion in which the gaming ball rolls while being extended in a substantially horizontal direction on the terminal side of the passage. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball that has rolled on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided to a receiving surface of the seesaw member from a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guiding means includes a passage through which the gaming balls pass, so that the passages can be used to store a plurality of gaming balls. , The plurality of game balls can be guided in order from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

However, even in this case, in the form in which the game balls are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member by dropping from above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, these plurality of game balls are on the receiving surface. It is not possible to switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member alternately.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D4, a horizontal passage having a rolling guide surface extending in a substantially horizontal direction and rolling the game ball is formed on the terminal side of the passage, and the horizontal passage is rolled. Since the game balls that have rolled on the motion guide surface are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member from a substantially horizontal direction, they can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member (that is, the receiving surface is horizontal). You can receive one ball at a time from the aisle), and you can avoid stacking multiple game balls on the receiving surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member.

In the game machine D4, the guiding means includes an upstream passage that is connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extends in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and has an extension length of the horizontal passage. The game machine D5 is characterized in that the size is set to be smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the guiding means is provided with an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extended in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage. Since the extended length of the horizontal passage is set to a size smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even if a plurality of game balls are stored in the passage, one game ball is placed on the receiving surface of the seesaw member. It is possible to guide while separating the intervals.

That is, since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, it is possible that only one game ball exists in the horizontal passage, and the extension of the horizontal passage is also possible. Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different, when a ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. The time required for inflow to the horizontal passage can be increased. Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball after the upstream passage flows into the horizontal passage while taking time to change direction, and after that, it takes time. The game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the later game ball is separated from the earlier game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member one by one at intervals.

In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state (a state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered), the receiving surface of the seesaw member rolls in the horizontal passage. Since a step is formed above the guide surface, that is, between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface, the gaming ball that has rolled on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage guides the seesaw member to the receiving surface. When this is done, the gaming ball can be made to ride on the receiving surface (collide with a step), and this riding operation (collision) can be used to make it easier to lower the receiving surface of the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised.

In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. The featured gaming machine D7.

Here, the fact that the seesaw member is in the first state means that the seesaw member is in the no-load state, and the game ball guided from the horizontal passage and received on the receiving surface is promptly sent out to the other end side. It is required that the weight of the game ball acts on the other end side of the rotation axis and the other end side is lowered (forming the second state).

In this case, according to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or the rolling of the horizontal passage. Since it is located below the motion guide surface, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, unlike the case of the second state, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and it is possible to avoid a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly sent out to the other end side, and as a result, it is possible to easily form a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In the first state, it is preferable that the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. When the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, the game ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is dropped onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member. Bounces, which causes a time lag and increases the load on the rotating shaft of the seesaw member due to the impact of dropping.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is formed by bending the other end side of the seesaw member upward in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is bent upward in an abbreviated shape on the other end side in the axial view of the rotation axis. Since it is formed, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

That is, if the seesaw member has an insufficient downward inclination on the other end side of the rotation shaft, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, the other end side is lowered, and the second state is set. The formation time) becomes longer, and the alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. However, if the entire area on the other end side of the rotation shaft is inclined downward, the other end side protrudes from the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member (that is, the space required for the arrangement of the seesaw member becomes large). ). On the other hand, if the length from the rotation shaft to the other end side is shortened so as to fit in the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, that is, Since the other end side is lowered and the time during which the second state is formed is shortened and the formation of the second state is uncertain, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. Further, in order to keep the length from the rotating shaft to the other end side within the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member, the downward inclination of the other end side of the rotating shaft becomes insufficient. ..

On the other hand, by forming the other end side of the seesaw member into a shape that bends upward in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, each of the above-mentioned problems can be solved, and as a result, It is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which a game ball rolled from its rotation axis toward the other end side is provided, and the seesaw member is provided on the other end side of the seesaw member. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that a claw portion formed so as to be able to switch the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolled from the rotation axis toward the other end side toward the inflow port is provided.

According to the gaming machine D9, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, on the other end side of the seesaw member, the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolled from the rotation axis toward the other end side is directed toward the inflow port. Since the claw portion that is formed so as to be switchable in the direction is projected, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the inflow port. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the seesaw member (that is, the time when the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, and the first state and the second state It is possible to suppress the inhibition of alternating switching with.

In the gaming machine D9, the claw portion is unevenly arranged on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D9, the claw portion is arranged on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the rolling position of the game ball is the position of the seesaw member. Even if there is variation in the width direction, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member (that is, the time when the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) It can be made constant and easy.

That is, the game ball that rolls on the back side in the width direction (opposite side of the inflow port) of the seesaw member by arranging the claws unevenly on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member Since the distance to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, the game causes the seesaw member to collide with the claw at an early stage and roll to the inflow port, while rolling the seesaw member in front of the width direction (the side closer to the inflow port). Since the ball has a short distance to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, the collision with the claw portion can be delayed. As a result, in each of the former and the latter, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member can be made as close as possible.

As a result, even when the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member (that is, the other end side is The time during which the second state is formed after being lowered) can be easily made constant.

In any of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which the game ball rolled from its rotation axis toward the other end side is provided, and the width of the inflow port is the diameter of the game ball. The gaming machine D11 characterized in that the dimensions are set to be larger than twice.

According to the gaming machine D11, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which the game ball rolled from its rotation axis toward the other end side is provided, and the width of the inflow port is provided. Is set to a size larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, so that the next game ball is further rolled toward the other end side while the previous game ball is present on the other end side of the seesaw member. In this case, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the inflow port. For example, even when the later game ball collides with the earlier game ball and each of these game balls is simultaneously rolled to the inflow port, each of these game balls can flow smoothly.

In the gaming machine D11, the inflow port is set to a larger dimension on the rotating shaft side than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D11, the inflow port is set to a larger dimension on the rotation shaft side than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member. Even if the next game ball is further rolled toward the other end side and collides with the previous game ball existing on the other end side of the seesaw member, each of these game balls can be smoothly moved to the inflow port. It can be inflowed. That is, even if the game ball after colliding with the previous game ball is flipped up, the height dimension of the inflow port on the rotation axis side is increased, so that height can be used to move the game ball after that. It can be discharged smoothly. On the other hand, even if the earlier game ball collides with the later game ball, it is difficult to be flipped up. Therefore, the height dimension on the other end side is lowered so that the earlier game ball smoothly flows into the inflow port. While making it possible, the space required for the inflow port can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

One of the gaming machines D1 to D12 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member when the seesaw member is arranged in at least the second state. Game machine D13.

According to the gaming machine D13, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D12, a suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member is provided in a state where the seesaw member is arranged in at least the second state. , It is possible to secure a time for the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member to be ejected. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine D13, the guiding means includes an outlet for sending a game ball to the seesaw member, and the suppressing means includes a regulating portion arranged on one end side of the seesaw member with respect to the rotating shaft. When the seesaw member is rotated to at least the second state, at least a part of the regulating portion is projected to the outlet, thereby suppressing the delivery of the game ball from the outlet to the seesaw member. The game machine D14.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D13, the suppressing means includes a regulating portion arranged on one end side of the seesaw member with respect to the rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated to at least the second state. By projecting at least a part of the regulation unit to the delivery port, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member is suppressed, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the seesaw member can also be used as a mechanism for projecting the regulating portion from the outlet, and a driving mechanism for displaceing the regulating portion and a control means for controlling the displacement timing can be eliminated.

In addition, the state in which the regulation unit is projected to the delivery port and the delivery of the game ball is suppressed is when the game machine cannot pass through the delivery port and when the game ball can pass through the delivery port. Both are included. Even in the latter case (passable), the regulation part is projected to the delivery port and the passage width of the delivery port is narrowed, so that the game ball is collided with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the regulation part. Since it is sent from the delivery port, the throwing of the game ball is suppressed. That is, the game balls in a continuous state can be separated.

<Concept of the invention using the winning device 65 as an example>
A first seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. In a gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing the gaming ball on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the rotating shaft is formed. The game machine E1 is provided with a discharge means for facilitating the discharge of the game ball mounted on the other end side of the ball.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered. In addition to forming the first state in which the other end side is raised, the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered in the second state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a gaming ball is dropped on a seesaw member in the first state and the gaming ball is placed between the rotation shaft and the other end side, the weight of the gaming ball causes the gaming ball to be placed. The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form a second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is discharged, the other end side is raised and one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately make the first state and the second state appear, and the effect of the action of displacement one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member up and down is produced. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously dropped, the other end side is lowered and one end side is maintained in the raised second state, and the first state and the second state are obtained. There was a problem that it was not possible to switch between.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the seesaw member includes a discharging means for facilitating discharging the game ball mounted on the other end side, so that the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in the state, the game ball can be discharged from the other end side by the discharging means, the weight of the game ball on the other end side can be removed, and the one end side can be easily lowered. That is, the state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is terminated early, and one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. The first state can be formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine E1, the discharging means includes a shaft support that is rotatably supported by a shaft, a receiving portion that is arranged on one side of the shaft support and receives a game ball guided by the guide means, and a receiving portion thereof. When the receiving portion receives the game ball guided by the guide means, the extruded portion is provided with the extruded portion arranged with the shaft support portion interposed therebetween, and the extruded portion is rotated around the shaft support portion. The gaming machine E2, wherein the portion is projected toward the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, when the receiving portion receives the gaming ball guided by the guiding means, the extrusion portion is a seesaw member due to the rotation around the shaft support portion. Since it protrudes to the other end side, the gaming ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the extrusion portion and discharged from the seesaw member. As a result, the other end side of the seesaw member can be raised by ejecting the game ball by the extrusion portion, and one end side of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving portion. It can be terminated early to make it easier to switch between the first state and the second state alternately. Further, since the receiving portion rotates the discharging means (protrudes the extruding portion) by utilizing the operation of receiving the game ball, it is possible to eliminate the need for a drive mechanism for such rotation and a control means for controlling the rotation timing thereof.

In the gaming machine E2, the discharging means is characterized in that the shaft support portion is rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the discharging means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member, so that the relative position of the discharging means with respect to the seesaw member can be fixed. .. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guide means can be easily received by the receiving portion, the rotation around the shaft support portion can be reliably formed, and the extruded portion projected to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation is played. By making it easier to come into contact with the ball, the game ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, with respect to a virtual plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the seesaw member and the shaft support portion of the discharge means, the discharge means has a larger retractable amount of the receiving portion than the extrusion portion. A game machine E4 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the discharging means has a larger retractable amount than the extrusion portion of the receiving portion, so that the discharging means when the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion. The angle of rotation of the ball can be secured, and the energy received from the received game ball can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to secure the pushing force of the game ball by the extruded portion due to the retreat of the receiving portion. That is, the game ball can be quickly and easily discharged.

On the other hand, since the amount of retreat of the extruded portion is smaller than that of the receiving portion, the rolling locus of the game ball is increased when the game ball that rolls the seesaw member toward the other end side retracts the extruded portion. Can be suppressed, and the game ball can be easily ejected quickly.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharging means is mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft by raising one of the rotating shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction. A gaming machine E5 characterized by facilitating the ejection of placed gaming balls.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E4, the discharge means raises one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction. The angle of downward inclination of the seesaw member from one axial direction to the other in the axial direction of the rotating shaft can be increased so that the game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft can be discharged from the seesaw member. This makes it easy to switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

It should be noted that the fact that one axial direction of the rotating shaft is relatively higher than the other axial direction of the rotating shaft means that it is sufficient if the rising amount of one axial direction is larger than the rising amount of the other axial direction. Therefore, the state after raising may be arranged at a position where one axial direction is lower than the other axial direction.

In the game machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, the discharge means axially one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member. In the second section, which is not raised relative to the other and is closer to the second state than the first section, one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is relative to the other axial direction. A game machine E6 characterized by being raised in a targeted manner.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5, the discharge means is a rotation axis of the seesaw member in the first section when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state. In the second section, in which one of the seesaw members is not raised relative to the other in the axial direction and is closer to the second state than the first section, one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member is in the axial direction of the other. Since it is relatively raised with respect to the above, the second state can be reliably formed, and the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

That is, if the operation of raising one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction is performed from the first section, the discharge of the game ball is accelerated and the second state is surely formed. Can not. On the other hand, if the operation of raising one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction cannot be performed, the discharge of the game ball will be delayed (the residence time will be long), and the second state will occur. It becomes easier to maintain.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is changed to the other axial direction. On the other hand, since the ball is not raised relatively, it is possible to suppress the early discharge of the game ball (that is, to keep the game ball staying) and to make it easier to surely form the second state. On the other hand, in the second section, since one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction, the game ball can be quickly discharged and the game ball is placed. The time (ie, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to smoothly switch between the first state and the second state while ensuring that the second state can be formed.

In the game machine E5 or the game machine E6, in the seesaw member, a cam is formed at least in one of the axial directions of the rotation shaft, and as the rotation shaft rotates, from the axis of the rotation shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by increasing the distance between the two.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed at least in one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. By increasing the distance of the seesaw member, one of the rotating shafts of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other in the axial direction, so that the drive mechanism for operating the rotating shaft and the control for controlling the drive timing thereof are controlled. Means can be eliminated. In addition, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of the first and second sections can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member is provided with a push-up portion arranged on a movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, and the push-up portion hits the seesaw member. The gaming machine E8, characterized in that one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by being brought into contact with the seesaw member.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member is provided with a push-up portion arranged on the movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state. When the push-up portion comes into contact with the seesaw member, one of the rotary shafts of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other in the axial direction. Therefore, a drive mechanism for operating the rotary shaft and its drive are used. The control means for controlling the timing can be eliminated. In addition, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of each section can be increased.

<Concept of the invention as an example of the base side engaging member 12726>
In a gaming machine including a base member and a displacement member whose base end side is rotatably arranged and rotated between a retracted position and an overhanging position, the base member includes a base side engaging member. At the same time, in a state where the displacement member includes a displacement-side engaging member formed so as to be engageable with the base-side engaging member at the retracted position and the first displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, the base. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to see in the front view of the member.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force is applied to a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A directing member having a transmitting member to be transmitted and a driving means for applying a driving force to the transmitting member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement are provided through the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994).

In this conventional gaming machine, a connecting member is connected between the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are located at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. 2 The displacement member is connected by the connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to incline the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the gaming machine F1, the base end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the shaft, while the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) is the free end. Therefore, at the retracted position, the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) tends to tilt (fall forward) in the direction away from the base member due to its own weight and the weight of the decorative portion arranged on the front side.

In this case, according to the game machine F1, in a state where the base member includes the base side engaging member, the displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member, and the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base side engaging member is provided. Since the member and the displacement side engaging member are formed so as to be engageable, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from tilting in the direction away from the base member on the side opposite to the base end side (tip side).

On the other hand, when the base member is provided with the base side engaging member and the displacement member is provided with the displacement side engaging member in this way, when the displacement member is extended to the overhanging position, the front surface of the base member is provided. Is exposed, so that the base-side engaging member is visible to the player, and the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to see in the front view of the base member, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being spoiled.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to appear and disappear in front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to a retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves to the front of the base member. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that when the displacement member is rotated to an overhanging position while being projected from the base member, the base-side engaging member is immersed toward the back surface side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to be able to appear and disappear in front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the overhanging position, the base-side engaging member is engaged. Since the mating member is immersed toward the back surface side of the base member, the base side engaging member can be difficult to see from the player in the front view of the base member, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being spoiled.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member is projected from the front of the base member, so that the height of the displacement-side engaging member protruding from the back of the displacement member is reduced accordingly. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement side engaging member from interfering with other members when the displacement member is rotated. In other words, since the protruding height of the displacement side engaging member can be lowered, a space for displacement of other members can be secured.

The gaming machine F2 includes a driving means for rotationally driving the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base-side engaging member is projected from the front of the base member by the action of the driving force of the driving means. A game machine F3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, a driving means for rotationally driving the displacement member with respect to the base member is provided, and the base-side engaging member is a base member due to the action of the driving force of the driving means. Since it is projected from the front, it can also be used as a driving means to reduce the product cost. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member can also be used as the driving force for projecting the base-side engaging member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for such projecting.

In addition, as a form in which the base side engaging member is projected by the action of the driving force of the driving means, when the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement member directly or indirectly engages the base side. When the member is displaced in the projecting direction or the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is displaced, the base side engaging member is directly or indirectly displaced in the projecting direction by the displacement member. The form to be displaced is exemplified.

The gaming machine F3 is provided with an urging means for urging the base-side engaging member toward the immersion direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the urging force of the urging means acts. The gaming machine F4, wherein the base-side engaging member is returned to the immersion position.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, an urging means for urging the base-side engaging member in the immersion direction is provided, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the attachment is provided. Since the base-side engaging member is returned to the immersion position by the action of the urging force of the force means, it is not necessary to link both the projecting direction and the immersion direction with the action of the driving force of the driving means, and only the projecting direction is linked. Therefore, the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to be retractable from the front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves to the front of the base member. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is rotated to an overhanging position while being retracted from the base member, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front side of the base member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the base side engaging member is retracted from the front of the base member when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position. By engaging the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, it is possible not only to prevent the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) of the displacement member from tilting in the direction away from the base member, but also to prevent the base side engaging member. By narrowing the distance between the engaging surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible to suppress rattling in the front-rear direction on the tip side of the displacement member.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the overhanging position, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base-side engaging member is visually recognized by the player in the front view of the base member. It can be made difficult and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being spoiled.

<Concept of the invention using the clockwise rotation unit 18600 as an example>
The base member, the first displacement member displaceable on the base member, the second displacement member displaceable on the first displacement member, and the first and second displacement members thereof. In a game machine provided with a driving means for driving the first displacement member, the first displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in at least the first direction, and the second displacement member can be brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member. The inertial force that is formed and generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member is allowed to act as a force in the direction that displaces the first displacement member in the first direction. Characteristic gaming machine G1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force is applied to a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. There is a gaming machine provided with a driving means to be provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to form a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced and a mode in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, for example, in the embodiment in which only the second displacement member is displaced, the load of the driving means is relatively small, while in the embodiment in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced. Since the load of the drive means is relatively large, the load of the drive means suddenly changes (increases) when the mode is switched. Therefore, there is a problem that stable (constant) displacement is difficult, such as a decrease in the durability of the drive means and a decrease in the displacement speed when the mode is switched.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the second displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the first displacement member or the base member, and is generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member. Since the inertial force to be applied acts as a force in the direction of displacement of the first displacement member, the first aspect of displacement of the second displacement member is switched to the second aspect of displacement of the first displacement member. At that time, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means. As a result, the durability of the driving means can be improved, the decrease in the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first aspect to the second aspect can be suppressed, and stable (constant) displacement can be easily performed. ..

As the first aspect and the second aspect, for example, the first aspect displaces only the second displacement member, and the second aspect displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, an embodiment in which the first aspect displaces only the second displacement member and the second aspect displaces only the first displacement member is exemplified. In the latter aspect, in particular, when the load required for the change of the first displacement member is sufficiently larger than the load required for the displacement of the second displacement member (for example, the weight of the first displacement member as compared with the second displacement member). Is effective when you think enough).

In the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the directions of the rotation axes of the second displacement member are parallel to each other.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the directions of the rotation axes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are parallel to each other, the inertial force generated when the second displacement member comes into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is generated. As a force that displaces the first displacement member in the first direction, it can be efficiently acted on the first displacement member.

In the gaming machines G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member comes into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a component downward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine G3 characterized by.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member comes into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the direction of gravity. Since the direction includes the heading component, it is possible to easily secure the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

A gaming machine G4 in any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, wherein the first direction is a direction including a component that goes upward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the first direction is the direction including the component going upward in the direction of gravity, so that the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to use the inertial force generated by the contact with the member as an auxiliary force in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction.

In any of the game machines G1 to the game machine G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side and the other end side of the second displacement member is approached to one end side of the first displacement member from a direction opposite to the first direction, the second displacement member The gaming machine G5, wherein the other end side of the machine is in contact with the base member.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is first displaced. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side of the member and the other end side of the second displacement member is approached to one end side of the first displacement member from a direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the base member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the base member is efficiently acted as a force in the direction of displacement of the first displacement member in the first direction. Can be done. That is, when switching from the first aspect of displacement of the second displacement member to the second aspect of displacement of the first displacement member, the action of the inertial force is assisted to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as a force.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, improve the durability of the drive means, and reduce the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be suppressed to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any of the game machines G1 to the game machine G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side of the first displacement member and is approached to one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the second displacement member The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the other end side of the first displacement member is in contact with the first displacement member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is first displaced. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side of the member and the other end side of the second displacement member is approached from the same direction as the first direction to one end side of the first displacement member, the other end of the second displacement member. Since the side is in contact with the first displacement member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is efficiently used as a force in the direction of displacement the first displacement member in the first direction. Can act on. That is, when switching from the first aspect of displacement of the second displacement member to the second aspect of displacement of the first displacement member, the action of the inertial force is assisted to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as a force.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, improve the durability of the drive means, and reduce the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be suppressed to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any of the game machines G1 to G7, a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first displacement member and the second displacement member is provided, and the first displacement member is the drive pin. The second displacement member is provided with a first groove having an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that is connected to the action section and does not interfere with the drive pin, and the second displacement member is an action section that is acted on by the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced by displacement of the drive pin in the first groove and the second groove which are overlapped with each other. Amusement machine G8.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the action section affected by the drive pin and the action section, and the drive pin interferes with each other. Since the second groove of the second displacement member includes at least an action section that is acted on by the drive pin, the drive pin provides a non-interference section of the first groove and an action section of the second groove. By being displaced, the first aspect in which the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in the stopped state, and the drive pin is displaced in the working section of the first groove and the working section of the second groove. As a result, it is possible to form a second aspect in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and it is possible to smoothly shift from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5, and G1 to G8, the gaming machine K1 is a slot machine. .. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5, and G1 to G8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. K2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5, and G1 to G8, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine K3, which is characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and the weight of the game ball is applied to the first state in a no-load state. Then, there are gaming machines that form the second state, respectively (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-283136).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a plurality of gaming balls are continuous, the first state and the second state cannot be switched alternately.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily switching between a first state and a second state.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a seesaw member whose one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is in a no-load state. Then, the first state is formed in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis, so that one end side is raised and the other end side is raised. It forms a lowered second state, and includes a discharge means that facilitates discharge of the game ball placed on the other end side of the rotation shaft.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1. In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the discharging means is arranged on one side of a shaft branch that is rotatably supported by the shaft and the guide means. The receiving portion is provided with a receiving portion for receiving the game ball guided by the guide portion and an extruded portion arranged with the shaft support portion interposed therebetween, and the receiving portion receives the game ball guided from the guiding means. Then, the extruded portion is projected toward the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation about the shaft support portion.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and the discharging means is pivotally supported by the seesaw member with the shaft support portion rotatably supported by the seesaw member.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 61 Inner rail 86, 2086 Center frame 600, 3600, 4600, 5600, 6600, 7600, 18600, 19680 Left rotation unit (displacement member)
610 Back base (base body)
620, 18620 Front base (base body)
620a Inclined surface 621 Bearing recess (gear receiving part)
623 Protruding part (gear receiving part)
626 Convex 627 Bearing part 628 Protruding part 630, 3630, 4630, 5630, 19630 First displacement member 631 Rotating shaft 634 Contact part 635 First groove 635a Action section 635b Non-interference section 640, 3640, 5640, 6640, 7640, 18640, 19640 Second displacement member 641,3641,5641,6641,7641, 1961 Driven member 641b Second groove 6641c, 7641c Connecting groove (third groove)
6641c1 Working section 6641c2 Non-interfering section 3641d, 5641d Connecting pin (drive pin)
642,18642, 1964 Connection displacement member 642b Decorative part 642c Overhang part 643 Connection pin 650 Drive motor (drive means)
651 1st pinion (gear)
652 Rack member (gear)
653 2nd pinion (gear)
654 Transmission member 654a Rotating shaft 654b Drive pin 654c Recessed part (recessed part)
660, 3660, 4660, 5660, 7660 Third displacement member 700, 8700, 9700, 10700, 11700, 12700, 13700, 14700, 15700, 16700, 17700 Right rotation unit (displacement member)
710 Back base (base body)
720, 12720, 13720, 14720, 15720, 16720, 17720 Front base (base body)
726, 1276, 14726, 15726 Base side engaging member 726a Base 726b Bending 727 Receiving recess (receiving part)
730 First displacement member 740, 12740, 16740, 17740 Second displacement member 742, 13742, 16742, 17742 Displacement side engaging member 742a, 13742a, 16742a, 17742a Base 742b Bending portion 743 Receiving recess 8744a Connecting pin (intermediate means, Guided part)
11747 Pinion gear (intermediate means)
750 drive motor (drive means)
754 Transmission member (driving body)
760 First connecting member (connecting member)
770, 8770, 9770 Connecting second member (connecting member)
8773,9773 Guidance unit (intermediate means)
11774 rack gear (intermediate means)
25817 Push-up part (discharge means)
821c Outlet 821d Outlet (inlet)
821e Support shaft (rotation shaft)
824 Intermediate bottom wall (guidance means)
824a Guidance bottom (guidance means, rolling guide surface)
840, 20840 Seesaw member 844 Receiving surface 847 Claw part 20884 Regulatory part (suppressing means)
850 driven member (decorative member)
21870, 22870, 23870 Rotating member (discharging means)
21871 Shaft branch 21872 Receiving plate (Receiving part)
21873 Extruded plate (extruded part)
24877b Cam section (cam, discharge means)
950 Side wall part 960 Downstream wall part 971 Concave groove 972 Protrusion R Region forming part L Extension length of horizontal passage SP1 to SP4 Biasing spring (urging means)

Claims (3)

A first seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. In a gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing the game ball on the other end side of the rotation axis.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a discharging means for facilitating discharging a gaming ball mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft. The discharging means is provided with respect to a shaft support portion rotatably supported by a shaft, a receiving portion disposed on one side of the shaft support portion and receiving a game ball guided by the guide means, and the receiving portion. The extruded portion is provided with an extruded portion arranged with the shaft support portion interposed therebetween, and when the receiving portion receives the game ball guided by the guide means, the extruded portion is rotated around the shaft support portion to cause the extruded portion to be the seesaw member. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is projected to the other end side of the machine. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the discharging means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

Images